LINK: CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL. THE BMW X5 PLUG-IN HYBRID.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 WELCOME TO BMW. Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐ ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information. You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐ board literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐ mation.
NOTES Information ...... 6 Safety of the hybrid system ...... 15 Owner's Manual media ...... 16
QUICK REFERENCE Entering ...... 18 Set-up and use ...... 22 On the road ...... 26
CONTROLS Cockpit ...... 34 Operating state of the vehicle ...... 39 iDrive ...... 43 BMW Remote Software Upgrade ...... 60 General settings ...... 63 Personal settings ...... 67 Connections ...... 72 Opening and closing ...... 81 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ...... 115 Transporting children safely ...... 130 Driving ...... 135 Displays ...... 156 Lights ...... 179 Safety ...... 187 Driving stability control systems ...... 228 Driver assistance systems ...... 234 Driving comfort ...... 285 Climate control ...... 289
4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Interior equipment ...... 304 Storage compartments ...... 315 Cargo area ...... 320
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving ...... 326 Trailer towing ...... 331 Saving fuel ...... 335
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle ...... 342 Refueling ...... 352 Wheels and tires ...... 355 Engine compartment ...... 384 Operating materials ...... 387 Maintenance ...... 394 Replacing components ...... 396 Breakdown assistance ...... 401 Care ...... 409
REFERENCE Technical data ...... 414 Appendix ...... 416 Everything from A to Z ...... 418
© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID7 VI/20, 07 20 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 6
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of information Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Service center lar topic is by using the index. A service center will be glad to answer questions An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in at any time. the first chapter. Internet Validity of the Owner's Manual Vehicle information and general information on BMW, for instance, on technology, are available Production of the vehicle on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Integrated Owner's Manual in the Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ vehicle ences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ Notes on updates can be found in the appendix played on the Control Display. of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
After a software update in the BMW Driver’s Guide app vehicle The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐ cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ and tablets. er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information. BMW Driver’s Guide Web Owner's Manual for Navigation, Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐ Entertainment, Communication formation for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually in‐ The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s ment, and Communication can be obtained as a Guide Web can be displayed in any current printed book from the service center. browser. The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 7
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of or‐ Measures that can be taken to help ange-colored high-voltage components results protect the environment. in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric "..." Texts in vehicle used to select shock. individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the Vehicle features and voice activation system. options ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice activation system. This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐ Action steps ment that is offered in the model series. There‐ Action steps to be carried out are presented as a fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ numbered list. The steps must be carried out in lustrates features and functions that are not the defined order. available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific 1. First action step. version. 2. Second action step. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. Enumerations When using these functions and systems, the Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ native possibilities are presented as a list with served. bullet points. For any options and equipment not described in ▷ First possibility. this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary ▷ Second possibility. Owner's Manuals. Your BMW service center is happy to answer any Symbols on vehicle components questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle. This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 8
NOTES Information
Status of the Owner's ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven. Manual ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents.
Basic information Warranty The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐ Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to erating conditions and registration requirements ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the applying in the country of first delivery, also highest quality and safety standards. In rare known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be cases, therefore, the features described in this operated in a different country it might be neces‐ Owner's Manual may differ from those in your sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing vehicle. operating conditions and registration require‐ ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the Validity of the Owner's Manual homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for Production of the vehicle your vehicle there. Further information on war‐ ranty is available from a service center. At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ Maintenance and repairs ences may exist between the printed Owner's Advanced technology, for instance the use of Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in modern materials and high-performance elec‐ the vehicle. tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair Notes on updates can be found in the appendix work. of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a After a software update in the BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐ vehicle ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐ according to BMW specifications with properly mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐ information. pair shop". If work is performed improperly, for instance For Your Own Safety maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐ quent damage and related safety risks. Intended use Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of compo‐ Heed the following when using the vehicle: nents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result ▷ Owner's Manual. in a safety risk. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers. Parts and accessories ▷ Technical vehicle data. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐ sory products approved by BMW.
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 9
Information NOTES
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a Warning BMW center. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ BMW parts and accessories have been tested by ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐ expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ cles. haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ which are known to the State of California to sories. cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid BMW does not evaluate whether each individual breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ product from another manufacturer can be used cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash hazard, even if a country-specific official approval your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether hicle. For more information go to these products are suitable for BMW vehicles www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Service and warranty Warning We recommend that you read this publication For vehicles sold in California, the law requires thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐ vehicle manufacturers to provide the following ing warranties: warning: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Warning ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ ▷ California Emission Control System Limited cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Warranty. State of California to cause cancer and birth Detailed information about these warranties is defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ listed in the Service and Warranty Information tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and products of component wear contain or emit Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. chemicals known to the State of California to Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ tions and homologation requirements in your lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ country and continental region in order to deliver pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐ known to the State of California to cause can‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐ cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you gine oil contains chemicals that have caused may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐ your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and mologation requirements. You should also be water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 10
NOTES Information
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐ the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ther information. ConnectedDrive account that is used.
Maintenance Operating data in the vehicle Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road Control units process data to operate the vehicle. safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle For example, this includes: Limited Warranty. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ Specifications for maintenance measures: vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational ▷ BMW Maintenance system. speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral ac‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for celeration, engaged safety belt indicator. US models. ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for sensor signals. Canadian models. The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not maintained, this could result in serious damage stored beyond the operating period. to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐ the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐ Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding nical information. Information about the vehicle recommended service intervals for oil changes. condition, component usage, maintenance rec‐ ommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently. Data memory This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environ‐ General information ment, for instance: ▷ Operating states of system components, for Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐ hicle. Electronic control units process data they tery status. receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or components, for instance lights and brakes. provide assistance during driving, for instance ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐ units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. ment of the driving stability control systems. Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ The data is required to perform the control unit cle, in a separate booklet, for example. functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recog‐ nize and correct malfunctions, and helps the ve‐ Personal reference hicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle The majority of this data is stored temporarily identification number. Depending on the country, and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ some circumstances the vehicle may store some cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ data for an additional but limited period of time. sponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to
10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 11
Information NOTES
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐ ▷ Entered navigation destinations. ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐ ▷ Data on the use of Internet services. ance measures, this technical information can be This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐ found on a device that has been connected to cle identification number. the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or A dealer’s service center or another qualified MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it service center or repair shop can read out the in‐ can be deleted at any time. formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ This data is only transmitted to third parties upon sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read personal request as part of the use of online out the data. services. The transmission depends on the se‐ The data is collected, processed, and used by lected settings for the use of the services. the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the Incorporation of mobile devices vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality im‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ provement. vices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be control elements. reset when a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs The sound and picture from the mobile device repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐ Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐ pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐ the vehicle cludes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the General information way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort tion or music playback, work. and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐ There is no further interaction between the mo‐ cle and modified or reset at any time. bile device and the vehicle, such as active access For example, this includes: to vehicle data. ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ How the data will be processed further is deter‐ tions. mined by the provider of the particular app being ▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐ pends on the respective app and the operating If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ system of the mobile device. tertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. Services This includes the following depending on the re‐ spective equipment: General information ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, tos for playback in an integrated multimedia this enables data to be exchanged between the system. vehicle and other systems. The wireless network ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐ an integrated hands-free system or an ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐ integrated navigation system. ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 12
NOTES Information
phones. This wireless network connection tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐ road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐ clude online services and apps supplied by the ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The vehicle manufacturer or by other providers. EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period Services from the vehicle of time, typically 30 seconds or less. manufacturer The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ such data as: turer are concerned, the corresponding functions ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ erating. stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger website. The relevant legal information pertaining safety belts were fastened. to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer’s website. Personal data may be ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the used to perform online services. Data is ex‐ accelerator and/or brake pedal. changed over a secure connection, for instance ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer This data can help provide a better understand‐ intended for this purpose. ing of the circumstances in which crashes and Any collection, processing, and use of personal injuries occur. data above and beyond that needed to provide EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a the services must always be based on a legal nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ permission, contractual arrangement or consent. corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name, data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired Services from other providers during a crash investigation. When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐ conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐ changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR. in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐ tained from the relevant service provider. Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorder EDR General information This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ Depending on the national-market version, the corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to vehicle identification number is located in differ‐ record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐
12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 13
Information NOTES
scribes all positions that are possible for the ser‐ Left nameplate ies.
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle. The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Windshield
Right nameplate
The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.
The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the iDrive vehicle. It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐ tion number via iDrive. Additional information: Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number, refer to page 73.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 14
NOTES Information
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐ tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐ dividual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo‐ tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety- related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐ vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 15
Safety of the hybrid system NOTES
Safety of the hybrid system
Vehicle features and Contact with water options The hybrid system is typically safe even in the following example situations: This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Water in the floor area, for instance after a It also describes features and functions that are rainstorm when the window was kept open. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the allowed to the selected options or country versions. This height. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is Working on the vehicle switched off automatically to prevent risk of dan‐ ger to occupants and other road users. General information Additional information: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends What to do after an accident, refer to page 404. that no changes be made to the vehicle, for in‐ stance the retrofitting of accessories, that will have an effect on the vehicle’s hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER Improperly performed work, in particular main‐ tenance and repair on the high-voltage system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of in‐ jury, fire and danger to life. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐ tenance and repair, be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 16
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information. options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Printed Owner's Manual cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are Concept not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, fered with the series. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as a General information printed book from the service center.
Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals You can use various media formats to call up the Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, content in the Owner's Manual. The following which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐ Owner's Manual media formats are available: erature. ▷ Printed Owner's Manual. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Integrated Owner's Manual Validity of the Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Production of the vehicle Concept At the time of production at the plant, the printed The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ Owner's Manual is the most current resource. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ cle. ences may exist between the printed Owner's The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in on the Control Display. the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix Selecting the Owner's Manual of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. 1. Press the button. After a software update in the 2. "CAR" vehicle 3. "Owner's Manual" After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐ mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ 4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 17
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Scrolling through the Owner's ▷ "Quick link" Manual 2. Press and hold the desired button Turn the Controller, until the next or previous until the displayed bar on the Control Display contents are displayed. has loaded completely.
Context help Executing General information Press the corresponding button. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac‐ The owner's manual is directly dis‐ cessed from any menu. Depending on the se‐ played at the selected entry point. lected function, either the associated description or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's Manual will be displayed.
Opening via iDrive Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button. 2. "Help"
Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Owner's Manual"
Programmable memory buttons
General information The entry points into the Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.
Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive: ▷ "Keyword search" ▷ "Picture search" ▷ "Operating tips" ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Topics"
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing 2. Press the button on the vehicle key. All vehicle access points are locked. Buttons on the vehicle key Buttons for the central locking system
Overview
1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 To open the tailgate 4 Press and hold or press three times in quick succession: panic mode Buttons for the central locking system. Press briefly: pathway lighting Locking Unlocking the vehicle Press the button with the front doors closed. Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐ Unlocking er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Press the button. locked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the Panic mode other vehicle access points. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ self in a dangerous situation. cle key after unlocking. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key pressed. three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. Locking the vehicle 1. Close the driver's door.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 19
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation Concept The vehicle can be accessed without operating Concept the vehicle key. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no- Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your touch activation using the vehicle key you are pants pocket, is sufficient. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key Performing the foot movement when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear of Unlocking the vehicle the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outside of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ hicle key for approx. 1 second.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
With Comfort Access: Depending on the set‐ Driver's door tings, the bottom tailgate also opens.
Closing 1. Without Comfort Access: closing the lower tailgate manually. With Comfort Access: the lower tailgate will be closed automatically with the upper tail‐ gate. 2. Press the button on the inside of the upper tailgate. 1 Safety switch 2 Power windows 3 Central locking system 4 Exterior mirrors Displays, control elements 5 Seats, comfort features 6 Opening/closing the tailgate In the vicinity of the steering wheel Switch console
1 Light switch element 1 Selector lever 2 Turn signal indicator, high beams 2 Controller 3 Instrument cluster 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold 4 Wipers 4 Driving Dynamics Control 5 Start/Stop button Indicator/warning lights 6 Assistance systems
Instrument cluster iDrive The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. Concept Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ The iDrive combines the functions of many tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready switches. These functions can be operated via state is switched on. the Controller.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 21
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens navigation map.
Opens destination input menu for navigation.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐ vation system is active.
No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹.
This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐ vation system is deactivated.
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steering Distance to the back of the head wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint toward the rear. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front. 1 Backrest width 2 Thigh support Side extensions 3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 4 Upper backrest 5 Backrest tilt, head restraint 6 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Height Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐ eral support.
Push switch up or down.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 23
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing 1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐ ing on the button lights up. 3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door while the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings Press the desired button 1 or 2. 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor Infotainment 3 Folding in and out Radio Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 Changing the entertainment source 2 Sound output on/off, volume Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐ 3 Programmable memory buttons tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat 4 Changing the station/track position. 5 Waveband/satellite radio
Memory function Navigation destination input
Concept Entering a destination via quick The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ search essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. 1. Press the button on the Controller. ▷ Exterior mirror position. 2. "Where to?" ▷ Steering wheel position. 3. Enter at least two letters or characters. ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. The search term may be completed automat‐ ically in gray print.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Press or move the controller up to apply the Using the telephone suggested search term. 4. Select the symbol, if needed. Accepting a call Results are displayed in a list. Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can 5. "Search location": select search area. be answered in several ways. 6. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ Via iDrive: 7. Select desired destination. "Accept"
Connecting a mobile phone ▷ / Press the corresponding button on the steer‐ General information ing wheel. After the mobile phone is connected once to the ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster: vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. select: "Accept" ▷ Via touch screen: tap on the corresponding Connecting the mobile phone via entry on the Control Display. Bluetooth ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the 1. "COM" direction of the Control Display. 2. If necessary, select the following setting: "Telephone" Dialing a number 3. "Connect new phone" 1. "COM" 4. To perform additional steps on the mobile 2. If necessary, "Telephone" phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's 3. "Dial number:" manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐ 4. Enter the numbers. tooth device or a new device. 5. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐ The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears tablished via the mobile phone to which this on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐ function has been assigned. tooth name of the vehicle. Establish the connection via the additional tele‐ 5. Depending on the mobile device, a control phone: number is displayed or the control number must be entered. 1. Press the button. ▷ Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control 2. "Call via" number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the device Apple CarPlay preparation and on the Control Display. Concept ▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ber on the device and via iDrive. CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation The device is connected and displayed in the and iDrive. device list.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 25
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Functional requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone. iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. ▷ The data connection may have to be acti‐ vated on the smartphone. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation are activated on the iPhone. ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. "New device" 4. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. A control number is displayed. 6. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. 7. Select CarPlay: "Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving Buttons in the vehicle
Button Driving mode Drive-ready state In HYBRID STANDARD and HYBRID Switching on drive-ready state ECO PRO, the vehicle is moved in hybrid mode, i.e., the drive combines the combustion engine and electric motor.
In ELECTRIC STANDARD and ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL, the vehicle 1. Depress the brake pedal. is driven exclusively electrically. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL can be Drive-ready state is activated: specified as the default mode. ▷ Starting of combustion engine. With BATTERY CONTROL, the elec‐ ▷ Drive-ready state for electric driving without tric range can be maintained and starting the engine. conserved for a later point in the trip or increased as needed. Switching off drive-ready state 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Auto Start/Stop function hicle stopped. The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The system switches off the combustion engine The engine is switched off. when conditions for electric driving have been met. The standby state remains on. READY is 3. Set the parking brake. displayed in the instrument cluster. If necessary, the combustion engine starts automatically. Hybrid system driving modes Parking brake Overview Setting Pull the switch. The LED on the switch and the indicator light in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
Releasing With drive-ready state switched on: Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 27
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
The LED and indicator light go out. Releasing the selector lever lock The parking brake is released.
Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐ cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is exited.
Steptronic transmission Press the button. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R Engaging P Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Drive mode D. ▷ Neutral N. ▷ R is reverse. Press button P. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a Steptronic transmission, Sport resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐ program and manual mode turns to the center position in each case. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ vertent shifting from selector lever position P. Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. Activate the Sport program/manual mode: Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. Manual mode:
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ The high beams light up when the low beams ward. are switched on. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
End the sport program/manual mode: Push the selector lever to the right. Lights and lighting
Turn signal, high beams, Light functions
headlight flasher Symbol Function Turn signal Front fog lights.
Night vision.
Lights off. Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point. ▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point Automatic headlight control. in the opposite direction. Adaptive light functions. ▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the Low beams. lever up or down. ▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there for as long as you Instrument lighting. want the turn signal to flash.
High beams, headlight flasher Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward. ▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 29
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Wiper system Rain sensor
Switching the wipers on/off and Activating/deactivating brief wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1. To deactivate: press the lever back into the Press the lever up until the desired position is standard position. reached. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0. Adjusting the sensitivity ▷ Rain sensor: position 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off and brief wipe
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Press the lever down. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Rear window wiper Button Function
Switching on Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog the wind‐ shield.
Rear window defroster.
Active seat ventilation. Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. Seat and armrest heating. ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ Climate control operation. tinuous operation. Opening the Climate menu. For example, for the following Clean the rear window settings: upper body tempera‐ ture adjustment, parked-car ven‐ Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. tilation. ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released. Intermediate stop ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. Charging the vehicle
Connecting Climate control Charging socket flap Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program. The charging socket flap is located on the left side of the vehicle. Recirculated-air mode.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 31
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐ Charging cable is unlocked. structed. 2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐ Keep the charging socket flap closed when the row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the charging socket is not used. gripping areas.
Connecting a charging cable To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐ cle. Set the parking brake, if needed. 1. To open the charging socket flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket flap opens.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐ ing socket, arrow 2. 4. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐ gages. 5. Attach cover of the charging cable connector, if needed. 6. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable 2. Connect the Level 1 charging cable to the from the port on the charging station as appli‐ household socket or the Level 2 charging ca‐ cable. ble to the port on the charging station. 7. Stow the charging cable. 3. Insert the appropriate charging cable connec‐ At a charging station, insert the permanently tor, and push it in until it engages. installed charging cable in the place provided for it. Removing Refueling General information When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is Venting the tank locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as cable. a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐ If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐ pated before the fuel cap is opened. ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance The button is located on the driver's floor area. from snow, before removing it. 1. Switch off drive-ready state. Disconnecting a charging cable 1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is 2. Press the button to start the pressure locked. equalization. The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting can last several minutes.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
When tank venting has finished, a message is Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel With Tire Pressure Monitor: cap is released for opening. The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied 3. Open the fuel filler flap. automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐ If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap tings have been made. after tank venting, press the button again. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire flap even after pressing the button again, un‐ Pressure Monitor TPM. lock the fuel filler flap manually. Checking the tire inflation pressure Fuel cap Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear correct it as needed: edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. ▷ At least twice a month. ▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels The friction during hard braking may produce brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐ ucts from BMW.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Electronic oil measurement 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Functional requirements A current measured value is available after ap‐ Gasoline prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐ For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should bustion engine running. be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ Displaying the engine oil level taining metal must not be used. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" Wheels and tires 3. "Engine oil level" Tire inflation pressure specifications Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐ play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐ The tire inflation pressure specifications can be tion to these messages. found in the tire inflation pressure table in the printed Owner's Manual. Adding engine oil After correcting the tire inflation General information pressure Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready With runflat tires: state before adding engine oil.
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 33
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Adding engine oil ConnectedDrive
Concierge service The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Assist Response Center. 1. "COM" Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ 2. "BMW Assist" played in the instrument cluster. 3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con‐ Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐ cierge Service. sage. A voice connection to the Concierge service is Take care not to add too much engine oil. established. Observe recommended engine oil types. Teleservices Teleservices are services that help to maintain Providing assistance vehicle mobility. Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐ Hazard warning flashers ices: ▷ BMW Roadside Assistance. ▷ BMW Accident Assistance. ▷ Service Request. ▷ Teleservice Report. ▷ Teleservice Battery Guard. ▷ Your dealer’s service center.
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" 3. "BMW Assist" 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established.
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 34
CONTROLS Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. served. It also describes features and functions that are
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Window safety switch 111 Unlocking
2 Power windows 110 Locking
3 Exterior mirror operation 122 5 Seating comfort features 4 Central locking system 96
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 35
Cockpit CONTROLS
Front passenger seat functional‐ Cruise control: to store the speed ity 118 Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐ gested speed 247 Memory function 125 Pause or continue cruise control
Massage function 126 Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐ tance 6 Opening and closing the tail‐ Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐ gate 102 tance
7 Steering column stalk, left Cruise control rocker switch Turn signal 147 10 Instrument cluster 156 11 Steering wheel buttons, right High beams, head‐ Selection lists 173 light flasher 147
High-beam Assistant 182 Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Widgets in the instrument clus‐ Communication 6 ter 158 Voice activation system 51 Trip data 174 8 Shift paddle Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and 9 Steering wheel buttons, left Communication 6 Speed Limiter 234 Thumbwheel for selection lists 173 12 Steering column stalk, right Depending on the equipment: Wipers 147 Cruise control on/off 236
Rain sensor 148
Depending on the equipment: Cleaning the windshield 149 Active Cruise Control on/off 238 With steering and traffic jam assis‐ Rear window wiper in Canadian tant 249: models 149 Cruise control, distance control and lane guidance on/off
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 36
CONTROLS Cockpit
Rear window wiper 149 Parking lights 180
Clean the rear window 149 Automatic headlight control 179 Adaptive light functions 182 High-beam Assistant 182 13 Horn, entire surface Low beams 180
14 Heated steering wheel 125 Instrument lighting 185
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 124 Right roadside parking light 180
16 Glove compartment 316 Left roadside parking light 180 17 Lights Front fog lights 184 18 Unlocking the hood 385
Night Vision 206 19 Tank vent 352
Light switch 179
Lights off Daytime running lights 181
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 37
Cockpit CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 47 9 Parking brake 143 2 Hazard warning system 401 Automatic Hold 145 Intelligent Safety 191
10 Driving Dynamics Control 140 3 Ventilation 294 SPORT drive mode 4 Glove compartment 315 HYBRID drive mode 5 Automatic climate control 289
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for ELECTRIC drive mode Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ tion 6 7 Controller with buttons 47 ADAPTIVE drive mode 8 Air suspension level adjust‐ ment 285 11 Switching drive-ready state on/ HDC Hill Descent Control 231 off 137
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 38
CONTROLS Cockpit
12 BATTERY CONTROL 135 drive Surround View: Panorama mode View 266
PDC Park Distance Control 258 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Without Surround View: rearview trol 228 camera 264 13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 150 Surround View 266 Cross traffic warning 281 Parking assistant 274
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 403 4 Reading lights 185
2 Glass sunroof 112 5 Interior lights 185
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 190
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 39
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Vehicle features and Safety information options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. It also describes features and functions that are Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing. to the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ against rolling away, follow the following: tems. When using these functions and systems, ▷ Set the parking brake. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock. of the three states: ▷ Idle state. ▷ Standby state. Warning ▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Idle state following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Concept ▷ Releasing the parking brake. When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ off. All power consumers are deactivated. dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. General information ▷ Using vehicle equipment. The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the outside and after exiting and locking. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state The idle state is automatically established under the following conditions:
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 40
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes General information place on the vehicle. The vehicle is in the standby state after the front ▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is doors are opened from the outside. low. ▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of Display in the instrument cluster the front doors is opened when exiting the OFF is displayed in the instru‐ vehicle. ment cluster. The drivetrain is The idle state is not automatically established switched off and standby state while a phone call is active. switched on. Establishing idle state when opening the front doors 1. "CAR" Drive-ready state 2. "Settings" Concept 3. "Doors/Access" The following are the different drive-ready state 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" variants: Manual idle state ▷ Electric drive-ready state. The vehicle is powered by the electric motor. To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of trip: ▷ Starting of combustion engine. The vehicle is powered by the combustion engine.
Safety information
DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ Press and hold the button until tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ the OFF indicator on the instru‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ ment cluster goes out. late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation.
Standby state Warning When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and Concept other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐ When standby state is switched on, most func‐ hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary. risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic Desired settings can be adjusted.
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 41
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ tervene where appropriate. strument cluster illuminate for a varied length of time depending on the duration of the sys‐ tem check. Warning Depending on the prerequisite, the electric drive- An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and ready state or a combustion engine start is pos‐ possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. sible. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. Electric drive-ready state In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: General information ▷ Set the parking brake. The vehicle is ready for driving without starting the combustion engine. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the Functional requirements curb. Electric drive-ready state is possible, if the pre‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, requisites for electric driving are fulfilled. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Additional information: BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
Warning Display in the instrument cluster Unattended children or animals in the vehicle When the drive-ready state is can cause the vehicle to move and endanger switched on, READY is displayed themselves and traffic, for instance due to the in the instrument cluster. following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Combustion engine start dows. Functional requirements ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. The combustion engine is started under the fol‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment. lowing conditions when the drive-ready state is There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not switched on: leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is too hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ high or too low. ing and lock the vehicle. ▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient charge. Switching on drive-ready state 1. Close the driver's door. Switching off drive-ready state After stopping the vehicle: 2. Depress brake pedal. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. 1. Engage selector lever position P. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 42
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
3. Set the parking brake. After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises due to operation of the hybrid system, such as for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 43
iDrive CONTROLS
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display options Main menu
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ General information cific and optional features offered with the series. The main menu is divided into two areas. The It also describes features and functions that are left area contains menu items that can be used not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area to the selected options or country versions. This contains widgets that provide quick access to also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ certain functions. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served.
Operating concept
Concept iDrive includes a large number of functions. These functions can be operated via the Control‐ ler and, depending on the equipment version, via Media/Radio touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture control. All functions of the entertainment system, e.g., radio stations or connection with external Safety information devices. Communication Warning Phone and message functions, e-mail and Operating the integrated information systems calendar, and also the connection and manage‐ and communication devices while driving can ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones. distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only Navigation use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ Access to the navigation system, destination uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ views and other functions, such as points of in‐ tionary. terest and areas to be avoided.
My Car Information about vehicle status and trips. Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and also administration of driver profiles and range of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 44
CONTROLS iDrive
Apps Activating/deactivating the Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐ functions hicle functions. Additional apps can be pur‐ Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ chased from the BMW Store. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the Widgets menu item activates or deactivates the function. Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ Function is activated. quently used functions. The configured widgets Function is deactivated. display dynamic contents such as the navigation map, and serve as interfaces at the same time. Status information Letters and numbers General information Letters and numbers can be selected when the The status field can be found in the upper area of destination is inputed, for example. the Control Display. Status information is dis‐ Letters and numbers can be entered using the played in the form of symbols. Controller and, depending on the equipment ver‐ sion, via touchscreen or voice activation system. Radio symbols The keyboard's display changes automatically. Symbol Function Symbol Meaning
Change between capital and HD Radio station is being received. lower-case letters. Satellite radio is switched on. Enter a blank space. Telephone symbols Switching between languages.
Use voice activation. Symbol Meaning
Confirm entry. Incoming or outgoing call.
Slide the input area to the left or Missed call. right. Signal strength of cellular network.
Entry comparison Network search. When entering names and addresses, the choice Cellular network is not available. is narrowed down with every letter and number The critical charge state of the mo‐ and added automatically as needed. bile phone has been reached. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. Roaming is active. ▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered Locating is active. during entry for which data is available. SMS text message received. ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ tered in all languages that are available in Message received. iDrive.
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 45
iDrive CONTROLS
Symbol Meaning Programmable memory buttons
Reminder. General information Sending not possible. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Entertainment symbols rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐ tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or Symbol Meaning pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual. Settings are stored for the driver profile currently Bluetooth audio. used. USB device. Overview WLAN.
Apple CarPlay.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
Sound output active.
Sound output deactivated. Programmable memory buttons
Voice activation system active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐ Storing a function tion. A function can be stored on a programmable memory button. A button with a stored function Checking the current vehicle posi‐ can be overwritten with another function. tion. 1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio Driver profile. station. Messages. 2. Press and hold the desired button Service notifications. until the displayed bar on the Control Display Information. has loaded completely.
Stop. Executing a function Data protection. Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 46
CONTROLS iDrive
Displaying the key assignment Control Display Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. Safety information The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display. NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Control Deleting all button assignments Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐ All button assignments can be deleted. play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the 1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same Control Display. time. 2. "OK" Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is switched on automatically Control Display and when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Controller Control Display is needed for operation. In certain situations, the Control Display is Concept switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐ eration is performed on the vehicle for several The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control minutes. Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐ ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen. Switching on/off manually Overview The Control Display can also be switched off manually. 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Screen off" Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐ troller to switch it back on again.
System limits In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar 1 Control Display with touchscreen radiation, the brightness may be reduced down 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Controller
General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 47
iDrive CONTROLS
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the Buttons on the Controller touchpad on the Controller. Button Function Operation Opens the main menu. ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ ample. Opens the Apps menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens navigation map.
Opens destination input menu for ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. navigation.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller ▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐ plays, for example. Opening the main menu Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 48
CONTROLS iDrive
Selecting a menu Adjusting contents Depending on the equipment, the contents of Selecting menu items menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐ 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu justed, for instance to remove the entries of item is highlighted. functions that are not used from the menu. 2. Press the Controller. 1. Select the menu. 2. "Personalize menu" Select a widget 3. Select the desired setting. 1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the right. Changing between displays 2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is After a menu item is selected, for instance selected. "Settings", a new display appears. 3. Press the Controller. ▷ Move the Controller to the left. It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐ The current display closes and the previous ment cluster. display is shown.
Adjusting the menu ▷ Press the button. The previous display re-opens. Adjusting widgets ▷ Move the Controller to the right. The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ The new display opens. ets and switch between pages. The adjustments An arrow indicates that additional displays can be can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ opened. tionary. 1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Opening the Options menu Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ Press the button. justed. 2. Tip the Controller up. The "Options" menu is displayed. 3. "Adjust main menu" The menu consists of various areas, for instance: 4. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected ▷ Symbol and select desired widget: add main menu. new widget. ▷ "Help": help for the selected menu. The requested widget will be inserted in ▷ "Display off": system settings. the relevant position. A maximum of four widgets can be displayed per page. Entering letters and numbers ▷ Select symbol: delete selected widget. ▷ Add new page: "Add page". Input ▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". 1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number. ▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select 2. : confirm entry. widget. 5. "Done" 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 49
iDrive CONTROLS
Deleting Entering letters and numbers ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Symbol Function Control Display. Press the Controller: delete letter or ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as number. accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers. ▷ The set language determines what input is possible. Where necessary, enter special characters via the Controller. Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, Entering special characters the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ played in a text box. Input Operation
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. ter. touchpad. The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the played in the list. space. center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐ Operation via touchpad per area of the touchpad. Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the General information score. lower area of the touchpad. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller. Using the map The map in the navigation system can be moved Selecting functions via the touchpad. 1. "CAR" Function Operation 2. "Settings" Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ 3. "General settings" rection. 4. "Touchpad" Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐ 5. Select the desired setting: map. pad with fingers. ▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐ bers. Display menu. Tap once. ▷ "Map": use the map. ▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐ lecting the list field. Operation via touchscreen ▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered letters and numbers. General information The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ screen.
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 50
CONTROLS iDrive
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch Showing/hiding the display bar the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐ In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐ jects. sible to show or hide a display bar with additional functions. Opening the main menu ▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐ Tap on the symbol. play bar at the top edge of the screen. ▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Swipe to the left. ▷ Tap arrow. Adjusting widgets The new display opens. The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ Entering letters and numbers ets and switch between pages. The adjustments can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ Input tionary. 1. When approaching the touchscreen, a key‐ 1. Select the desired page in the main menu. board appears on the Control Display. Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ 2. Enter desired letters and numbers. justed. 2. Tap the symbol in the main menu. Deleting 3. Select the desired adjustment: Symbol Function ▷ Tap symbol and select desired widget: add new widget. Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐ The requested widget will be inserted in ter or number. the relevant position. A maximum of four Tapping and holding the symbol all widgets can be displayed per page. letters: deletes all letters or numbers. ▷ Tap symbol: delete selected widget. ▷ Add new page: tap "Add page". Using the map ▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page". The navigation map can be moved using the ▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of touchscreen. widget. 4. Tap "Done".
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 51
iDrive CONTROLS
Function Operation Activating the voice activation system Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ rection. General information Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ There are various methods for activating the map. gers. voice activation feature: Display menu. Tap once. ▷ Press the button on the steering wheel. Operation via voice ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal wake word. Concept ▷ Active voice processing. The voice activation system can be used to op‐ This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐ erate functions with spoken commands. The vation system is active. system supports you with announcements dur‐ ing input. Then say the command. No other commands may be available. In this case, operate the func‐ The voice control system and the feedback it tion via iDrive. provides are not a substitute for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual. The voice activation can be terminated:
General information ▷ Press the button on the steering wheel again. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ ▷ ›Cancel‹ hicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ This symbol indicates that the voice acti‐ tent. vation system is deactivated. ▷ The system includes special microphones on the driver side and the front passenger side. Button on the steering wheel ▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice activation system. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. Functional requirements 2. Wait for the signal. ▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐ 3. Say the command. ported by the voice activation system. To set the language, refer to page 64. Wake word ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. General information Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ sonal wake word will start the system.
Preset wake word The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐ vated and deactivated.
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 52
CONTROLS iDrive
›Hello BMW‹ activates the preset and personal Possible commands wake word. 1. "CAR" General information 2. "Settings" Most contents on the Control Display can be spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐ 3. "General settings" tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as 4. "Voice control" they are shown in the list. 5. "Activation with "Hello BMW"" Say the commands and numbers fluently as well as with normal volume, emphasis, and speed. Personal wake word The status of the voice recognition is displayed In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a in the upper area of the Control Display. personal wake word can be set up.
1. "CAR" Function examples 2. "Settings" Menu items 3. "General settings" The commands of the menu items are spoken 4. "Voice control" just as they are selected via the Controller. 5. "Personal wake word" 6. "Start recording" 1. Press the button on the steering For "Start recording", online speech process‐ wheel. ing must be available and activated. Alterna‐ 2. ›MEDIA‹ tively, the personal wake word can be entered 3. ›Presets‹ using the Controller. The stored stations are displayed on the Control 7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ Display. play. Navigation Active voice processing Destinations can be entered in the navigation system using the voice activation system. It is General information also possible to say points of interest or have Active voice processing recognizes keywords traffic reports announced. that are spoken in the car's interior. For instance, ▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road, if the name of a city is named, information for the Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey‹ navigation will be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. ▷ ›Take me home‹ ▷ ›Are there any traffic messages‹ Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" Communication 2. "Settings" For example, when a mobile phone is connected, the voice activation system can be used to start 3. "General settings" calls or send SMS. 4. "Voice control" ▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone‹ 5. "Active speech processing" ▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7‹
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 53
iDrive CONTROLS
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right Settings there‹ Setting the voice control Media and Radio You can set the system to use standard dialog or Most radio functions can be used via the Active a short version. Voice Recognition. The short version of the voice control plays back ▷ ›Turn on music‹ short messages in abbreviated form. ▷ ›Music off‹ 1. "CAR" ▷ ›Next title‹ 2. "Settings" Climate control 3. "General settings" Most climate control functions can be used via 4. "Voice control" voice. 5. "Response length" ▷ ›Activate climate control‹ 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ ›Deactivate air recirculation‹ ▷ ›Temperature [...] at ...‹ Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the Help on the voice activation system voice activation system. The function can be de‐ activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ ▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐ rupted, for instance due to background noise or ken commands announced. conversations in the vehicle. ▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have information on the operating principle of the 1. "CAR" voice activation system read out loud. 2. "Settings" ▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read 3. "General settings" out loud. 4. "Voice control" Information for Emergency 5. "Speaking during voice output" Requests Online speech processing Do not use the voice activation system to initiate Online speech processing provides a dictation an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, function, a natural method of destinations input the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can and improves the quality of voice recognition. To unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele‐ use the functions, data is transmitted to a service phone connection. provider via an encrypted connection and stored Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior locally there. mirror. 1. "CAR" Additional information: 2. "Settings" Emergency Request, refer to page 403. 3. "General settings" 4. "Voice control" 5. "Online speech processing"
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 54
CONTROLS iDrive
Adjusting the volume ▷ Vehicle added in the BMW Connected app. Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ ▷ Third-party account and BMW account are structions until the desired volume is set. linked in the BMW Connected app. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐ ▷ Smartphone connected to the vehicle via ume of other audio sources is changed. Bluetooth. ▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile currently used. Activation in the BMW Connected app Using the voice activation Third-party assistants are set up in the BMW system of the smartphone Connected app. Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐ Follow the instructions in the app. nected to the vehicle can be used via voice acti‐ vation. Activation in the vehicle Activate voice command response on the smart‐ An authorization for the use of the voice assistant phone for this purpose. is required every time before starting a trip. 1. Authorizing voice assistants from third-party 1. Press and hold the button on the providers: steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. ▷ Connect the smartphone to the vehicle Voice command response is activated on the via Bluetooth. smartphone. ▷ Selects appropriate driver profile. Driver profiles, refer to page 68. 2. Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ 2. If necessary, press the button on the pears on the Control Display. steering wheel and wait for signal tone. 3. Say the specific activation word of the third- Voice assistants from third-party party provider and the desired command. providers Information about the active function is dis‐ played on the Control Display. Concept Some third-party providers provide digital voice Activation/deactivation of the assistants. Supported voice assistants can be specific activation word used in the vehicle. In addition to the activation word of the voice ac‐ tivation system, the specific activation word from General information the third-party provider can be activated or deac‐ Some of the functions are limited in the vehicle tivated. to prevent any impairment of safety while driving. 1. "APPS" Functional requirements 2. "Installed apps" ▷ Connected Voice Services purchased via 3. "Personal assistant" ConnectedDrive Store. 4. "Voice control" ▷ Same ConnectedDrive account used in the 5. "Wake word" vehicle and in the BMW Connected app.
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 55
iDrive CONTROLS
6. "Activation by speech" ▷ In the Guest profile: the variant is linked to a 7. Select the desired setting. vehicle and cannot be personalized. Not all described functions are available to the full Malfunction extent. In case of a malfunction, switch off the drive- ▷ With active Driver profile: the variant can be ready state and restart again. used and personalized in different vehicles. All described functions are available to the full System limits extent. ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead Functional requirements to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed. Enter the following settings to access the full range of functions: ▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear seat bench can impair the system. Avoid ▷ The Driver profile is activated. making other noise in the vehicle while ▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services have speaking. been purchased via ConnectedDrive Store. ▷ Major language dialects can cause problems ▷ Registered in the ConnectedDrive Store. with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud ▷ "Online speech processing" is activated. and clear. ▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under "Personalization" is activated. BMW Intelligent Personal Data protection, refer to page 67. Assistant ▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" activated. Data protection, refer to page 67. Concept BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is the per‐ Example for function sonal assistant that expands the voice activation 1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal system with intelligent functions and improves wake word. the interaction in the vehicle. 2. ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹ General information The personal assistant provides information BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available about the tire pressure. depending on the national-market version. The use of the personal assistant is based on voice Settings operation. The voice operation is enhanced with personal recommendations and messages as Display, notifications well as the automation of routines. The personal assistant is connected to other dig‐ General information ital services such as the Concierge service and is Depending on the situation, different conditions continually being developed. The full scope re‐ can be activated. quires an active driver profile. The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐ ble in two variants:
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 56
CONTROLS iDrive
Condition Description Functional requirements ▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in the "Do not disturb" Incoming calls and some vehicle. messages are not displayed. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. "Passenger on Private contents, such as board" sender and content of e- Selecting a mode mails, will not be displayed. 1. "CAR" 2. "Experience Modes" Activating/deactivating 3. Select the desired mode. 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" Deactivating 3. "Personal assistant" 1. "CAR" 4. "Notification display" 2. "Experience Modes" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "End"
Automating routines Adjusting the mode 1. "CAR" General information 2. "Experience Modes" The personal assistant can learn routines, e.g., 3. Select the desired mode. the automatic activation of the seat heating from a specific external temperature. Rules are cre‐ 4. "Settings" ated for this purpose, which can be activated and 5. Make the desired setting. deactivated at any time. Caring Car Creating a rule 1. "APPS" General information 2. "Installed apps" Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are 3. "Personal assistant" harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐ gram. A program takes 3 minutes. 4. "Automate habits" 5. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" Functions 2. "Caring Car" Experience Modes 3. Select the desired channel. The program can be stopped prematurely: General information "End program" The Experience Modes combine different vehi‐ cle functions in the car's interior to an overall ex‐ Connected Command perience. For example, the selection of a mode harmonizes the ambient light and seat climate General information control. Connected Command enables passengers to control different functions in the vehicle via
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 57
iDrive CONTROLS
smartphone and the BMW Connected App and BMW Gesture Control receive information about the trip.
Functional requirements Concept ▷ The smartphone is connected to the vehicle Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand via Bluetooth and WLAN. motion using BMW Gesture Control. ▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on the smartphone. Overview
Managing rights 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Select the desired setting for the respective device.
Owner's Manual via voice operation
Concept The camera in the roofliner detects gestures that are carried out in the area of the center console You can ask simple questions about vehicle at the height of the Control Display. functions and the operation of the vehicle.
General information Activating/deactivating The voice control system and the feedback it 1. "CAR" provides are not a substitute for the printed or 2. "Settings" Integrated Owner's Manual. The voice recogni‐ 3. "General settings" tion and quality of the feedback may vary. 4. "Gesture control" The system supports questions that begin with 5. "Gesture control" How or What.
Example for function Settings 1. ›Hello BMW‹ 1. "CAR" 2. ›How can the passenger airbag be 2. "Settings" deactivated‹ 3. "General settings" The voice activation system returns a feedback. 4. "Gesture control" When stationary, the section of the integrated 5. Select the desired setting. Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Carrying out gestures ▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐ ror and next to the steering wheel. ▷ Execute gestures clearly. ▷ The gestures can also be executed from the front-passenger side.
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 58
CONTROLS iDrive
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call. rection of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list during voice activation. Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Dis‐ Reject call. play in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close pop-up. Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern Increase the volume. with the index finger stretched out forward. Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐ Reduce the volume. lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐ ward. Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand Surround View: turn camera horizontally to the right or left. view. This gesture can only be exe‐ cuted while the vehicle is station‐ ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ Individually assignable gesture. ward.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back Reverse Skip function. and forth. The previous music track is played.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 59
iDrive CONTROLS
Gesture Operation Function
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back Forward Skip function. and forth. The next music track is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five Individually assignable gesture. fingers out again.
Assigning gesture individually System limits Gesture recognition by the camera in the roof‐ General information liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐ Depending on the equipment version, the follow‐ stances: ing functions can be assigned to gestures that ▷ The camera lens is covered. allow individual assignments: ▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror. ▷ Destination guidance to home address. ▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens. ▷ Voice command response. Sensors and camera lenses, refer to ▷ Mute/Playback page 412. ▷ Last calls. ▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐ ▷ Control Display on/off tection range. ▷ Notifications. ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry. ▷ Music recognition ▷ Smoking in the car's interior. ▷ NightVision on/off ▷ No function.
Select function 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Gesture control" 5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or "Function assignment gesture 2" 6. Select the desired setting.
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 60
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Vehicle features and ▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐ tion. options ▷ Charging the vehicle is interrupted due to the installation. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Charging the vehicle does not continue auto‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. matically after the successful installation. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Validity of the Owner's Manual also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, Production of the vehicle the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ At the time of production at the plant, the printed served. Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
After a software update in the BMW Remote Software vehicle Upgrade After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐ mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐ Concept er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information. Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐ date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐ ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional Functional requirement enhancements or quality improvements availa‐ The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐ ble. quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
General information Information about the version BMW recommends performing the Remote Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐ General information ble. The information about the version contains a de‐ The available data for Remote Software Upgrade scription of the updates that are included in the is automatically loaded into the vehicle. Remote Software Upgrade. During the download and after the installation has been completed For reasons of safety, the loaded upgrade can successfully, the information about the version only be installed when the vehicle is stationary. can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐ The installation is not installed until it was con‐ formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐ firmed on the vehicle. tomer portal at any time. ▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes. Logging on to the ConnectedDrive customer ▷ The installation cannot be terminated. portal on the Internet under: ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐ www.bmw-connecteddrive.com. lation.
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 61
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Displaying information about the Via iDrive version 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 5. "Search for upgrades" 5. "Installed version:" 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. Safety information Via BMW Connected app Warning 1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐ phone in the BMW Connected app. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐ themselves and traffic, for instance due to the nected app. following actions: 3. Establish connection to the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ iOS: Bluetooth Audio and WLAN. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Android: WLAN in the vehicle. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ The data transfer of the upgrade from the dows. smartphone to the vehicle occurs only while ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. driving. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ Additional information: hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer ing and lock the vehicle. to page 72.
Install the upgrade immediately Search for and download of an upgrade General information After successful download completion, installa‐ General information tion is offered once the vehicle is parked. The in‐ There are various options to search for and stallation can be carried out immediately follow‐ download an upgrade: ing the download. ▷ Automatic. Follow the instructions on the Control Display. ▷ Via iDrive. After the successful completion of the upgrade, ▷ Via BMW Connected app. booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐ vated automatically while driving. Automatic download The available data for Remote Software Upgrade Functional requirements is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. download does not require an approval. 61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 62
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ The external temperature is above ▷ Hazard warning system. 14 ℉/-10 ℃. ▷ Central locking system. ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. ▷ Parking lights. ▷ Hazard warning system is switched off. ▷ Horn. ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. ▷ Alarm system. ▷ Engine is sufficiently cooled down. ▷ Emergency Request. ▷ Power windows. Preparing the vehicle ▷ Glass sunroof. ▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public road. ▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock. ▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured The driver's door can be locked and unlocked so that an error message can be sent, for in‐ from the outside using the integrated key. stance if the installation is terminated. ▷ Close the windows. Malfunction ▷ Close the glass sunroof. In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐ tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐ ▷ Close the tailgate. nected app. ▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a a mobile phone. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ ▷ Unhitch any trailer or load carrier. ice center or repair shop. ▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle at the start of the installation. ▷ Switch off the exterior lighting. Additional vehicle related functional require‐ ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later The installation of the upgrade can be carried out at a later time.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 5. "Start upgrade now" Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play.
Functional limitations During the upgrade, the majority of functions is temporarily unavailable, for instance:
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 63
General settings CONTROLS
General settings
Vehicle features and 8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed. options 9. "OK"
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Setting the time format cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are 1. "CAR" not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due 2. "Settings" to the selected options or country versions. This 3. "General settings" also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ 4. "Date and time" tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 5. "Time format:" served. 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Time rently used. Automatic time setting Setting the time zone Depending on your vehicle's optional features, 1. "CAR" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are 2. "Settings" updated automatically. 3. "General settings" 1. "CAR" 4. "Date and time" 2. "Settings" 5. "Time zone:" 3. "General settings" 6. Select the desired setting. 4. "Date and time" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. "Automatic time setting" rently used. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Setting the time 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Date 3. "General settings" 4. "Date and time" Setting the date 1. "CAR" 5. "Time:" 2. "Settings" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. 3. "General settings" 7. Press the Controller. 4. "Date and time" 5. "Date:"
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 64
CONTROLS General settings
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is 4. "Units" displayed. 5. Select the desired menu item. 7. Press the Controller. 6. Select the desired setting. 8. Make the settings for the month and year. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 9. "OK" rently used.
Setting the date format 1. "CAR" Driver Attention Camera 2. "Settings" Concept 3. "General settings" A camera that monitors driver activity is located 4. "Date and time" in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates 5. "Date format:" the head position and eye opening and uses the 6. Select the desired setting. data to analyze the attention of the driver. This The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐ rently used. tems, e.g.: ▷ Fatigue alert. ▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐ Language tended Traffic Jam Assistant.
Setting the language Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Language" 4. "Driver Attention Camera" 5. Select the desired setting. 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. System limits The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully functional in the following situations: Setting the units of ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered measurement by the steering wheel rim. ▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐ Depending on the country version, you can set able sunglasses. the units of measurement for some values, for in‐ stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐ ture. Trip data settings 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Concept 3. "General settings" The intervals in which the trip data will be reset can be configured.
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 65
General settings CONTROLS
Resetting trip data Setting your current speed as 1. "CAR" the speed warning 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "General settings" 2. "Settings" 4. "Reset trip data" 3. "General settings" 5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Speed warning" 5. "Select current speed" Speed warning Activating/deactivating Concept pop-ups A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued. For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐ matically on the Control Display. Some of these General information pop-ups can be activated or deactivated. The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ 1. "CAR" ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ 2. "Settings" ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 3. "General settings" Adjusting 4. "Pop-ups" 1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired setting. 2. "Settings" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. 3. "General settings" 4. "Speed warning" 5. "Warning at:" Control Display 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed. Brightness 7. Press the Controller. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Activating/deactivating 3. "Displays" 1. "CAR" 4. "Control display" 2. "Settings" 5. "Brightness at night" 3. "General settings" 6. Press the Controller. 4. "Speed warning" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ 5. "Speed warning" ness is set. 8. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 66
CONTROLS General settings
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ Retrieving messages ness settings may not be clearly visible. 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Notifications" Resetting the vehicle 3. Select the desired message. configuration Deleting messages All individual settings can be reset to the factory All messages, except Check Control messages settings when the drive-ready state is switched or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can off. be deleted from the list. 1. "CAR" Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as 2. "Settings" they are relevant. 3. "General settings" 1. Tip the Controller up. 4. "Reset vehicle data" 2. "Notifications" 5. "Reset vehicle data" 3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS. When the stored settings in a driver profile are synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account, 4. Press the button. these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive account. 5. ▷ "Delete this notification" ▷ "Delete all notifications"
Messages Settings The following settings can be adjusted: Concept ▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐ sages will be permitted. ing in the vehicle in list form. ▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐ ceived messages. General information 1. Tip the Controller up. The following messages can be displayed: 2. "Notifications" ▷ Traffic messages. 3. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ Check Control messages. 4. "Settings" ▷ Messages on service notifications. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Communication messages, for example e- mails, SMS text messages or reminders. ▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service or the BMW Connected app. ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer. The number of messages is additionally dis‐ played in the status field. The Messages menu can also be created as Widget.
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 67
Personal settings CONTROLS
Personal settings
Vehicle features and Deleting personal data in the options vehicle Concept This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐ It also describes features and functions that are sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due personal data can be permanently deleted using to the selected options or country versions. This iDrive. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, General information the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ served. lowing data can be deleted: ▷ Driver profile settings. Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations. ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. Data transfer ▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information. ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations. Concept ▷ Phone book. The vehicle offers different services, whose use ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies. requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos. vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some services. ▷ Login accounts. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up General information to 15 minutes. When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐ spective service cannot be used. Functional requirement Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Settings Deleting data The data transfer can be configured in different The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted stages or individually for separate services. when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings. Additional information: 1. "CAR" Resetting the vehicle configuration, refer to 2. "Settings" page 66. 3. "General settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting.
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 68
CONTROLS Personal settings
Driver profiles As soon as the drive-ready state is switched on or any button is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden. Concept Driver profiles can be created to store personal Setup assistant vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for drivers, each driver can create his personal driver a limited period of time on the Welcome screen profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐ to configure the most important settings for the cle will automatically apply the stored settings in vehicle. the driver profile. "Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐ tant. General information The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at Three personal driver profiles can be created. any time. In addition, a guest profile is available that can be selected by any driver. The guest profile is active 1. "CAR" when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ 2. "Settings" lected. 3. "General settings" Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically 4. "Getting started" stored in the active driver profile or in the guest The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐ profile. lowing functions: The vehicle can already adjust to the driver when ▷ Setting the system language. it is unlocked. For this purpose, the recognition via a vehicle key and a digital key can be as‐ ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: signed to a driver profile. If the set-up assistant was opened in the ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored guest profile: create driver profile. in the driver's profile can be synchronized with ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle. the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is ▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐ thereby possible to use these settings in other ready defined driver profile: set up personal BMW vehicles as well. assistant. ▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant Functional requirements was opened from an already defined driver When switching the driver profile, the vehicle profile or a guest profile: set up services or must move at a maximum of walking speed. confirm the explanation for the transmission of vehicle related data. Welcome screen ▷ Set up other methods for use. After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐ The selected settings are stored in the active come screen will be displayed. driver's profile. The following actions can be carried out on the Welcome screen: Guest profile ▷ Switching the driver profile. The guest profile can be activated by any driver. ▷ Starting the set-up assistant. Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest profile is active will be stored in the guest profile. This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐ ited period of time.
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 69
Personal settings CONTROLS
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐ Scanning the displayed QR code will accept matically active: the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐ ▷ A driver profile has not been created yet. count from the BMW ConnectedDrive app. ▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ ▷ "Log in" hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The access data must be entered via iDrive. ▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ▷ "New registration" digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐ If a ConnectedDrive account does not yet ex‐ cle. ist, it can be created via iDrive. The following limitations apply: ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. Selecting recognition ▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to 1. "CAR" the guest profile. 2. "Driver profiles" ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest 3. Move the Controller to the right. profile. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible image can be tapped in the top status bar. to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ 4. "Driver recognition" count. 5. Select the desired setting: The guest profile is selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive: ▷ "with vehicle key" The vehicle key that is recognized in the 1. "CAR" car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐ 2. "Driver profiles" file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected, As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile the unintended vehicle keys must be re‐ image can be tapped in the top status bar. moved from the car’s interior. 3. "Guest" ▷ "With Digital Key" 4. "OK" The digital key that is recognized in the car's interior is assigned to the driver pro‐ Creating a driver profile file. If multiple digital keys are detected, the unintended digital keys must be re‐ 1. "CAR" moved from the car’s interior. 2. "Driver profiles" 6. "Activate linkage" 3. Move the Controller to the right. As soon as the vehicle detects the vehicle key or As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile the digital key, the corresponding driver profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. will be activated. If the vehicle key or the smart‐ 4. "Add driver profile" phone with the digital key is not carried with you Not ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be or not recognized, the driver profile can only be entered for the driver profile. selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set up. ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver Setting up a PIN profile. The following options are available for this purpose: A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐ vated without vehicle key and without digital key. ▷ "Via BMW Connected App"
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 70
CONTROLS Personal settings
In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the The handed over vehicle key can then no longer driver profile. be used to access the personal driver profile. Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐ ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not Selecting a driver profile known, the driver profile cannot be activated. Depending on the recognition setting, the driver Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If profile will be selected automatically. a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will driver's profile can be activated with the access be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive: data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐ A PIN may have to be entered. count. 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 2. "Driver profiles" As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile 3. Move the Controller to the right. image can be tapped in the top status bar. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile 3. Select driver profile. image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "OK" 4. "Driver recognition" All settings stored in the selected driver profile 5. "using PIN" are automatically applied.
Changing/canceling the Switching synchronization with recognition function the ConnectedDrive account When another vehicle key or another digital key on/off is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ ConnectedDrive countries: ment must be canceled first. The settings stored in the driver's profile are 1. "CAR" synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive 2. "Driver profiles" account. This means that it is possible to use the personal settings in other BMW vehicles with 3. Move the Controller to the right. ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile supported. image can be tapped in the top status bar. The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive 4. "Driver recognition" account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐ 5. Select the desired setting: ated or via iDrive:
▷ "with vehicle key" 1. "CAR" ▷ "With Digital Key" 2. "Driver profiles" 6. "Activate linkage" 3. Move the Controller to the right. When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐ image can be tapped in the top status bar. lowing steps first: 4. "Settings" ▷ Setting up PIN. 5. "Synchronize driver profile" ▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key. 6. "Synchronize driver profile" ▷ Switching to the guest profile.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 71
Personal settings CONTROLS
Renaming a driver profile 6. Select the desired driver profile. Non-ConnectedDrive countries: 7. "Delete now" ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile 1. "CAR" was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ 2. "Driver profiles" count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐ As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile count will be retained. image can be tapped in the top status bar. 3. Select driver profile. System limits 4. "Settings" A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may 5. Enter a profile name. not be possible in the following cases, e.g.: 6. Select the symbol. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access. ConnectedDrive countries: ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not The name of the driver profile is transferred from locked and unlocked. the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the profile name must be made in the Connected‐ ▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located out‐ Drive account. side on the driver's side of the vehicle. ConnectedDrive countries: Selecting a profile picture A driver profile can only be created and Non-ConnectedDrive countries: synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account when cellular network reception is available. 1. "CAR" The use of personal settings that are stored in 2. "Driver profiles" the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is 3. Move the Controller to the right. subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐ As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐ image can be tapped in the top status bar. able, or available in a non-compatible version, in other vehicles. 4. "Avatar" 5. Select the desired profile picture. ConnectedDrive countries: The profile image is transferred from the Con‐ nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW Con‐ nected app.
Deleting the driver profile 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Move the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "Settings" 5. "Remove driver profile"
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 72
CONTROLS Connections
Connections
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. served. It also describes features and functions that are
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle Concept General information Various connection types are available for using The following overview shows possible functions mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection and the suitable connection types for them. The type to select depends on the mobile device and scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ the desired function. vice.
Function Connection type Symbol in the device list
Making calls via the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth. tem. Using phone functions via iDrive or touchscreen. Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio. the audio player.
WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN. Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN. Using the vehicle Internet access.
Screen Mirroring: WLAN. Showing the smartphone display on the Control Display.
USB port: USB. Playing music or videos from a USB device.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 73
Connections CONTROLS
Function Connection type Symbol in the device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN. Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐ eration.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN. Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐ eration.
The following connection types require one-time Displaying the vehicle identification pairing with the vehicle: number and software part number ▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, you may ▷ WLAN. have to state the vehicle identification number Paired devices are automatically recognized later and the software part number. These numbers on and connected to the vehicle. can be displayed in the vehicle. 1. "COM" Safety information 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Move the Controller to the right. Warning 4. "Settings" Operating the integrated information systems 5. "Bluetooth® info" and communication devices while driving can 6. "System information" distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the Managing mobile devices systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. General information ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ matically recognized and reconnected when Compatible devices standby state is switched on. ▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the General information mobile phone, such as contacts, has been Information on mobile devices compatible with detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐ the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ cle and can be used via iDrive. bluetooth. ▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐ Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐ or deviating software versions. er's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ cle are displayed in the device list.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 74
CONTROLS Connections
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to functions may be deactivated on a device the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10 already connected. devices can be connected to the vehicle via ▷ "Disconnect device" WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐ The device remains paired and can be tected. connected again. 1. "COM" ▷ "Delete device" 2. "Mobile devices" The device is disconnected and removed A symbol to the right of the device name indi‐ from the device list. cates, for which function the device is used. ▷ "Connection mode" When the icon is displayed in white, this function Select a connection mode, for instance is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is Apple CarPlay. displayed in gray when the function of the device ▷ "Telephone" is inactive. Set telephone. Symbol Meaning ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" Telephone. Playback of music files on external devi‐ Bluetooth audio. ces such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth. WLAN in the vehicle, WiFi hotspot. ▷ "Apps" Apps. With the installed BMW Connected app, apps from the smartphone can be dis‐ Screen Mirroring. played in the vehicle. Apple CarPlay. ▷ "Wi-Fi®" Android Auto. Connects the device with the WLAN in the vehicle. Configuring the device Priority of the phones Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. When multiple mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the The scope of functions depends on the mobile mobile phones for reconnection. device. Follow the information on the Control Display. 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 1. "COM" 3. Move the Controller to the right. 2. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 3. Select the desired device. 5. "Priorities for telephones" 4. Select the desired setting: 6. Select the desired device. ▷ "Connect device" 7. Select the desired priority by sliding. The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 75
Connections CONTROLS
Bluetooth connection Activating/deactivating telephone functions Functional requirements To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐ ▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐ Compatible devices, refer to page 73. hicle as needed. ▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the 1. "COM" vehicle. 2. "Personalize menu" ▷ The device is ready for operation. 3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text ▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and messages". on the device. ▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the Frequently Asked Questions Control Display. All requirements are met and all required steps ▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may were completed in the specified order. Despite be required on the device; refer to the own‐ that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ er's manual of the device. pected. Activate Bluetooth In this case, the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or 1. "COM" connected? 2. "Mobile devices" ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ 3. Move the Controller to the right. nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. 4. "Settings" In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections 5. "Bluetooth®" with other devices. 6. Select setting. Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐ vice list on the mobile phone and start a new Connecting the device device search. 1. "COM" Too many Bluetooth devices with the same function are paired. 2. "Mobile devices" ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or 3. Move the Controller to the right. has only a limited remaining battery life. 4. "New device" Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the 5. "Phone calls and audio" power-save mode where required. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on Why does the mobile phone no longer react? the Control Display. ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not 6. Compare the control number displayed on function anymore. the Control Display with the control number Switch the mobile phone off and on again. on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for mobile phone operation. 7. A Bluetooth connection is established. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme The mobile device is connected to the vehicle ambient temperatures. and displayed in the device list.
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 76
CONTROLS Connections
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive? hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ ▷ Phone functions are not configured for the fied service center or repair shop. mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ WLAN connection phone function. Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐ played or why are they incomplete? General information ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is For certain applications, such as apps, the data not yet complete. exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐ curs via WLAN. ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are Functional requirements transmitted. ▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ terface. ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks. Activate WLAN in the vehicle ▷ The number of phone book entries to be transmitted is too high. 1. "COM" ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐ 2. "Mobile devices" stance due to stored information such as 3. Move the Controller to the right. notes. 4. "Settings" Reduce the data volume of the contact. 5. "Wi-Fi®" ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as audio source or as telephone. Configure the mobile phone and connect it WiFi hotspot with the telephone function. ▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the Concept phone after the last synchronization. Compatible devices with WLAN interface can Synchronize contacts again: "Reload use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the contacts" WiFi hotspot. How can the phone connection quality be im‐ proved? General information ▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on Up to 10 devices can be connected to the the mobile phone, depending on the mobile WiFi hotspot simultaneously. phone. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless Functional requirements charging tray. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐ terface. rately in the sound settings. Compatible devices, refer to page 73. If all points in this list have been checked and the ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle. required function is still not available, contact the ▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 77
Connections CONTROLS
▷ Registration and data contract with a service Deactivating Internet usage via provider where required. the WiFi hotspot ▷ Standby state is switched on. Internet usage may be deactivated if the data volume is used up, for instance. Connecting a device to the Internet via the WiFi hotspot 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" Using the Internet for the first time via the WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a 3. Move the Controller to the right. data volume purchase from a service provider. 4. "Settings" Depending on the country version, data volume 5. "Internet connection" can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐ 6. Select the desired setting. vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" Screen Mirroring 3. Move the Controller to the right. General information 4. "New device" Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting) 5. "Internet, apps" of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐ Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ play. played on the Control Display. 6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ Functional requirements sary. ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐ "Open settings" ing interface. 7. Activate Internet usage. Compatible devices, refer to page 73. "Internet connection" ▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐ 8. Move the Controller to the left. phone. 9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐ ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle. vice. Select network name on the device. 10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ Pairing a smartphone with nect. Screen Mirroring The device is displayed in the device list. 1. "COM" Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the 2. "Mobile devices" Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can 3. Move the Controller to the right. be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐ 4. "New device" spot. 5. "Screen Mirroring" All devices connected via the hotspot use this data volume. The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display. 6. Search for WLAN devices in the surroundings of the smartphone.
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 78
CONTROLS Connections
The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on 7. Compare the control number displayed on the device display. Select the WLAN name of the Control Display with the control number the vehicle. on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ 7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. firm that the two match. The device is connected and displayed in the 8. "Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay" device list. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ played in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Concept Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible gation, Entertainment, Communication. Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and iDrive. Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps Functional requirements were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ iOS 7.1 or later. pected. Compatible devices, refer to page 73. In this case, the following explanations can help: ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice operation CarPlay can no longer be selected. are activated on the iPhone. ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must list. be activated on the iPhone. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐ from the list of stored connections under phone integration. Bluetooth and under WLAN. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. cle. If the steps listed have been carried out and the Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐ 1. "COM" fied service center or repair shop. 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Move the Controller to the right. Android Auto preparation 4. "New device" 5. "Phone calls and audio" Concept The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. Android Auto allows the operation of certain functions of a compatible smartphone via voice 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth operation and iDrive. devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. A control number is displayed.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 79
Connections CONTROLS
Functional requirements Operation ▷ Compatible Android smartphone with For more information, refer to the Integrated Android 9.0 or later. Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Compatible devices, refer to page 73. gation, Entertainment, Communication. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. Frequently Asked Questions ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the smartphone. All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ be activated on the smartphone. pected. ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐ In this case, the following explanations can help: phone integration. The smartphone has already been paired with ▷ The Android Auto app is installed on the Android Auto. When a new connection is estab‐ smartphone. lished, Android Auto can no longer be selected. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the cle. device list. Pairing a smartphone with ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐ cerned from the list of stored connections Android Auto under Bluetooth and under WLAN. 1. "COM" ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device. 2. "Mobile devices" If the steps listed have been carried out and the 3. Move the Controller to the right. required function is still not available: contact the 4. "New device" hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. 5. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. USB connection 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. General information A control number is displayed. The following mobile devices can be connected 7. Compare the control number displayed on to the USB port: the Control Display with the control number ▷ Mobile phones. on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. 8. "Confirm note and connect to Android Auto" ▷ USB storage devices. 9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile Common file systems are supported. FAT32 device. and exFAT are the recommended formats. The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and A connected USB device will be supplied with displayed in the device list. charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐ rent of the USB port. The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transfer: 79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 80
CONTROLS Connections
▷ Playing music files. Connecting the device ▷ Playing videos. Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter Follow the following when connecting: cable to a USB port. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ The USB device is displayed in the device list. tor into the USB port. Additional information: ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. USB port, refer to page 310. ▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical damage. ▷ Due to the large number of USB devices available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every device is operable on the ve‐ hicle. ▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the device. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ niques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐ board socket, when it is connected to the USB port. ▷ Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device. Not compatible USB devices: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots. ▷ HFS-formatted USB devices. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement Compatible device with USB port. Additional information: Compatible devices, refer to page 73.
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and Safety information options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In It also describes features and functions that are this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the to the selected options or country versions. This vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ opened from the outside. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Warning For some country versions, unlocking from the Vehicle key inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ General information cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle the vehicle from the outside when there are is delivered with two vehicle keys or one vehicle people in it. key and the BMW display key. Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery. Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ Warning sion, various settings can be configured for the Unattended children or animals in the vehicle button functions. can cause the vehicle to move and endanger A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐ themselves and traffic, for instance due to the signed to a vehicle key. following actions: To provide information on maintenance require‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ments, the service data is stored in the vehicle ▷ Releasing the parking brake. key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, dows. take the vehicle key with you when exiting the ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. vehicle. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 82
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Overview ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out. If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the button in the car's interior, they will not be folded out when unlocking. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched off. After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle is ready for operation. 1 Unlocking The light functions may depend on the ambient 2 Locking brightness. 3 To open the tailgate 4 Press and hold or press three times in quick Convenient opening succession: panic mode Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ Press briefly: pathway lighting cle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun Unlocking protection are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. General information The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐ Locking ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ tings: General information ▷ If only the driver's door or all access to the The behavior of the vehicle during locking using vehicle will be unlocked. the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed tings: with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the a light signal or a sound signal. vehicle is being unlocked. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior Unlocking the vehicle mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. Press the button on the vehicle key. ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking.
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door was Locking the vehicle unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. 1. Close the driver's door. In addition, the following functions are executed: 2. Press the button on the vehicle key. ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle The following functions are executed: key, this driver profile will be activated and the settings that are stored in it will be applied. ▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 83
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be Tailgate switched on. If the drive-ready state is still switched on when General information you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. The following settings are available for the opera‐ tion of the tailgate with the vehicle key: With Comfort Access: convenient closing ▷ Whether the vehicle key opens only the up‐ per tailgate or the upper and lower tailgate at the same time. Safety information ▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle Warning key. With convenient closing, body parts can be When the trailer power socket is in use, the tail‐ jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure gate cannot be opened with the vehicle key. that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Safety information
Closing Warning Press and hold the button on the vehicle Body parts can be jammed when operating the key in the area close to the vehicle after tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that locking. the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing. The windows and the glass sunroof with sun protection are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Warning The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is Switching on the interior and a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. exterior lights Make sure that the area of movement of the Press the button on the vehicle key with tailgate is clear during opening and closing. the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐ NOTICE onds after locking. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless windows and heat conductors while driving. they were manually switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover Interior lights, refer to page 185. the edges and ensure that pointed objects do ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐ not hit the windows. ing will be switched on. Welcome lights, refer to page 181. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 84
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐ ing a pointed object and lift it out. Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. 4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ tive side facing up. To switch off the alarm: press any button. 5. Press the cover closed. 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key Switching pathway lighting on until the integrated key engages. Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ cle key for approx. 1 second. er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐ them to a collection point. way lighting feature. Additional information: Pathway lighting, refer to page 181. Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐ Replacing the battery ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key. Loss of vehicle keys Integrated key, refer to page 95. A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ by a dealer’s service center or another qualified tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the service center or repair shop. cover with a lever movement of the integrated key, arrow 2. If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐ file, the connection to this vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐ function under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 85
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Interference of the radio connection from tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ transmission towers or other equipment with ter. high transmitting power. 2. If the vehicle key is detected: ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ jects. onds. Do not transport the vehicle key together with If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly metal objects. change the position of the vehicle key and repeat ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ the procedure. bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the vehicle key. Frequently Asked Questions Do not transport the vehicle key together with What precautions can be taken to be able to electronic devices. open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐ ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ hicle key? ing process of mobile devices, for instance ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐ charging of a mobile phone. ices of the BMW Connected app include the ▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. of the tray for wireless charging tray. This requires an active BMW Connected‐ Place the vehicle key in a different location. Drive contract and the BMW Connected app In the case of interference, the vehicle can also must be installed on a smartphone. be unlocked and locked from the outside with ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the integrated key. the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center. Additional information: An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is Integrated key, refer to page 95. required.
Switching the drive-ready state on BMW display key via emergency detection of the vehicle key General information The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐ tional mechanical key. If the display key is used, the mechanical key should be carried with you, for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is used like the integrated key. The display key supports all functions of the standard vehicle key. In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready able: state if the vehicle key has not been detected. ▷ Display status of doors and windows. Proceed as follows in this case: ▷ Display status of the alarm system. 1. Hold the back of the vehicle key against the ▷ Operate stationary climate control. marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ ▷ Adjust charging times.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 86
CONTROLS Opening and closing
▷ Call up range with available fuel and the cur‐ There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not rent battery charge state. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ ▷ Display charge state of the high-voltage bat‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ tery. ing and lock the vehicle. ▷ Display service information. Additional information: Overview Integrated key, refer to page 95.
Safety information
Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be 1 To open the tailgate opened from the outside. 2 Unlocking 3 Press and hold or press three times in quick succession: panic mode Warning Press briefly: pathway lighting For some country versions, unlocking from the 4 Locking inside is only possible with special knowledge. 5 Display Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ 6 Back cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock 7 Switch the display on/off the vehicle from the outside when there are 8 Micro-USB charging socket people in it. Reception range The number of available display key functions Warning depends on the distance from the vehicle. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle ▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ can cause the vehicle to move and endanger cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ themselves and traffic, for instance due to the ble. following actions: ▷ In the wider reception range, you can access ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. status information and use the stationary cli‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake. mate control. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, dows. you can display the last transmitted status in‐ ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. formation from the vehicle. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 87
Opening and closing CONTROLS
The symbol is shown on the display if one of Switching on/off the buttons is pressed outside of the reception The display will go out automatically after a brief range. period to conserve battery power. Display To hide the display manually: Press the button on the left side of the display General information key. The display is divided into the upper status line, To show the display: the information area, and the lower status line. 1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐ play key. Upper status line 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to The upper status line displays the following infor‐ top to unlock the screen lock. mation: To switch off the display to increase the usable ▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured. battery life:
▷ Set time in the vehicle. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock. ▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of the display key for longer than 4 seconds. Information area 3. "OK" The information area can be used to access in‐ To switch the display on: formation and perform additional functions. Press the button on the left side of the display If the information area contains more than one key. page, then page indicators are shown beneath the information. Operating concept A solid indicator denotes the current page. The following information shows how to access the information and functions using the main Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change menus. between the pages. If further information is available on a page, tap Main menu Information/Function the appropriate symbol. "Security / To return to the original page: tap on the information" Door status. symbol beneath the display. Alarm system status. Touch it again to display the charge state of the After alarm triggering: date, high-voltage battery. time, and reason for triggering the alarm. Lower status line The lower status line indicates whether or not the display key is within reception range. Window status. ▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐ Glass sunroof status. tion range. "Entry level" "Height control" Set vehi‐ ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐ cle level. ception range. It indicates when the last data transfer from the vehicle took place.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 88
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Main menu Information/Function At higher temperatures, the charge current through the display key may be reduced, and "Vehicle Maintenance indicators of in isolated cases the charge process may be information" Condition Based Service CBS. interrupted temporarily. Status of the roadside parking ▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐ lights. less charging tray, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging "Mobility info" Range with available fuel and tray. the current battery charge state. Safety information Status during charging.
"Departure Operate stationary climate Warning setting" control. When charging a device that meets the Qi High-voltage battery: schedule standard in the wireless charging tray, any charging times. metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage Display key battery devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal General information transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of Follow the following information: injury and risk of damage to property. When ▷ If the charge state of the display key battery charging mobile devices, make sure there are declines, the display is switched off automati‐ no objects between the device and the tray. cally. The battery must be recharged so that the display can be switched back on. The op‐ erability of the standard buttons is retained Charging until the battery is completely discharged. ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours Via USB before using the display key for the first time Connect the display key via the micro-USB or if the key has not been used for an ex‐ charging socket to a USB port. tended period. ▷ The display key can be used while it is being With thermoelectric cup holder: centered charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully in the center console discharged, it may take some time before the display key can be used again. ▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every charger will function properly. The charging duration depends on the charger used. ▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the charger and the display key. Charging in the wireless charging tray may 1. Open the tray cover. heat up the tray and the display key.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 89
Opening and closing CONTROLS
2. Place display key flush into the recess of the Malfunction wireless charging tray. Ensure that the display is facing up. General information 3. Close the tray cover. A Check Control message is displayed. BMW display key detection by the vehicle may Without thermoelectric cup holder: on the malfunction under the following circumstances: left in the center console ▷ The battery of the display key is discharged. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐ jects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity. 1. Open the tray cover. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ ing process of mobile devices, for instance 2. Place the display key into the middle of the charging of a mobile phone. wireless charging tray in front of the left cup holder. Do not transport the display key together with metal objects or electronic devices. Ensure that the display is facing up. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also 3. Close the tray cover. be unlocked and locked from the outside with the mechanical key. LED displays Switching on drive-ready state via Color Meaning emergency detection of the BMW Blue The display key is charging. display key The blue LED stays illuminated once the inserted display key is fully charged.
Orange The display key is not charging. Temperature on the display key pos‐ sibly too high or foreign object in charging tray.
Red The display key is not charging. Contact a dealer’s service center or It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready another qualified service center or re‐ state if the display key has not been detected. pair shop. Proceed as follows in this case: 1. Hold the display key with its back against the marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 90
CONTROLS Opening and closing
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ Safety information ter. 2. If the display key is detected: Warning Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the onds. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In If the display key is not detected, slightly change this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the position of the display key and repeat the the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the procedure. vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside. Resetting the BMW display key If the charged display key cannot be switched on anymore or if the display does not respond to Warning entries anymore, the display key can be reset. For some country versions, unlocking from the Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐ inside is only possible with special knowledge. play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ until the display is switched off and then on cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ again: tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock ▷ the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. ▷
Warning Key card Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Concept following actions: The key card allows the vehicle to be unlocked ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. and locked, as well as started. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. General information ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. The key card is available with Comfort Access. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Depending on the national-market version, the key card may not be available. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. A digital key that has already been paired with There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐ leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ tal key must be activated via iDrive. hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the key card or take the key card with you because the active key card can be used to start the vehicle. Connection to the vehicle Always take the vehicle key with you to a service appointment. The communication between the vehicle and the key card uses near-field communication, NFC.
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 91
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating key card Tray without thermoelectric cup holder: in the vehicle A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to activate and deactivate the key card. When BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehi‐ cle, a digital key can be used instead of the vehi‐ cle key. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/Access" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray. 4. "BMW Digital Key" 2. Place activated key card centered into the smartphone tray. 5. Select key card. 3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ 6. "Digital Key active" gine. A deactivated key card remains in the list of With wireless charging tray: After starting the en‐ paired digital keys. gine, take the key card out of the tray to make tray available for charging compatible smart‐ Unlocking and locking the phones. vehicle Malfunction The detection of the key card by the vehicle may be disrupted by objects between the sensors and the key card, for instance a wallet.
BMW Digital Key
Concept Hold activated key card directly and centered on BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐ the outside door handle of the driver's door. locked and locked, as well as started, with a compatible smartphone. Starting the engine Tray with thermoelectric cup holder: General information The BMW Digital Key is available with Comfort Access. Depending on the national-market ver‐ sion, the BMW Digital Key may not be available. To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible smartphone, this function must be offered by the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW Con‐ nected app provides a check to determine if the smartphone and the vehicle are compatible.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 92
CONTROLS Opening and closing
A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐ ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. signed to a digital key. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐ There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not ways carry a vehicle key or the activated key card leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ with you. This ensures access to the vehicle, hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ even in the event of a smartphone malfunction. It ing and lock the vehicle. is also useful to carry the vehicle key or the key card with you if the vehicle has to be handed over to another person. You can then hand over Connection to the vehicle the vehicle key or the key card, instead of your The communication between the vehicle and the smartphone. Always take the vehicle key with smartphone uses near-field communication, you to a service appointment. NFC. Safety information Functional requirements ▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW Warning Digital Key People or animals in the vehicle can lock the ▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐ doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In Drive account of the vehicle owner. this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from ▷ The BMW Connected app must be installed the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the on the smartphone to register the digital re‐ vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be mote control key. opened from the outside. ▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐ mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐ Warning pends on the smartphone. For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Register digital remote control Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ key cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ The installed digital key on the vehicle owner's tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock smartphone is registered as digital remote con‐ the vehicle from the outside when there are trol key in the vehicle. The vehicle owner must people in it. prove his authorization for the vehicle for this purpose. The proof of authorization is completed via the Warning BMW Connected app and both vehicle keys. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger for the registration. themselves and traffic, for instance due to the Open the BMW Connected app and follow the following actions: instructions. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The period of validity of a digital key is limited ▷ Releasing the parking brake. and corresponds to the term of the booked serv‐ ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ice. The expiration date of the validity can be dows.
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 93
Opening and closing CONTROLS
checked in the BMW Connected app and in the Deleting a shared key vehicle. After a digital key has expired, it can still be used General information to move the vehicle until the vehicle is used with Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone a different vehicle key or digital key. of the digital remote control key, the smartphone of a shared key or via iDrive. Sharing digital keys The deletion via the smartphone of the remote control key will not be performed until the vehicle General information is used with a key other than the key to be de‐ Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys with leted. other people. This option is available via the Deleted digital keys cannot be restored. smartphone on which the digital key is stored. Deletion via iDrive Forwarding authorization To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an Select the corresponding menu item on the authorized vehicle key must be located in the ve‐ smartphone to share the digital key. hicle or the digital remote control key must be lo‐ As soon as a digital key is shared with another cated in the smartphone tray. person, the person will be notified. Following the 1. "CAR" confirmation of this message, the digital key on the recipient's smartphone will be activated. 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/Access" Pairing shared digital keys in the 4. "BMW Digital Key" vehicle 5. If necessary, select the digital key. The registration of the shared key occurs on the 6. "Remove Digital Key" external door handle or in the smartphone tray. This process may take a few seconds. Follow the The digital key will be removed from the list corresponding instructions on the smartphone or of paired digital keys. the Control Display. After the digital key has been paired, its name will Deleting all shared keys be displayed in the list of digital keys. To be able to delete all digital keys, an authorized vehicle key must be located in the vehicle or the Authentication digital remote control key must be located in the smartphone tray. Depending on the recipient’s smartphone model, an authentication may be required for security 1. "CAR" and safety reasons. 2. "Settings" An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote 3. "Doors/Access" control key or another method may be used for authentication. Follow the corresponding instruc‐ 4. "BMW Digital Key" tions on the smartphone or the Control Display. 5. "Remove all Digital Keys"
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 94
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Reset the function To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au‐ thorized vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐ cle. When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all digital keys including the digital remote control key will be deleted. After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐ locked, locked or started with a digital key. Tray without thermoelectric cup holder: The digital remote control key must be regis‐ tered again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/Access" 4. "BMW Digital Key" 5. "Reset function" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray. Unlocking and locking the 2. Place smartphone centered into the smart‐ vehicle phone tray. 3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ gine.
Sale of the smartphone Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to selling the smartphone. This ensures that that the smartphone is deactivated for the vehicle.
Sale of the vehicle Hold the near field communication antenna of Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key the smartphone directly and centered on the function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐ outside door handle of the driver's door. tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner. The position of the near field communication an‐ When the vehicle is removed from the Connec‐ tenna depends on the smartphone model. tedDrive account, all digital keys for the vehicle When locking the vehicle with the smartphone, will be deleted. make sure that all doors and also the tailgate are closed. Malfunction Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐ Starting the engine function under the following circumstances: Tray with thermoelectric cup holder:
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 95
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors Removing in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is not suitable. ▷ Objects such as a chip card or the key card are located between the smartphone and the smartphone cover.
Integrated key
General information Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the The driver's door can be locked and unlocked integrated key, arrow 2. without the vehicle key using the integrated key. Depending on the national-market version, the Locking/unlocking via the door integrated key also fits the glove compartment. lock Safety information 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with one hand.
Warning For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the back under the cover and push the cover out. NOTICE Use the thumb for counter support to prevent The door lock is permanently joined with the the cover from falling out of the door handle. door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 96
CONTROLS Opening and closing
3. Remove the cover. Locking 4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the Press the button with the front doors integrated key. closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.
Unlocking Press the button.
Opening The other doors must be unlocked or locked ▷ Press the button to unlock all the from the inside. doors. Pull the door opener above the armrest. Alarm system ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door The activated alarm system is triggered when to open the door. The other doors remain the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐ locked. locked via the door lock. ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ the door to be opened; the first time unlocks cle is locked with the integrated key. the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. Buttons for the central locking system Comfort Access
General information Concept In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is The vehicle can be accessed without operating automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ the vehicle key. tem and interior lights come on. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. Overview The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior.
General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the door handle. ▷ Convenient closing. Buttons for the central locking system.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 97
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐ ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless cle. they were manually switched off. ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out. BMW Digital Key. If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the ▷ Open the tailgate. button in the car's interior, they will not be ▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch folded out when unlocking. activation. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched off. Functional requirements ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be Locking outside of the vehicle near the doors. General information ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ Unlocking tings: ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with General information a light signal or a sound signal. The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded the Comfort Access depends on the following in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior settings: mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the vehicle is being unlocked. Locking the vehicle Close the driver's door. Unlocking the vehicle
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely. closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door handle. In addition, the following functions are executed: The following functions are executed: ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle key, this driver profile will be activated and the ▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked. settings that are stored in it will be applied. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched on.
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 98
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Convenient closing Safety information
Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the Warning tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that With convenient closing, body parts can be the area of movement of the tailgate is clear jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure during opening and closing. that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Warning Closing The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a not hit the windows. closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. Opening In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Opening the tailgate
General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
Opening and closing the tailgate with no-touch activation
Concept The tailgate can be opened and closed with no- touch activation using the vehicle key you are
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 99
Opening and closing CONTROLS
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐ Warning gate is opened and closed. The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. General information Make sure that the area of movement of the Touchless opening and closing of the tailgate is tailgate is clear during opening and closing. not possible when equipped with trailer hitch. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. NOTICE If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the tail‐ Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the gate may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐ windows and heat conductors while driving. tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement There is a risk of damage to property. Cover is detected. the edges and ensure that pointed objects do The sensor has an approximate range of not hit the windows. 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐ cle. Settings If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation, locked doors are not unlocked. 1. "CAR" You can configure if only the upper tailgate will 2. "Settings" open or if the upper and lower tailgate opens. 3. "Doors/Access" When closing, the upper and lower tailgate will 4. "Tailgate" always be closed. 5. Select the desired setting: Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate ▷ "Open with foot movement" must be activated in the settings. Contactless opening of the trunk lid is Safety information switched on or off. ▷ "Close by foot movement"
Warning Contactless closing of the trunk lid is switched on or off. During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐ Performing the foot movement tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ not touch the vehicle. prox. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction Warning of travel and immediately pull it back. With Body parts can be jammed when operating the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 100
CONTROLS Opening and closing
this movement, the leg must pass through The unlocking zone is located within a radius of the ranges of both sensors. approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles. The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key leaves the locking zone. The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐ prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles. If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone for an extended period of time without move‐ ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically. If a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat during locking and the safety belt of the front passenger is engaged in the safety belt Opening buckle during locking. The vehicle will be locked Perform the foot movement described earlier. but not secured against theft. Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐ system flashes. locking/locking depends on the following set‐ Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐ tings: tion, and moving it one more time after that will ▷ If the automatic unlocking is active. close the tailgate. ▷ If the automatic locking is active. Closing ▷ If only the driver's door or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. Perform the foot movement described earlier. Only driver's door: the driver's door will only The hazard warning system flashes and an be unlocked when the driver approaches the acoustic signal sounds. vehicle on the driver's side. Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐ All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐ tion, and moving it one more time after that will locked regardless of the side on which the re-open the tailgate. driver approaches the vehicle. Touchless unlocking and locking ▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐ of the vehicle nal. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the Concept vehicle is being unlocked. The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐ ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded When the driver walks away from the unlocked out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be locked. locked. Functional requirements General information ▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off. The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. ▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone, the doors and tailgate must be closed.
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 101
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the The tailgate consists of the upper and the lower doors and tailgate must be closed. tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downward to ▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐ make loading the cargo area easier. ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of The following settings are available for the opera‐ six meters around the vehicle. tion of the tailgate: ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for ▷ The opening height of the upper tailgate. several days, touchless unlocking/locking is ▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the vehicle not possible until after the vehicle has been key opens only the upper tailgate or the up‐ driven. per and lower tailgate at the same time. ▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the button in Malfunction the driver's door opens only the upper or the Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may mal‐ upper and lower tailgate together. function under the following circumstances: ▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. when the tailgate is opened with the vehicle For replacing the battery, refer to page 84. key. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with Safety information high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ Warning jects. Body parts can be jammed when operating the Do not transport the vehicle key together with tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that metal objects. the area of movement of the tailgate is clear ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ during opening and closing. bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ rect proximity to the vehicle key. Do not transport the vehicle key together with Warning electronic devices. The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. request recognition function on the door han‐ Make sure that the area of movement of the dles. tailgate is clear during opening and closing. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key. NOTICE Additional information: Foreign objects, such as sand or icing, between the bumper and tailgate may cause damage Integrated key, refer to page 95. when operating the lower tailgate. There is a risk of damage to property. If necessary, re‐ Tailgate move foreign objects from the bumper and the lower tailgate before operating the lower tail‐ gate. General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 102
CONTROLS Opening and closing
From the outside NOTICE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.
NOTICE Manual operation of the tailgate in the wrong ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button sequence can damage the tailgate. There is a on the outside of the tailgate. risk of damage to property. Close the lower tail‐ ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key gate first before closing the upper tailgate man‐ with you and press the button on the outside ually. of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ Upper tailgate hicle key for approx. 1 second. With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower Opening tailgate will also be opened.
General information From the inside It may not be possible to open the tailgate when Press the button in the driver's door. the vehicle is in valet parking mode. When the trailer socket is occupied, the tailgate If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P cannot be opened with the vehicle key or with must be engaged first. the button in the car's interior. With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower tail‐ The upper tailgate will be opened to the config‐ gate will also be opened. ured opening height. Additional information: Interruption of the opening procedure Valet parking mode, refer to page 105. The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the used button used again.
Closing
Functional requirement Without Comfort Access: The lower tailgate must be closed; otherwise, a Check Control message will be displayed.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 103
Opening and closing CONTROLS
From the outside Interruption of the closing procedure Without Comfort Access: The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ lowing situations: 1. Closing the lower tailgate manually. ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. 2. Press the button on the inside of the upper tailgate. ▷ By pressing the used button used again. Lower tailgate
With Comfort Access: Opening ▷ Press the button on the inside of the upper tailgate. General information The lower tailgate will be closed automatically When open, the lower tailgate can support loads with the upper tailgate. of up to 550 lbs/250 kg. ▷ Press the button on the inside of the upper tailgate. Functional requirement The vehicle will be locked after closing the The upper tailgate must be open. tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐ From the outside side of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate. Without Comfort Access: The lower tailgate will be closed automatically Press the button on the lower tailgate with the upper tailgate. and fold the lower tailgate down.
From the inside With Comfort Access: Without Comfort Access: Press the button on the lower tailgate. 1. Closing the lower tailgate manually.
With Comfort Access: from the inside 2. Pull and hold the button in the driver door. Depending on the settings, the lower tailgate will be opened automatically with the upper tailgate. The vehicle key must be located in the car’s interior for this function. With Comfort Access: terminating the With Comfort Access: opening procedure Pull and hold the button in the driver door. The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ The vehicle key must be located in the lowing situations: car’s interior for this function. ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. The lower tailgate will be closed automatically ▷ By pressing the button on the lower tailgate. with the upper tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is Closing closed. Functional requirements There is no cargo on the lower tailgate.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 104
CONTROLS Opening and closing
From the outside Malfunction Without Comfort Access: Closing the lower tailgate manually. Safety information With Comfort Access: Warning Press the button on the lower tailgate. With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐ With Comfort Access: from the inside age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐ The lower tailgate will be closed automatically ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐ with the upper tailgate. er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. With Comfort Access: terminating the closing procedure Without Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ upper tailgate manually and slowly without jerk‐ lowing situations: ing. ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. With Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked up‐ ▷ By pressing the button in the lower tailgate. per or lower tailgate manually and slowly without jerking. When closing, make sure the lower tail‐ System limits gate is closed first. Without Comfort Access: The upper tailgate is To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly designed for electric operation via the provided only. Closing occurs automatically. operating points. With Comfort Access: The upper tailgate and the lower tailgate are designed for electric operation Soft-close automatic via the provided operating points. A manual operation of the tailgate can produce Safety information system states in which an electric operation is no longer possible. Warning For instance, this type of system state applies Body parts can be jammed while operating the when there is a danger of collision between the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that upper and lower tailgate. In this case, an acoustic the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐ signal will sound and the upper tailgate must be ing opening and closing. completely opened manually. Operate the tailgate manually in exceptional cases only such as in the event of a malfunction. Closing To close the doors, push lightly. Closing occurs automatically.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 105
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Valet parking mode Via the vehicle settings 1. "CAR" Concept 2. "Settings" In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is 3. "General settings" locked. The operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐ 4. "Valet parking mode" sible. E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is Activating the valet parking handed over for valet parking. mode
General information General information In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐ must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot parking mode at a future time. be displayed. The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐ Additionally, the following actions are carried out: pending on the active driver profile. ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited. Driver profile with PIN ▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated. A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐ ▷ DSC cannot be switched off. file. Functional requirements It is not necessary to enter another PIN. ▷ At least one driver profile has been created. "Activate now" ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active. Driver profile without PIN ▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile. ConnectedDrive account. 1. "PIN" Accessing the menu for the valet 2. Enter PIN. parking mode 3. "Activate now"
Via the switch-off screen Guest profile After switching off drive-ready state the switch- The guest profile is the active driver profile. off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for A PIN must be entered. the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen. 1. "PIN" Via the display bar at the upper edge 2. Enter PIN. of the Control Display 3. "Activate now" 1. Tip the Controller up. This PIN can be used once to deactivate the 2. "Valet parking mode" valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐ file.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 106
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Deactivating valet parking mode Adjusting General information General information The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐ played on the Control Display. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, various settings for opening and clos‐ The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐ ing are possible. pends on which driver profile is selected on the lock screen. These settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. Driver profile with PIN Unlocking and locking Regardless of which driver activated the valet parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet Doors parking mode by entering his/her PIN. 1. "CAR" 1. Select driver profile. 2. "Settings" 2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile. 3. "Key button settings" If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode 4. Select the symbol. must be deactivated by entering the assigned ConnectedDrive access data. 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Driver's door only" Driver profile without PIN Only the driver's door is unlocked. Press‐ The valet parking mode was activated by another ing again unlocks the entire vehicle. person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a ▷ "All doors" driver without a PIN has to enter the access data The entire vehicle is unlocked. for his ConnectedDrive account. 1. Select driver profile. Confirmation signals from the 2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐ vehicle signed to the driver profile. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Guest profile 3. "Doors/Access" In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ activated in the guest profile. tion signals: ▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking" 1. Select guest profile. Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐ 2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐ ing by one. vation. ▷ With alarm system: If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking mode must be deactivated via a personal driver "Sound when locking/unlocking" profile. Unlocking is confirmed with two sound signals, locking is confirmed with one sound signal.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 107
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Folding mirrors in automatically 5. "Opening height" 1. "CAR" 6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired 2. "Settings" opening height. 3. "Doors/Access" With Comfort Access: upper or both 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" tailgates Automatic unlocking The button in the car's interior can be set up to open only the upper tailgate or the 1. "CAR" upper and lower tailgate together: 2. "Settings" Via iDrive: 3. "Doors/Access" 4. "Unlock at end of trip" 1. "CAR" After drive-ready state is switched off by 2. "Settings" pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐ 3. "Doors/Access" hicle is automatically unlocked. 4. "Tailgate" Automatic locking 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Upper tailgate" 1. "CAR" Only the upper tailgate opens. 2. "Settings" ▷ "Both tailgates" 3. "Doors/Access" The upper and lower tailgate will be 4. Select the desired setting: opened together. ▷ "Lock automatically" To open the upper and lower tailgate at The vehicle locks automatically after a the same time, the upper tailgate must be while if no door is opened after unlocking. closed when the button is pressed. ▷ "Lock after starting to drive" This setting also applies to the touchless open‐ The vehicle locks automatically after you ing of the tailgate. drive off. Tailgate and doors Tailgate The button of the vehicle key can be configured to control which part of the tailgate will be Opening height of the upper tailgate opened and if the doors will be unlocked at the You can set how far the upper tailgate can be same time. opened. ▷ When adjusting the opening height, make sure the clearance above the tailgate is at least Via iDrive: 4 in/10 cm. 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "Key button settings" 3. "Doors/Access" 4. Select the symbol. 4. "Tailgate" 5. Select the desired setting:
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 108
CONTROLS Opening and closing
▷ "Upper tailgate" To open the upper and lower tailgate at The upper tailgate is opened. the same time, the upper tailgate must be closed when the button is pressed. ▷ "Upper tailgate + door(s)" This setting also applies to opening the tailgate The tailgate is opened and the doors un‐ in the interior. locked. ▷ "Both tailgates" Establishing idle state after The upper and lower tailgate will be opening the front doors opened. 1. "CAR" ▷ "Both tailgates + door(s)" 2. "Settings" The upper and lower tailgate will be 3. "Doors/Access" opened and the doors unlocked. 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" Comfort Access Idle state, refer to page 39.
Touchless locking and unlocking 1. "CAR" Alarm system 2. "Settings" General information 3. "Doors/Access" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm 4. "Comfort access" system reacts to the following changes: 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate. ▷ "Unlock when approaching" ▷ Movements in the car's interior. ▷ "Lock when walking away" ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐ ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐ Touchless opening of the tailgate ing the vehicle. For touchless unlocking, a setting can be en‐ ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. tered to open only the upper tailgate or the up‐ per and lower tailgate together: ▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis. Via iDrive: ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ 1. "CAR" nected to the socket for the OBD Onboard- 2. "Settings" Diagnosis. 3. "Doors/Access" The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: 4. "Tailgate" ▷ Acoustic alarm: 5. Select the desired setting: Depending on local regulations, the acoustic ▷ "Upper tailgate" alarm may be suppressed. Only the upper tailgate opens. ▷ Visual alarm: ▷ "Both tailgates" By flashing of the hazard warning system and The upper and lower tailgate will be headlights, where required. opened together.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 109
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Do not modify the system to ensure function of Indicator light on the interior the alarm system. mirror Switching on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.
Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ integrated key in the door lock. onds: The alarm system is switched on. Opening the tailgate with the ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, alarm system switched on then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor system is switched on. are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ not correctly closed. Correctly closed access tored again provided the doors are locked. The points are secured. hazard warning system flashes once. When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ Panic mode sor will be switched on. You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: self in a dangerous situation. The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐ and hold for at least 3 seconds. til drive-ready state is switched on, but no ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key longer than approx. 5 minutes: three times in succession. An alarm has been triggered. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 110
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Avoiding unintentional alarms Power windows General information General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized The windows can be opened with the vehicle action occurred. key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐ fort Access. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: With Comfort Access: The windows can be ▷ In automatic car washes. closed from the outside via Comfort Access. ▷ In duplex garages. When a window is often opened in the same po‐ ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sition, this task can be performed by the BMW sea or on a trailer. Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when ▷ With animals in the vehicle. the same parking garage is frequently used. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐ Additional information: ing. Vehicle key, refer to page 81. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to sor can be switched off in such situations. page 55.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor Safety information and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key within Warning 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is When operating the windows, body parts and locked. objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ or risk of damage to property. Make sure that onds and then continues to flash. the area of movement of the windows is clear The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor during opening and closing. are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Overview Switching off the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐ gency detection of the vehicle key. Malfunction, refer to page 84. ▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐ hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐ senger door handle completely. Power windows
Safety switch
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 111
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Functional requirements Safety information The windows can be operated under the follow‐ ing conditions. Warning ▷ Standby state is switched on. Accessories on the windows such as antennas ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. jury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows. Opening ▷ Press the switch to the resistance Closing without the jam protection point. system The window opens while the switch is being In case of danger from the outside or if ice might held. prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance The window opens automatically. Pressing point and hold it there. the switch again stops the motion. The window closes with limited jam protec‐ tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific Closing threshold, closing is interrupted. ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold The window closes while the switch is being it there. held. The window closes without jam protection. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. Safety switch The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. Concept Jam protection system The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐ dren, for instance from opening and closing the Concept rear windows using the switches in the rear. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the The jam protection prevents objects or body safety function is switched off automatically. parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed. Switching on/off General information Press the button. If resistance or a blockage is detected while a The LED lights up if the safety function window is being closed, the closing action is in‐ is switched on. terrupted. The window opens slightly.
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 112
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Roller sunblinds, rear side Overview windows
Safety information
Warning With closed roller sunblinds and open windows, the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐ ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may be damaged and vehicle occupants may be Opening/closing the glass sun‐ harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open roof. the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds are closed.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook it onto the bracket. Functional requirements The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be Glass sunroof operated under the following conditions. ▷ Standby state is switched on. General information ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐ erated using the same switch. Lifting/closing glass sunroof The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐ side with the vehicle key and also closed with Push switch briefly upward. Comfort Access. ▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be and the sun protection opens closed from the outside via Comfort Access. slightly. ▷ The opened glass sunroof Safety information closes until it is in the tilted position. The sun protection does not move. Warning ▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 113
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening/closing the glass Pressing the switch again sunroof and sun protection stops the motion. separately ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐ sion toward the front past the resistance ▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐ point. ance point and hold. The glass sunroof and sun protection are Holding down the switch closing together. opens the sun protection. If Pressing the switch again stops the motion. the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens. Comfort position ▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ and hold. terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not The glass sunroof closes while the switch is fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ being held. If the glass sunroof is already tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐ this comfort position. tection closes. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ ▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance roof fully. point. The sun protection opens automatically. If the Jam protection system sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically. Concept Pressing the switch again stops the motion. The jam protection prevents objects or body ▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance parts from becoming jammed between the roof point. and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐ ing. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted General information position, the sun protection closes automati‐ cally. If a resistance or blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is Pressing the switch again stops the motion. interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open position, or it is stopped when closing from the Opening/closing the glass tilted position. sunroof and sun protection together Closing from the open position without jam protection ▷ Briefly press out the switch In case of danger from the outside or if ice might twice in succession toward prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: the rear past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sun protection are opening to‐ gether.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 114
CONTROLS Opening and closing
▷ The external temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃. During initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. 1. Close all doors. 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance Initializing the system point and hold. Press the switch up and hold it The glass sunroof closes with limited jam until the initialization is complete: protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ cific threshold, closing is interrupted. 3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ ance point and hold until the glass sunroof Initialization begins within 15 seconds. closes without jam protection. Make sure that ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then the closing area is clear. closes again. Closing from the lifted position ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, without jam protection then opens and closes again. In case of danger from the outside or if ice might Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: and sun protection have opened then closed again.
1. Close all doors. 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information After a power failure during the opening or clos‐ ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐ ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system can help in this case. The system can be initialized under the following conditions: ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. ▷ The drive-ready state is established.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 115
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and Safety information options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐ It also describes features and functions that are trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when to the selected options or country versions. This the vehicle is stationary. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Warning served. With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐ Sitting safely sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or An ideal seat position that meets the needs of danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the occupants can make a vital contribution to the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the relaxed, fatigue-free driving. most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐ tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐ tion in the following chapters. Warning Additional information: There is a risk of jamming when moving the ▷ Seats, refer to page 115. seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 118. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 120. ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 187.
Seats
General information The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is stored for the driver profile currently used. When a driver profile is selected, the stored position is called up automatically. The current seat position can be stored using the memory function.
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 116
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Backrest width Move switch up or down. 2 Thigh support 3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Backrest tilt 4 Upper backrest 5 Backrest tilt, head restraint 6 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push the switch in the front or back.
Push switch up or down.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 117
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Adjusting ▷ Press the front section of the button: The backrest width de‐ creases. ▷ Press the rear section of the button: Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push The backrest width increases. the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest Lumbar support Concept Concept The upper backrest supports the back in the The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region laxed seating position and reduces strain on the of the spine. The lower back and the spine are shoulder muscles. supported for upright posture. General information Adjusting If the driver's door is opened when the drive- ▷ Press the front/rear section of ready state is switched off, the upper backrest the button: moves into the standard position. The curvature is increased/ decreased. Adjusting ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral ▷ Press the front section of the button: support when taking corners. The upper backrest is inclined forward. General information ▷ Press the rear section of the button: The backrest width is changed by adjusting the The upper backrest is inclined backward. side sections of the backrest.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 118
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Front passenger seat Safety belts functionality Number of safety belts and Concept safety belt buckles The front passenger seat can be adjusted with the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to The vehicle is fitted with five or seven safety increase the legroom in the rear. belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted cor‐ If needed, the memory position for the front pas‐ rectly. senger seat can be stored. General information Overview Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by the occupants before driving off. The airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐ tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐ tute for safety belts. The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information Front passenger seat functionality
Warning Switching on Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the 1. Press the button. The LED lights up. safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do 2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐ not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐ er's seat. gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐ 3. If needed, store the memory position for the lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐ front passenger seat. ported and secured in designated child restraint systems. Switching off Press the button. The LED goes out. The function deactivates itself automati‐ Warning cally after some time. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐ stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 119
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Buckling the safety belt Warning 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ and hip to put it on. tective function of the middle safety belt is not 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, audibly. lock the wider rear seat backrest.
Warning The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way. To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle, an ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were adjustable slider is available on the belt to help modified. position the buckle when not in use. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐ passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, ened once after driving away. safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐ tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have Unbuckling the safety belt the safety belts checked after an accident at 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. the dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism. Correct use of safety belts ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to Safety belt reminder for driver's your body over your lap and shoulders. seat and front passenger seat ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on Display in the instrument cluster your stomach. The indicator light lights up and a signal ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp sounds. Make sure that the safety belts edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or are positioned correctly. The safety belt fragile objects. reminder can also be activated if objects are ▷ Avoid thick clothing. placed on the front passenger seat. ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body.
119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 120
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Safety belt reminder for rear Safety information seats Warning General information A missing protective effect due to removed or The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐ not correctly adjusted head restraints can vated each time the engine starts. cause injuries in the head and neck area. There The safety belt reminder is also activated when a is a risk of injury. passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐ ▷ Before driving, install the removed head ing the trip. restraints on the occupied seats. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ Display in the instrument cluster ports the back of the head at as close to The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ eye level as possible. minates after the engine is started. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ Symbol Description straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the Green: the safety belt is buckled on backrest tilt as needed. the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on Warning the corresponding rear seat. Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make Safety mode sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint. In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐ gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ matically. Warning If the situation passes without an accident occur‐ ring, the belt tension relaxes. Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, is a risk of injury. stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ Front head restraints termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. General information ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance The current head restraint position can be stored pillows, while driving. using the memory function. Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 121
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Have the active head restraint checked and if Adjusting the side extensions necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the height
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ ing position.
Push switch up or down. Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Adjusting distance Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ cause injuries in the head and neck area. There straint toward the rear. is a risk of injury. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the ▷ Before driving, install the removed head front. restraints on the occupied seats. After setting the distance, make sure that the ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ head restraint engages correctly. ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 122
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Adjusting the height Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push is a risk of injury. the head restraint down. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes After setting the height, make sure that the head hangers, directly on the head restraint. restraint engages correctly. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a Removing head restraint. The head restraints cannot be removed. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Exterior mirrors Folding down the head restraints To improve the view to the rear, the outside head General information restraints can be folded back. Only fold the head The mirror on the front passenger side is more restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐ curved than the driver's side mirror. sponding seat. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When a driver profile is selected, the stored position is called up automatically. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function.
Safety information
Warning ▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than fold the head restraint backward. they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐ front as far as it will go. Make sure that the dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind head restraint engages correctly. by looking over your shoulder.
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 123
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Overview Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In car washes. ▷ On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the drive-ready state is 1 Adjusting switched on. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ Adjusting electrically matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐ ror are used to control this. Press the button. The selected mirror moves along with the Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior button movement. mirror
Selecting a mirror Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on To change over to the other mirror: the front passenger side is tilted downward. This Slide the switch. improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ ing obstacles when parking, for instance. Malfunction Activating In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. 1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. Folding in and out 2. Engage selector lever position R. When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing NOTICE is activated, the Automatic Curb Monitor is deac‐ Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle tivated. can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, Deactivating fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button. Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position. Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 124
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Interior mirror Electric steering wheel adjustment General information General information The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver Photocells are used for control: profile currently in use. When a driver profile is ▷ In the mirror glass. selected, the position is accessed automatically ▷ On the back of the mirror. when the drive-ready state is switched on. The current steering wheel position can be Overview stored using the memory function.
Adjusting
Functional requirements ▷ Keep the photocells clean. Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐ tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior position. mirror and the windshield.
Assistance getting in and out Steering wheel The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and Safety information exit the vehicle.
Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 125
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Heated steering wheel Safety information
Overview Warning Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the Button for heated steering wheel seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ Switching on/off ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. Press the button. A Check Control message is displayed. Overview If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the heated steering wheel activates automatically if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ The memory buttons are located on the front essary, retrieved using the memory function: doors. ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. Storing ▷ Steering wheel position. 1. Set the desired position. ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 2. Press the button. The writing on the General information button lights up. Two memory locations with different settings 3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is can be set for each driver profile. lit. A signal sounds. The following settings are not stored: ▷ Backrest width. Calling up settings ▷ Lumbar support. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The stored position is called up.
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 126
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
The procedure stops when a switch for setting Switching on the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐ tons is pressed again. Press the button once for each intensity level. Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while. The maximum intensity level is reached when three LEDs are lit.
Massage function Switching off Press and hold the button until the Concept LEDs go out. Depending on the program, the massage func‐ tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood circulation and can avoid fatigue. Adjusting the massage program 1. "CAR" General information 2. "Settings" Eight different massage programs can be se‐ 3. "Seat comfort" lected: 4. Select desired seat. ▷ Pelvis activation. 5. "Seat massage" ▷ Upper body activation. 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ Full body activation. ▷ Back massage. Seat and armrest heating ▷ Shoulder massage. ▷ Lumbar massage. Concept ▷ Upper body training. The system heats seats and armrests as ▷ Full body training. needed.
Overview General information Seat heating can also be used without armrest heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as needed.
Massage function
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 127
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Overview If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, functions are activated automatically Front with the temperature selected last. Switching off Press and hold the button, until the LEDs go out.
Seat heating distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and the seat backrest can be distributed in different ways. Seat and armrest heating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Rear 3. "Climate control" 4. Select the desired menu item. 5. Select desired seat. 6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Seat heating 3. "Climate control" 4. "Seat and armrest heating" Switching on 5. Select desired seat. 6. "Heat armrests with seat" 1. Press the button. 2. Select the temperature level: Active seat ventilation ▷ Press the button once for each level. ▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level Concept is reached. Press the Controller. Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas ▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐ provide a comfortable seat temperature. screen. Highest level reached when three red LEDs light up on the button or three red bars are shown on the Control Display.
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 128
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Overview When both systems are active, a push of the but‐ ton reduces the intensity of both functions by one level each. The last active function or function that is config‐ ured with higher intensity will be activated di‐ rectly when the system is switched on again. When both functions with the same intensity configuration are deactivated, the system will au‐ tomatically activate the seat heating.
Overview Active seat ventilation
Switching on
1. Press the button. 2. Select the ventilation level: ▷ Press the button once for each level. ▷ Turn the Controller until the desired level is reached. Press the Controller. Seat climate control ▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐ screen. Highest level reached when three blue LEDs Switching on light up on the button or three blue bars are shown on the Control Display. 1. Press the button. 2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐ Switching off screen. Press and hold the button, until the One red and one blue LED each will illumi‐ LEDs go out. nate.
Switching off Seat climate control Press and hold the button, until the LEDs go out. Concept The seat climate control combines the functions of the seat heating and active seat ventilation. Climate control rules
General information Concept The seat heating and active seat ventilation are A number of heating and cooling functions can operated with a common button on the climate be automatically activated depending on the ex‐ control panel. ternal temperature.
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 129
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
General information The external temperature at which the functions are to be automatically activated can be set via iDrive. Activation is performed if the external tempera‐ ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature in the first few minutes after drive-ready state has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐ ried out after the settings have been changed. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing functions can be automatically activated: ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Heated steering wheel. ▷ Seat ventilation. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐ cally with the levels that were last selected.
Functional requirement ▷ The safety belt of the driver's seat is buckled. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Climate control rules" 5. Select the desired functions. 6. Activate the desired rule. 7. Set the level.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 130
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and Warning options A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐ sons, especially children, or animals. There is a This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave cific and optional features offered with the series. persons, especially children, or animals unat‐ It also describes features and functions that are tended in the vehicle. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, Warning the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child served. restraint systems and their components to be‐ come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐ ries when touching the hot components. There The right place for children is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐ straint system to direct sunlight or cover where Safety information necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger Transport children in the rear themselves and traffic, for instance due to the seat following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment. signed for the age, weight and size of the child. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Children 13 years of age or older must wear a leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ system can no longer be used due to their age, ing and lock the vehicle. weight, or size.
130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 131
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information Installing child restraint systems Warning The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on General information children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐ ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐ Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can ating and safety information of the child restraint be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐ system manufacturer when selecting, installing, tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety and using child restraint systems. belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive Safety information maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, Warning 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been Children on the front passenger damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐ seat ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐ strained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or General information danger to life. Before using a child restraint system on the front Do not use child restraint systems which have passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and been damaged or exposed to an accident. side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐ activated. If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐ tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐ Additional information: dent, have these systems checked and re‐ For automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ placed by the dealer's service center or another ger airbags, refer to page 190. qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information Warning Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ child in a child restraint system when the air‐ ment or improper installation of the child seat. bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ sure that the child restraint system fits securely bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ against the backrest. If possible, adjust the GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them.
131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 132
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
Warning Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the air‐ bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐ bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐ ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ Before installing a child restraint system in the ten child restraint systems. front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger Locking the safety belt side are deactivated. 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. Additional information: 2. Secure the child restraint system with the For automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ safety belt. ger airbags, refer to page 190. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it Seat position and height tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Unlocking the safety belt and, if possible, bring it up to the highest posi‐ tion. This seat position and height ensure the 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. best possible position for the belt and offers opti‐ 2. Remove the child restraint system. mal protection in the event of an accident. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in pletely. front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached. LATCH child restraint fixing system Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a General information child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. change the backrest width again and do not call Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ up a memory position. ating and safety information from the child re‐ straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐ stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 133
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Mounts for the lower LATCH Before installing LATCH child anchors restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the General information child restraint system. The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child Assembly of LATCH child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restraint fixing systems restrained by the internal harnesses. 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ er's information. Safety information 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly engaged. Warning If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of Child restraint systems the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐ with tether strap ited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fix‐ Safety information ing system fits securely against the backrest. Warning Position If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ Symbol Meaning fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run The corresponding symbol over sharp edges and is not twisted as it shows the mounts for the lower passes the upper anchor. LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower an‐ chors are marked with a pair, (2), Warning of LATCH symbols. If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective For vehicles equipped with a effect of the child restraint system is limited or middle seat: there is none. In certain situations, for instance It is not recommended to use braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the inner lower anchors of the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a standard outer LATCH positions risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that to fasten a child restraint system the rear backrests are locked. on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ hicle safety belt instead for the middle seat. NOTICE The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 134
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount between or along both sides of the supports child restraint systems to the upper anchors. of the head restraint to the anchor. 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the backrest and the cargo cover. Anchors 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor. Symbol Meaning 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. The respective symbol shows 6. Lower and engage head restraint as needed. the anchor for the upper retain‐ ing strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this Locking the doors and symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear windows in the rear window shelf. General information Routing the retaining strap In certain situations it may be advisable to secure the rear doors and windows, for instance when transporting children.
Doors
1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Anchor Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Attaching the upper retaining Safety switch for the rear strap to the anchor Press the button on the driver's door. 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or This locks various functions so that they cannot along both sides of the supports for the head be operated from the rear. restraint to the anchor. Additional information: Middle seat: raise the head restraint, if Safety switch, refer to page 111. needed, press the button on the mounts for this purpose. Guide the upper retaining strap
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 135
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and stored in the high-voltage battery and is used to drive the electric motor. options The high-voltage battery can be charged via the charging socket at charging stations or house‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ hold sockets. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are Overview not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Hybrid system components tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served.
BMW eDRIVE
Concept This BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the combustion engine, the vehicle features a high- 1 Combustion engine voltage hybrid system that consists of an electric 2 Power electronics motor and a high-voltage battery among other 3 Electric motor things. 4 High-voltage cables: orange The hybrid system can move the vehicle entirely 5 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine on battery power. It can also support the com‐ bustion engine in certain situations. 6 High-voltage battery 7 Charging control unit General information 8 Charging socket The vehicle does not consume any fuel while running on battery power. This enables environ‐ Settings of the hybrid system mentally friendly driving without emissions in cer‐ tain conditions, for example, in city traffic. General information During driving with the combustion engine, the hybrid system helps to lower fuel consumption. The hybrid system properties can be set to the The electric motor is switched on to support this, following hybrid modes using Driving Dynamics if required by the situation. Control: In addition to this, the electric motor acts as an ▷ SPORT alternator: during braking and coasting, the elec‐ ▷ HYBRID tric motor converts the vehicle's kinetic energy ▷ ELECTRIC into electrical energy. The electrical energy is ▷ ADAPTIVE
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 136
CONTROLS Driving
▷ BATTERY CONTROL Charging the vehicle Different system-related maximum speeds apply The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be to the different settings. The electrical speed charged via the charging socket at charging sta‐ range that can be achieved in each case is indi‐ tions or household sockets. cated by a blue marking in the speedometer. Regular and complete charging of the high-volt‐ age battery reduces the fuel consumption by us‐ HYBRID, ADAPTIVE, and SPORT ing electric energy. The vehicle is moved in hybrid mode, i.e., the Additional information: drive combines the combustion engine and elec‐ tric motor. Charge vehicle, refer to page 342.
ELECTRIC Climate control while parking In ELECTRIC, the vehicle is driven exclusively and charging electrically. The hybrid system makes it possible to operate the automatic climate control prior to driving off BATTERY CONTROL and with the combustion engine switched off. With BATTERY CONTROL, the electric range During vehicle charging or if the high-voltage can be maintained and conserved for a later battery is sufficiently charged, the car's interior point in the trip or increased as needed. can be can be cooled or heated in advance of the trip. Displays of the hybrid system The stationary climate control can also be The displays of the hybrid system provide infor‐ switched on directly. mation about the current state of hybrid opera‐ Additional information: tion and show the system activity in a chart. Stationary climate control, refer to page 301. Additional information: Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 160. Energy-saving driving To save energy while driving, read the following While driving descriptions. Observe the descriptions on the following topics Additional information: in Chapter Functions while driving: ▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 335. ▷ General driving notes. ▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to ▷ Safety Instructions. page 336. ▷ Functional requirements. ▷ Drive modes for optimizing consumption, re‐ ▷ Auto Start/Stop function, coasting. fer to page 337. ▷ Energy recovery, CHARGE. Safety of the hybrid system ▷ Assistance from the electric motor. Additional information: ▷ Adaptive hybrid mode. Working on the hybrid system, refer to page 15. Additional information: Functions while driving, refer to page 138. Acoustic pedestrian protection Depending on the country-specific version, the system generates a continuous driving noise at
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 137
Driving CONTROLS
standstill with the drive-ready state activated and The full drive power may not be available for ap‐ during electric driving up to approx. proximately 30 seconds after starting the com‐ 20 mph/30 km/h. bustion engine. In this case, the vehicle will not A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the accelerate as usual. surroundings. The maximum drive power can be utilized as As a result, other road users, for instance pedes‐ soon as eBoost is available. trians or cyclists, can better perceive the vehicle.
Long-term vehicle storage Auto Start/Stop function Observe the information on vehicle storage and on longer idle periods. Concept Additional information: The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the combustion engine Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage, when conditions for electric driving have been refer to page 413. met. The standby state remains on.
Start/Stop button General information READY is displayed in the instrument cluster. If Concept necessary, the combustion engine starts auto‐ matically. Pressing the Start/Stop button The combustion engine is also stopped during switches drive-ready state on or the trip when rolling without acceleration or brak‐ off. ing. This driving condition, in which the vehicle is Drive-ready state is switched on traveling without power and energy recovery is when you depress the brake not active, is referred to as coasting. pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. The combustion engine is not switched off auto‐ Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches matically in the following situations: the drive-ready state back off and standby state ▷ The combustion engine is not at operating is switched back on. temperature. Drive-ready state cannot be switched on, as long ▷ The transmission selector lever is in position as the charging cable is connected. M/S. Additional information: ▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged or vehicle electrical system is heavily burdened. ▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 40. ▷ High stress of the automatic climate control ▷ Standby state, refer to page 40. in the heating or cooling phase. ▷ Charging cable, refer to page 344. ▷ Hood is unlocked. Driving away ▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the current driving style, for instance during the break-in 1. Switch on drive-ready state. period or after a service appointment. 2. Apply gear position. ▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Drive away.
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 138
CONTROLS Driving
Safety mode While driving electrically with ePOWER, the vehi‐ cle is powered by the electric motor. An automatically stopped combustion engine does not start independently: Depending on the charge state of the high-volt‐ age battery, maximum speed, the vehicle's ca‐ ▷ With the driver's door open, if neither the pacity to accelerate, and range can vary. brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal is de‐ pressed, and the driver's safety belt is not For electric driving and driving with the combus‐ fastened. tion engine, the relevant conditions must be sat‐ isfied. ▷ When the hood is unlocked. Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐ The indicator lights come on. The combustion ergy. To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel engine can only be started via the Start/Stop but‐ consumption, the electric motor boosts the com‐ ton. bustion engine. Switching off the vehicle during Safety information an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when Warning leaving it. When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐ 1. Press the Start/Stop button. hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a ▷ The standby state is activated. risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic ▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐ conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ vated. tervene where appropriate. ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ matically. Functional requirements 2. Set the parking brake. Electric driving Malfunction ▷ State of charge and temperature of the high- The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches voltage battery is sufficient. off the combustion engine automatically in the ▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged. event of a malfunction. A message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system ▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed too checked. far. ▷ The possible maximum speed for electric driving is not exceeded. Functions while driving Automatic starting of the General information combustion engine while driving The combustion engine provides the main drive Depending on the set hybrid mode, the combus‐ power. If required, the high-voltage battery is tion engine is automatically started under condi‐ charged at the same time. The hybrid system tions such as the following while driving: starts the combustion engine automatically. ▷ When accelerating heavily or on uphill grades.
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 139
Driving CONTROLS
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the Energy recovery: CHARGE resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. Concept ▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐ charge. verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐ ▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged. cal energy during braking and coasting. ▷ During manual gear-shifting using the shift This recovered energy charges the high-voltage paddles. battery. If necessary, this stored electrical energy ▷ Anticipatory hybrid drive with active destina‐ is output to the electric motor. tion guidance, e.g., out of town. General information ▷ System-related demand from the hybrid components. Depending on the set hybrid mode, the high- voltage battery is charged at different speeds Automatic switching-off of the and the vehicle decelerated differently while combustion engine while driving coasting. Depending on the driving situation, the combus‐ Functional requirements tion engine is switched off if the conditions for electric driving are met. Conditions such as the following must be met to recover kinetic energy: Auto Start/Stop function, ▷ The vehicle is moving. coasting ▷ Selector lever position D, M/S is set. ▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully charged. Concept The Auto Start/Stop function switches the com‐ Displays in the instrument cluster bustion engine off while the vehicle is moving, Additional information: when braking, when rolling to a halt, and while Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 160. the vehicle is stopped. The condition of rolling without energy recovery with the combustion en‐ gine switched off is referred to as coasting. Com‐ Assistance from the electric fort functions such as automatic climate control motor are supplied by the high-voltage battery and can remain switched on. Concept After coasting, the combustion engine or electric The combustion engine provides the main drive motor provides the necessary drive power auto‐ power. matically again, depending on the hybrid mode. The electric motor provides assistance as needed with additional propulsive power. Functional requirements Coasting is possible under the following condi‐ eASSIST tions: During normal vehicle operation, the electric mo‐ ▷ In HYBRID ECO PRO drive mode when the tor assists the combustion engine, depending on traffic situation allows. the situation. ▷ Transmission position D is engaged.
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 140
CONTROLS Driving
eBOOST Displays Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, re‐ 1. "CAR" quires the maximum available power from the 2. "Driving information" electric motor. To do this, depress the accelera‐ 3. "Energy flow" tor pedal firmly. Display Adaptive hybrid mode
Concept The system facilitates an optimal distribution of the available electric energy to permit electric driving with active destination guidance of the navigation system in the city and in the destina‐ tion region. If the high-voltage battery is suffi‐ ciently charged, additional route sections will be selected for electric driving. Example: out of town situation. Electric driving is General information prepared before arriving in a town. When the town is reached, the vehicle switches to electric For example, downhill gradients are taken into driving automatically. account for efficient energy recovery. Other situations are also shown on the Control Depending on the route section, the combustion Display: engine is automatically switched on or off, which supports an efficient driving style and emission- ▷ Downhill gradient: the vehicle drives electri‐ free driving in the inner city. cally on the downhill gradient and and the high-voltage battery is charged. Additional information: ▷ Target zone: electric driving is preferred in Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to the target zone. page 336. ▷ Energy distribution: when the state of charge Functional requirements of the high-voltage battery is sufficient, elec‐ tric driving is preferred when driving extended ▷ Selector lever position D engaged. distances out of town. ▷ Destination guidance active. ▷ Depending on the equipment version, HY‐ BRID STANDARD, HYBRID ECO PRO, HY‐ Driving Dynamics Control BRID COMFORT or ADAPTIVE activated. Concept Activating/deactivating Driving Dynamics Control influences the driving 1. "CAR" dynamics and hybrid system properties of the 2. "Settings" vehicle. 3. "General settings" The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the 4. "Anticipatory hybrid drive" situation using various driving modes.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 141
Driving CONTROLS
General information Button Driving mode
The following systems are affected, for instance: ADAPTIVE ▷ Engine characteristics. ▷ Properties of the hybrid system. BATTERY CONTROL ▷ Steptronic transmission. ▷ Steering. Some driving modes can be configured individu‐ ▷ Integral Active Steering. ally. ▷ Two-axle ride level control. ▷ Display in the instrument cluster. Driving modes in detail ▷ Cruise control. SPORT STANDARD Overview Concept Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐ mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on Press the button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL Displays in the instrument cluster Concept The selected drive mode is dis‐ Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT played in the instrument cluster. INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Driving modes 3. "Driving mode" Button Driving mode 4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL" 5. Select the desired setting: SPORT STANDARD The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ SPORT INDIVIDUAL rently used. HYBRID STANDARD Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ HYBRID ECO PRO tings: "Reset to SPORT STANDARD". ELECTRIC STANDARD ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 142
CONTROLS Driving
HYBRID STANDARD Additional information: BMW eDrive, refer to page 135. Concept HYBRID STANDARD is activated with each start Switching on process that uses the Start/Stop button. In HYBRID STANDARD, the vehicle is driven in 1. Press the button. hybrid mode based on the various driving situa‐ 2. "ELECTRIC" tions, i.e., the drive combines the combustion 3. "STANDARD" engine and electric motor. The respectively most effective drive type is preferred. ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL
Switching on Concept The vehicle is driven exclusively by electric 1. Press the button. power. 2. "HYBRID" In ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐ 3. "STANDARD" ual settings can be made for comfort functions, such as climate control output. This supports a HYBRID ECO PRO fuel-efficient driving style.
Concept Switching on In HYBRID ECO PRO, the vehicle is driven in hy‐ brid mode based on the various driving situa‐ 1. Press the button. tions. HYBRID ECO PRO supports a fuel-effi‐ 2. "ELECTRIC" cient driving style by adapting the engine control 3. "INDIVIDUAL" and comfort functions, such as climate control output. Configuration Switching on ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL can be specified as the default mode, for example.
1. Press the button. 1. "CAR" 2. "HYBRID" 2. "Settings" 3. "ECO PRO" 3. "Driving mode" 4. "Configure INDIVIDUAL" ELECTRIC STANDARD 5. Select the desired setting. Concept The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The vehicle is driven exclusively by electric rently used. power. Reset ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐ If necessary, the maximum electric speed that tings: applies to ELECTRIC STANDARD may be delib‐ "Reset". erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown. The combustion engine is automatically started and the system switches to to the last selected HY‐ BRID mode. 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 143
Driving CONTROLS
ADAPTIVE Via iDrive: 1. "CAR" Concept 2. "Settings" Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is automatically modified to the driving situation 3. "Driving mode" and driving style. 4. "BATTERY CONTROL" If the navigation system is active, upcoming road 5. Set the desired value. sections are considered. The charge state to be conserved is displayed as a percentage value on the Control Display. Switching on A marking is set in the instrument cluster for the Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐ adjusted value in the charge state indicator of the played in the instrument cluster. high-voltage battery. Additional information: BATTERY CONTROL High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer to page 160. General information A certain charge state of the high-voltage battery INDIVIDUAL configuration can be maintained or increased with BATTERY CONTROL. This charge state can be adjusted. General information The electric range can be conserved in this way The individual configuration of the driving mode for a later point in the trip, for instance. is stored for the active driver profile. The last set If the current charge state is too low, the battery configuration is activated directly when the driv‐ is charged during the trip. This charging process ing mode is called up again. increases the average consumption. Activating configuration of the Switching on driving mode Press the button. Press the button for the desired driving mode The LED on the button is illuminated several times. red. Parking brake Adjusting the charge state The charge state can be set in various ways. Concept Using the button: The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. 1. Press the button. BATTERY CONTROL is shown in the instru‐ ment cluster and on the Control Display. 2. Select "Set target value" on the Control Dis‐ play. 3. "Target:": set the desired value.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 144
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information Overview
Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. Parking brake ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Setting ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a With a stationary vehicle wheel chock. Pull the switch. The LED lights up. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ can cause the vehicle to move and endanger ter illuminates red. The parking brake is themselves and traffic, for instance due to the set. following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. While driving ▷ Releasing the parking brake. General information ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. To use as emergency brake while driving. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being ▷ Using vehicle equipment. pulled. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and ing and lock the vehicle. the brake lights illuminate. A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐ gency stop function.
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 145
Driving CONTROLS
Additional information: Safety information Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 221. Warning Releasing An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Releasing manually Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ 1. Switch on drive-ready state. ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured 2. Press the switch while stepping on the against rolling away, follow the following: brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. ▷ Set the parking brake. The LED and indicator light go out. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The parking brake is released. turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Automatic release ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The parking brake is released automatically also secure the vehicle, for instance with a when you drive away. wheel chock. The LED and indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle Concept can cause the vehicle to move and endanger This system assists the driver by automatically themselves and traffic, for instance due to the setting and releasing the brake, such as when following actions: moving in stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it ▷ Releasing the parking brake. is stationary. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle dows. from rolling backward when driving off. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. General information There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Under the following conditions, the parking brake leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ is automatically engaged: hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. ing and lock the vehicle. ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle is stationary. ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill NOTICE using the parking brake. If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ Display cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of The indicator light changes from green damage to property. Deactivate Automatic Hold to red. prior to entering the car wash.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 146
CONTROLS Driving
Overview Activating the parking brake automatically The parking brake is automatically set if drive- ready state is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is exited. The indicator light changes from green to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the Automatic Hold drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐ cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐ vated. Establishing function readiness of Automatic Hold Switching function readiness off 1. Switch on drive-ready state. Press the button. The LED goes out. 2. Press the button. The LED lights up. The indicator light goes out. The indicator light lights up green. Automatic Hold is functional. Automatic Hold is switched off. After every new vehicle start, the last se‐ If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, lected setting is active. press additionally on the brake pedal, when switching off.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle Malfunction Function readiness is established and the driv‐ If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure er's door is closed. the vehicle against rolling before exiting. After stepping on the brake pedal, for in‐ A Check Control message is displayed. stance when stopping at a traffic light, Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ the vehicle is automatically secured stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐ against rolling. cle. The indicator light lights up green. After a power failure Driving off To reestablish parking brake functionality after a Press the accelerator pedal to drive off. power failure: The brake is released automatically and the indi‐ 1. Switch on standby state. cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐ nated. 2. Pull the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set and then push.
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 147
Driving CONTROLS
This process may take a few seconds. Some Signaling briefly mechanical sounds associated with this process Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it are normal. there for as long as you want the turn signal to The indicator light is no longer illumi‐ flash. nated as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again. High beams, headlight flasher Turn signal Push the lever forward or pull it backward. Turn signal in exterior mirror When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system Press the lever past the resistance point. General information Triple turn signal activation Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as Lightly tap the lever up or down. this may damage the wiper blades or cause them The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. to become worn more quickly. 1. "CAR" Safety information 2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting" Warning 4. "One-touch turn signal" If the wipers start moving in the folded away 5. Select the desired setting. state, body parts can be jammed or damage The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk rently used. of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 148
CONTROLS Driving
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it ers are folded in when switching on. reaches its standard position. ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position. NOTICE The lever automatically returns to its initial If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the position when released. wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a Rain sensor risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ shield prior to switching the wipers on. Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time Switching on between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.
General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE Press the lever up until the desired position is If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can reached. accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐ vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. ▷ Rain sensor, position 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. Activating When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Press the lever down.
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 149
Driving CONTROLS
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not Cleaning the windshield start.
Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automatically Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of heated while standby state is switched on. the rain sensor. Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity. Rear window wiper Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity. Overview Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐ tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. Switching on Turn the outer switch upward. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. NOTICE ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ wash pump cannot work as intended. There is tinuous operation. a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir Clean the rear window is empty. Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 150
CONTROLS Driving
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward, 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to wipers stop in a close to vertical position. its idle position when released. ▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the The fold-away position enables the wipers to be windshield. folded away from the windshield.
General information Important, for instance when changing the wiper blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐ tions.
Safety information
Warning Folding down the wipers If the wipers start moving in the folded away After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper state, body parts can be jammed or damage system must be reactivated. may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ sure that the vehicle is switched off when the shield. wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ 2. Switch on standby state and press and hold ers are folded in when switching on. the wiper lever down again. 3. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ Steptronic transmission tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ Concept shield prior to switching the wipers on. The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ Folding away the wipers sibility of manual shifting, if needed. 1. Switch on standby state.
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 151
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary Warning and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and gaged. possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐ Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle ing, for instance with the parking brake. may begin to move. Also set parking brake. Additional information: Selector lever positions Parking brake, refer to page 143.
Drive mode D Engaging selector lever Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐ positions tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐ tomatically. General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you R is reverse select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the Engage selector lever position R only when the brake pedal until you are ready to start. vehicle is stationary. Functional requirements Neutral N Only when the drive-ready state is switched on The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever change from selector lever position P to another position N. selector lever position. The selection lever position P cannot be Parking position P changed until all technical requirements are met.
General information Engaging selector lever position D, Selector lever position, for instance for parking N, R the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐ A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty ual wheels in selector lever position P. operation: Engage selector lever position P only when the ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ vehicle is stationary. tion R. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ P is engaged automatically sition P into another selector lever position. Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ 1. Fasten driver's safety belt. cally in situations such as the following: ▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐ gaged. ▷ After the standby state has been switched off when selector lever position N is engaged.
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 152
CONTROLS Driving
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ Engaging selector lever position N lector lever lock. 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold. Automatic Hold, refer to page 145. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. 6. Switch off drive-ready state. 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ In this way, standby state remains switched tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The on, and a Check Control message is dis‐ selector lever automatically returns to the played. center position when released. The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally after approximately 35 minutes. Engaging selector lever position P If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed.
Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐ ance point at the full throttle position. Press button P. Sport program M/S Rolling or pushing the vehicle Concept General information The shifting points and shifting times in the In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without Sport program are designed for a sportier driving its own power for a short distance, for instance in style. The transmission, for instance shifts up a car wash, or be pushed. later and the shifting times are shorter.
152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 153
Driving CONTROLS
Activating the Sport program Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐ tor lever position D, arrow 1.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it cluster, for instance S1. backward, arrows 2. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ Manual mode becomes active and the gear is vated. changed. eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Stop The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument function are deactivated. Coasting to a standstill cluster, for instance M1. and braking phases are used more often to re‐ cover energy. The high-voltage battery can be Shifting charged depending on the driving situation. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ Charging may increase the fuel consumption. ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. Ending the Sport program The transmission continues shifting automati‐ Push the selector lever to the right. cally in certain situations, for instance when D is displayed in the instrument cluster. speed limits are reached.
Manual mode M/S Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S Concept manual mode Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode. Depending on the motorization: if drive mode SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐ mission does not automatically upshift in M/ S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ down. Additional information: SPORT, refer to page 141.
Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right.
153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 154
CONTROLS Driving
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shifting
Shift paddles
Concept The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
General information ▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle. Shifting ▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle. The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and ▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: road speeds. keep the left shift paddle pulled. Short-term manual mode The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode temporarily. After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ Displays in the instrument out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles cluster for a certain amount of time, the transmission The selector lever position is dis‐ switches back to automatic mode. played, for example P. It is possible to switch into automatic mode: ▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle. Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock Continuous manual mode In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐ General information dle switches into manual mode permanently. Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. Steptronic Sport transmission Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the With the appropriate transmission version, the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ away. neously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible in short- Engage selector lever position N term manual mode. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Hold the Start/ Stop button pressed. 3. With your free hand, press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector lever into selector lever position N and hold, 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 155
Driving CONTROLS
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐ Start with launch control played in the instrument cluster. 1. Switch on drive-ready state. A Check Control message is displayed. 2. Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. 3. Engage selector lever position S. 4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle 4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. position, kickdown. 5. Release the brake. A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐ 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area ment cluster. and secure it against moving on its own. 6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait Additional information: briefly until the engine speed is constant. Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 406. Keep the accelerator pedal in this position. 7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the Launch Control destination flag illuminates. The vehicle accelerates. Concept Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the Launch Control enables optimum acceleration destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐ on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐ tor pedal is not released. rounding conditions. Repeated use during a trip General information After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ The use of Launch Control causes premature mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes component wear since this function represents a before Launch Control can be used again. very heavy load for the vehicle. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐ Do not use Launch Control during the break-in ditions, when used again. period. Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off After using Launch Control with Launch Control. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ Additional information: namic Stability Control again as soon as possible. Breaking-in period, refer to page 326. System limits Functional requirement An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Launch Control is available when the engine is at operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐ ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 156
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle features and Overview options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 1 Fuel gauge 168 served. Overall range 169 2 Speedometer Instrument cluster 3 Central display area 156 Navigation display Concept Charging screen 159 The instrument cluster is a variable display. 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐ When you change to a different program via Driv‐ tion Camera ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐ 5 Selection lists 173 ment cluster adapt to the respective drive mode. Widgets in the instrument cluster 158 General information Trip odometer, see Trip data 174 Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be Performance display 168 possible to deactivate the display change in the Status, Driving Dynamics Control 140 instrument cluster via iDrive. Transmission display 150 Some of the displays in the instrument cluster 6 High-voltage battery charge indicator 160 may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Electric range 160 Manual. 7 External temperature 169 8 Check Control 161 9 Speed Limit Assist 247 Speed Limit Info 171 Time 63
Central display area Depending on the equipment and configuration, the following is displayed in the central display area of the instrument cluster:
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 157
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or, Safety information if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐ view with destination guidance information. Warning ▷ Displays showing service notifications. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the ▷ Charging screen. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility ▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. assist systems is displayed in an animated Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding area of the vehicle. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Some displays in the central display area can be propriate. configured individually. The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ment version and country variant. Settings
Adjusting Permanent display 1. "CAR" Individual displays in the instrument cluster can be configured individually. 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 1. "CAR" 4. "Instrument panel" 2. "Settings" 5. "Central display area" 3. "Displays" 6. "Assisted Driving View" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired setting. Temporary display 1. "CAR" Assisted Driving View 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" Concept 4. "Instrument panel" Depending on the equipment, information about 5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver the driver assistance systems is displayed in an Assistance is active" animated surrounding area of the vehicle when driver assistance is active. Display
General information Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐ rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐ ment cluster.
Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐ tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 158
CONTROLS Displays
and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane Display change to the next lane. At the same time, the lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐ mation in the Assisted Driving View.
System limits The system's detection potential is limited. Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account.
Widgets G-meter The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐ Concept plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on Displays for specific functions can be displayed the vehicle occupants while driving. in the instrument cluster. The following displays can be selected: Efficiency display ▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio. Concept ▷ Torque and power. Information about driving style and consumption ▷ G-Meter. can be displayed in the form of a consumption ▷ Trip data. display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for ▷ Efficiency display. example.
Selecting General information Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐ ent information will be displayed: Driving Display mode
HYBRID Average consumption, fuel. Current consumption, fuel. Consumption display, fuel. Odometer for driving without a Continue to press the button on the turn signal combustion engine. lever until the desired widget is selected. ELEC‐ Average consumption, electric. TRIC Current consumption, electric. Consumption display, electric. Odometer for driving without a combustion engine.
SPORT Engine temperature.
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 159
Displays CONTROLS
Average consumption rently driving in an efficient and environmentally- The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐ friendly manner. sumption when driving a specific route. In ELECTRIC, the current electric consumption In ELECTRIC, the average electric consumption is displayed. is displayed.
Current consumption The current consumption displays the current consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
Charging screen
Overview
1 Range for electric driving 349 5 Departure time with timer 350 2 Charging status with charging cable 349 6 Maximum electrical range 349 3 Timer, departure time 350 7 Stationary climate control 350 4 End of charging time 349 8 Current charge state 349
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 160
CONTROLS Displays
Displays of the hybrid Display system
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information The following functions of the hybrid system are displayed: ▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator. ▷ Electric range, arrow 1. ▷ Drive-ready state: READY. ▷ Current charge state, arrow 2. ▷ Electric driving: ELECTRIC. ▷ Adjusted charge state of the BATTERY CONTROL function, arrow 3. ▷ Electric driving: ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL ▷ Hybrid mode: HYBRID STANDARD. Drive-ready state: READY ▷ Hybrid mode: HYBRID ECO PRO. READY indicates drive-ready ▷ BATTERY CONTROL. state. The display depends on the system's operating condition.
High-voltage battery charge Additional information: indicator Drive-ready state, refer to page 40. Concept Electric driving: ELECTRIC Indicates the current charge state of the high- voltage battery as a percentage. The display becomes active after ELECTRIC is activated via Driving Safety information Dynamics Control.
Warning Additional information: Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. battery is discharged, the high-voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change Electric driving: ELECTRIC live parts, for instance orange high-voltage ca‐ INDIVIDUAL bles, even when the batteries are discharged. The display becomes active after ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL is acti‐ vated via Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol.
Additional information:
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 161
Displays CONTROLS
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐ gine. Hybrid mode: HYBRID STANDARD Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system. The display becomes active after ▷ Vehicle states: HYBRID STANDARD is activated ▷ ePOWER. via Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ POWER. ▷ eBOOST. Additional information: ▷ CHARGE. Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. ▷ Coasting. ▷ Charging. Hybrid mode: HYBRID ECO PRO ▷ System requirements of the hybrid system, The display becomes active after for instance drive system not yet warmed up HYBRID ECO PRO is activated to operating temperature. via Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ Driver request, for instance transmission se‐ lector lever in the M/S position.
Additional information: Displaying the current vehicle state Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" BATTERY CONTROL 3. "Energy flow" The display becomes active after BATTERY CONTROL is acti‐ vated via the BATTERY CON‐ Check Control TROL button. Concept The available electric range is conserved for a The Check Control system monitors functions in later point in the trip. the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in Additional information: the monitored systems. Drive modes in detail, refer to page 141. General information Indications on the Control A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ Display bination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ Current vehicle state cable, in the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a General information text message may appear on the Control Display. The following are displayed: ▷ Active components of the hybrid system. ▷ Direction of the energy flows:
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 162
CONTROLS Displays
Hiding Check Control messages SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐ bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indica‐ tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as the reason for an error or malfunction or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. Press the button on the turn signal lever. With urgent messages the added text will be au‐ tomatically displayed on the Control Display. Continuous display Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐ ther help can be selected. Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ 1. "CAR" function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐ 2. "Vehicle status" cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐ 3. "Check Control" utively. 4. Select the desired text message. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ onds. After this time, they are displayed again 5. Select the desired setting. automatically. Messages after trip completion Temporary display Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐ Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ played again after drive-ready state is switched matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check off. Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ played again later. Indicator/warning lights Displaying stored Check Control messages Concept 1. "CAR" Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster display the status of some functions in the vehi‐ 2. "Vehicle status" cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in 3. "Check Control" the monitored systems. 4. Select the SMS text message. General information Display The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. Check Control Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ At least one Check Control message is tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready displayed or stored. state is switched on.
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 163
Displays CONTROLS
Red lights Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an eva‐ Safety belt reminder sive maneuver, if necessary. Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: Additional information: safety belt on the driver or passenger Front collision mitigation, refer to page 192. side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐ minder can also be activated if objects are placed Intersection collision warning on the front passenger seat. The indicator light is illuminated: risk of Make sure that the safety belts are positioned collision with crossing vehicle. correctly.
Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐ Safety belt reminder for rear seats sion with vehicle without detectable di‐ rection of travel or prewarning for vehi‐ The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐ cles that cross own direction of travel. responding rear seat. Intervene yourself, for instance by braking. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal Airbag system sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own Airbag system and belt tensioner may direction of travel. not be working. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ Have the vehicle checked immediately sary. by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: Intersection collision warning, refer to page 198. Parking brake Person warning with City braking The parking brake is set. function Indicator light flashes and an acoustic Additional information: signal sounds: imminent collision with a detected person or a cyclist. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 145. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Brake system Additional information: Braking system impaired. Continue to Person warning with City braking function, refer drive moderately. to page 203. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another Night Vision with pedestrian and qualified service center or repair shop. animal detection
Front collision mitigation The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐ warning. Brake and increase distance.
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 164
CONTROLS Displays
An infrared camera scans the area in Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to front of the vehicle and issues a warning page 249. if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street. Antilock Braking System ABS The indicator light is illuminated: prewarning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ The Brake Assistant function may not sary. activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Immediate braking or Have the system immediately checked evading maneuver. by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control tion, refer to page 206. The indicator light flashes: DSC controls Active Cruise Control with Stop & the drive and braking forces. The vehicle Go function is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ signal sounds: braking and evading. tioned. Additional information: Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐ er's service center or another qualified service Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ center or repair shop. fer to page 238. Additional information: Steering and traffic jam assistant DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to Indicator light flashes and an acoustic page 228. signal sounds: the system will be switched off. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Additional information: Traction Control is activated Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 249. DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
Yellow lights Additional information: Steering and traffic jam assistant ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 228. The indicator light lights up and an ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to acoustic signal may sound: a system in‐ page 230. terruption is imminent. The indicator warning light flashes: lane marking Flat Tire Monitor FTM driven over. The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation Additional information: pressure in a tire.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 165
Displays CONTROLS
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ sudden braking and steering maneuvers. cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring Additional information: in the engine. Run-flat tires, refer to page 376. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious Tire pressure monitor engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ The indicator light illuminates: the Tire ously damage emission control components, Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐ in particular the catalytic converter. tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐ formation in the Check Control message. Additional information: The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses page 395. cannot be detected. Acoustic pedestrian protection ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving inactive the area of the interference, the system auto‐ Acoustic pedestrian protection defective. matically becomes active again. Have the system checked by a dealer's ▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the service center or another qualified serv‐ tire pressure monitor was unable to complete ice center or repair shop. the reset. Reset the system again. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is Green lights mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center Safety belt reminder for rear seats or repair shop as needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified sponding rear seat. service center or repair shop.
Additional information: Turn signal Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 369. Turn signal switched on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator Steering system light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Steering system may not be working. Have the system checked by a dealer's Additional information: service center or another qualified serv‐ Turn signal, refer to page 147. ice center or repair shop. Parking lights Emissions Parking lights are switched on. ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the Additional information: vehicle checked as soon as possible. Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 180.
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 166
CONTROLS Displays
Low beams Speed Limiter Low beams are switched on. The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. The indicator light flashes: the set speed Additional information: limit has been exceeded. Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 180. Additional information: Lane departure warning Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 234. The indicator light lights up: the system is activated. A lane marking was detected Cruise control on at least one side of the vehicle and Indicator light is illuminated: the system warnings can be issued. is active.
Additional information: Additional information: Lane departure warning, refer to page 209. Cruise control, refer to page 236.
Front fog lights Active Cruise Control with Stop & Front fog lights are switched on. Go function The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. Additional information: Front fog lights, refer to page 184.
High-beam Assistant Additional information: High-beam Assistant is switched on. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ High beams are switched on and off au‐ fer to page 238. tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐ uation. Speed Limit Assist Additional information: Depending on the equipment, indicator High-beam Assistant, refer to page 182. light illuminates together with the symbol for a cruise control system: Speed Limit Automatic Hold Assist is active and detected speed limits can be applied manually for the displayed system. Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is Indicator light illuminates: the detected stationary. speed limit can be applied with the SET button. As soon as the speed limit has Additional information: been applied, a green checkmark is displayed. Automatic Hold, refer to page 145. Additional information: Speed Limit Assist, refer to page 247.
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 167
Displays CONTROLS
Steering and traffic jam assistant Gray lights Indicator light lights up: the system sup‐ ports the driver in keeping the vehicle Active Cruise Control with Stop & within the lane. Go function Indicator light is illuminated: the system Additional information: is interrupted. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to Indicator light flashes: the conditions are page 249. not adequate for the system to work or the sys‐ tem has been deactivated. Lane change assistant Gray line for lane marking on the appro‐ Additional information: priate side: system detected a lane Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ change request. Lane change not cur‐ fer to page 238. rently possible. Steering and traffic jam assistant Arrow symbol for lane change green: the system carries out a lane change. Indicator light is illuminated: the system is ready. Arrow symbol for lane change gray: lane Additional information: change not possible; functional require‐ ments not met. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 249. Additional information: Lane change assistant, refer to page 255. Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system Extended Traffic Jam Assistant is interrupted. Indicator light is illuminated: the system Additional information: is active. Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 253. Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 253. White lights
Blue lights Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system High beams is ready. High beams are switched on. Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 253. Additional information: High beams, refer to page 147.
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 168
CONTROLS Displays
Fuel gauge General information The available power may be reduced due to cer‐ Concept tain factors: The following functions of the hybrid system are The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. displayed: General information ▷ Electric driving: ePOWER. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to ▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE. vary. ▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST. Additional information: ePOWER Refueling, refer to page 352.
Display An arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. The current total range is dis‐ played as a numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument cluster Information about the current driving style The yellow indicator light illuminates, In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving once the fuel reserve is reached. is colored blue, arrow 1. The range highlighted in blue can vary depending on the driving situation and Hybrid mode. Tachometer A mark indicates the power outputted by the hy‐ brid drive in a scale, arrow 2. General information If the mark is outside the range highlighted in Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning blue, the combustion engine is switched on, ar‐ field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to row 3. protect the engine. Instrument cluster with enhanced features: in The tachometer is available in the SPORT drive SPORT drive mode, the engine speed of the mode or in the M/S Sport program. combustion engine is displayed instead of the output of the hybrid drive. Additional information: Performance display BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
Concept The display indicates the performance available as a percentage of its total power.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 169
Displays CONTROLS
CHARGE BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
External temperature
General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Information about the current Safety information driving style Energy recovery during coasting and braking is Warning indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster depending on the drive mode, see arrow. The Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ high-voltage battery is charged. If the high-volt‐ there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on age battery is completely charged, no energy can bridges or shady sections of the road. There is be recovered. a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures. Additional information: BMW eDRIVE, refer to page 135.
eBOOST Range
Concept The range indicates the distance that can still be covered with the current fuel level and the elec‐ tric energy of the high-voltage battery.
General information The range can be displayed as the range for electric driving or as the total range. The total range considers the contents of the fuel tank as Information about the current well as the electric energy in the high-voltage driving style battery. If the requirements for electric driving are If the electric motor supports the combustion en‐ not met, the total range considers the content of gine, for instance during rapid acceleration, the fuel tank only. eBOOST is displayed. The level of eBOOST Various factors, such as the automatic climate provided depends on the available charge state control settings, are taken into account when cal‐ of the high-voltage battery. If the charge state of culating the electric range. The electric range the high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may value is adapted dynamically. not be available. The following factors are taken into account Additional information: when calculating the range:
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 170
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Automatic climate control settings. Total range display ▷ Driving style. Instrument cluster with enhanced ▷ Climate conditions. features: With a low remaining total range, a Check Con‐ The total range is permanently trol message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic displayed next to the fuel gauge. driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐ gine function is not always ensured. Additional information: The Check Control message appears continu‐ Fuel gauge, refer to page 168. ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. As soon as a low fuel tank filling level is reached, ELECTRIC is automatically activated to protect Service notifications the combustion engine if the requirements for electric driving are met. The Steptronic Sport Concept program is not available. The function displays the service notifications You may continue driving with reduced perform‐ and the corresponding maintenance scopes. ance and exclusively with electric motor power. General information Safety information After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐ ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ NOTICE tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ With a driving range of less than nance. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ ice notifications from your vehicle key. sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to Some information on service notifications can property. Refuel promptly. also be shown on the BMW display key.
Display Range display, electric motor Instrument cluster with enhanced features: Detailed information on service The electric range is continuously displayed un‐ notifications der the charge state indicator for the high-volt‐ More information on the type of service required age battery. may be displayed on the Control Display. The display indicates that the 1. "CAR" high-voltage battery is almost fully discharged or the electric drive is 2. "Vehicle status" currently not available. 3. "Service notification" Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐ spections are displayed. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 171
Displays CONTROLS
Symbols Steptronic transmission: displaying Sym‐ Description Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in bols the instrument cluster. No service is currently required. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ gaged gear is displayed.
The time for recommended mainte‐ Example Description nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ Efficient gear is set. tion is approaching.
Service interval is exceeded. Shift into efficient gear.
Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ Speed Limit Info spections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Speed Limit Info set correctly. 1. "CAR" Concept 2. "Vehicle status" Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed 3. "Service notification" limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary, the Head-up Display. 4. "Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" General information 6. Select the desired setting. The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐ tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well Gear shift indicator as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered and compared with the vehicle's onboard data. Concept The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐ The system recommends the most efficient gear nored depending on the situation in the instru‐ for the current driving situation. ment cluster and the Head-up Display. With the navigation system, the system takes General information into account the information stored in the naviga‐ Depending on the design and country version, tion data and also displays speed limits present the gear shift indicator may be active in the M on routes without signs. manual mode of the Steptronic transmission. Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 172
CONTROLS Displays
played. Speed limits with extra text characters Activating are always displayed. 1. "CAR" Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed 2. "Settings" when the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer towing was activated via iDrive. 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" Safety information 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Speed limits" Warning 7. "Show current limit" The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Display and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch Speed Limit Info traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Current speed limit. propriate. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after Overview curves or longer stretches of roadway. Camera Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info not available.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. If the detected speed limit has been exceeded, Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror the indicator light will flash. clean and clear. Settings Displaying Speed Limit Info 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General information 3. "Driver Assistance" Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed 4. If necessary, "Driving" Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐ 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" ment cluster or via iDrive. 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐ vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info display in the instrument cluster and,
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 173
Displays CONTROLS
where applicable, the Head-up Display ▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐ and road configurations. ceeded. The warning that is issued when ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately a speed limit is exceeded may depend on after vehicle delivery. the Speed Limit Assist settings. ▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is Selection lists displayed with a marking in the speedom‐ eter in the instrument cluster. Concept System limits Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for certain functions in the instrument cluster or the The system may not be fully functional and may Head-up Display. provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ ▷ Entertainment source. uations: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ List of most recent telephone calls. ▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐ cealed by objects, stickers or paint. If necessary, the corresponding menu will open on the Control Display. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. Display ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Depending on the equipment version, the list in ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ outdated or not available. tration. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic signs applied to them. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 174
CONTROLS Displays
Displaying and using the list ▷ Average speed. ▷ Odometer for driving without a combustion Button Function engine. Change the entertainment ▷ Average consumption, electric. source. ▷ Consumption history in form of a chart. Pressing the button again will close the currently displayed Displays list. 1. "CAR" Show list of most recent tele‐ 2. "Driving information" phone calls. 3. "Trip data" Turn the thumbwheel to select the desired setting. Consumption history The consumption of the hybrid system is shown Press the thumbwheel to con‐ in the consumption history in form of a chart firm the setting. based on the distance traveled. The currently selected list can be displayed in the instrument Display in the instrument cluster cluster by turning the thumb‐ wheel. Depending on the equipment, information about the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐ strument cluster. Trip data The following information is displayed: ▷ Total mileage. Concept ▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. Values for the trip, such as the average con‐ ▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐ sumption or trip miles, are displayed. ured interval. ▷ Odometer for driving without a combustion General information engine. The trip data can be displayed on the Control Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument Display and in the instrument cluster. cluster. The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ Additional information: ing on various intervals, such as after refueling. Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to page 158. Display on the Control Display Adjusting the display of the trip Overview data The following information is displayed based on The intervals for the display of the trip data in the the configured interval: instrument cluster and on the Control Display are ▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. adjustable.
▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the 1. "CAR" configured interval. 2. "Driving information"
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 175
Displays CONTROLS
3. "Trip data" 3. "Trip data" 4. "Data since" 4. "Data since" 5. Select the desired setting: 5. "Reset individual" ▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐ The average values and counters are reset. cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐ Once the average values and counters have hicle has come to a standstill. been reset, the following interval is automatically ▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐ set: "Individual ( )". cally reset after refueling with a larger quantity of fuel. Sport displays ▷ "Charging ( )": the values are automatically reset after charging. ▷ "Factory": Average consumption Concept since delivery from the factory. The Sport displays especially support a sporty The values since the time of the factory driving style. delivery are displayed. Display on the Control Display ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last manual reset are displayed. The values can be reset at any time. Overview The following information is displayed: Resetting average values ▷ Boost pressure. manually ▷ Engine oil temperature. The following interval can be reset manually at ▷ G-Meter. any time: "Individual ( )". ▷ Torque. With the button on the turn signal lever: ▷ Power. 1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐ nal lever until the widget for the trip data is Displays selected. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Sport displays"
Display in the instrument cluster The Sport displays can be displayed in form of widgets in the instrument cluster. The following widgets can be selected: ▷ Widget for torque and power. 2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal ▷ Widget for G meter. lever. Additional information: Via iDrive: Widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to 1. "CAR" page 158. 2. "Driving information"
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 176
CONTROLS Displays
Vehicle status Overview
General information The status can be displayed and actions per‐ formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance Switching on/off 1. "CAR" Symbols Description 2. "Settings" "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the 3. "Displays" run-flat tires, refer to page 376. 4. "Head-up display" "Tire Pressure Monitor": status 5. "Head-up display" of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐ fer to page 369. Display "Engine oil level": electronic oil measurement, refer to Overview page 388. The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: "Check Control": displaying stored Check Control mes‐ ▷ Vehicle speed. sages, refer to page 161. ▷ Navigation instructions.
"Service notification": displaying ▷ Check Control messages. service notifications, refer to ▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. page 170. ▷ Driver assistance systems. ▷ Sport displays. Head-up Display Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.
Concept Selecting displays in the Head-up This system projects important information into Display the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. 1. "CAR" The driver can get information without averting 2. "Settings" his or her eyes from the road. 3. "Displays" General information 4. "Head-up display" Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up 5. Select the desired setting. Display.
176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 177
Displays CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. "Rotation" rently used. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. Setting the brightness 7. Press the Controller. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. Additional settings The basic setting can be adjusted manually. 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" 4. "Head-up display" 5. Select the desired setting: 5. "Brightness" ▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐ 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ tings for the speed assistant. ness is set. ▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the 7. Press the Controller. selection lists are displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster or the Head-up Display. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ ▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer in tionally influenced using the instrument lighting. the Head-Up Display. ▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐ Adjusting the height played in the Head-up Display. 1. "CAR" ▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays 2. "Settings" are only displayed in SPORT drive mode. 3. "Displays" ▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐ 4. "Head-up display" tinuously displayed in the Head-up 5. "Height" Display. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is ▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐ reached. tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐ 7. Press the Controller. formation can be displayed in the lower section of the Head-up Display. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Visibility of the display The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ play is influenced by the following factors: Setting the rotation ▷ Seat position. The Head-up Display view can be rotated. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. 1. "CAR" ▷ Wet roads. 2. "Settings" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display"
177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 178
CONTROLS Displays
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being generated. For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, if necessary.
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 179
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function options Parking lights.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control. It also describes features and functions that are Adaptive light functions. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Instrument lighting. served.
Right roadside parking light. Lights and lighting
Switches in the vehicle Left roadside parking light.
Automatic headlight control
Concept The low beams are switched on and off automat‐ ically depending on the ambient brightness, for The light switch element is located next to the example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐ steering wheel. cipitation. Symbol Function General information Front fog lights. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.
Night vision. If the low beams are switched on manually, the automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Lights off. Activating Daytime running lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐ ment.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 180
CONTROLS Lights
The LED in the button lights up. Switching off The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐ ter is illuminated when the low beams are ment or switch on the drive-ready state. switched on. After the drive-ready state is switched on, the automatic headlight control will be activated. System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as Low beams a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐ ing conditions. Switching on For example, the sensors are unable to detect Press the button on the light switch ele‐ fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch ment. the lights on manually. The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on. Parking lights, low beams The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ and roadside parking lights ter lights up.
General information Press the button again to switch on the low beams when the standby state is switched on. If the driver's door is opened when the drive- ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Switching off automatically switched off after a period of time. Depending on the country variant, the low beams can be switched off in the low speed range. Parking lights Press the button on the light switch ele‐ General information ment. The parking lights can only be switched on in the low speed range. Roadside parking lights When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside Switching on parking light can be switched on. Press the button on the light switch ele‐ Button Function ment. Right roadside parking light on. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. Left roadside parking light off. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ Switching off the roadside parking light: ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to switch on drive- Press the button on the light switch ele‐ ready state. ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 181
Lights CONTROLS
Welcome lights Pathway lighting
General information General information The exterior lighting is switched on automatically For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings when approaching or unlocking the vehicle. De‐ after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can pending on the equipment, the exterior lighting be switched on for a defined period of time. of the vehicle can be set individually. Activating Activating/deactivating After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly 1. "CAR" push the indicator lever forward. 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" Setting the duration 4. Select the desired setting: 1. "CAR" ▷ "Welcome and goodbye" 2. "Settings" When unlocking the vehicle, individual 3. "Exterior lighting" light functions are switched on for a lim‐ 4. "Pathway lighting" ited time. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ "Door handle lights" 6. "OK" Door handles and the ground in front of the doors are illuminated for a limited time. Daytime running lights ▷ "Welcome Light Carpet" The area next to the vehicle is illuminated General information for a limited time. The daytime running lights light up when drive- ready state is switched on. LED light carpet Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime running lights in front.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" 4. Depending on country specifications: The light source is located in the position indi‐ "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving cated. lights, rear" Keep the light source clean and unobstructed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 182
CONTROLS Lights
Adaptive light functions The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐ cable, the use of turn signals. Concept When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐ be automatically switched on regardless of the tion of the roadway. steering angle.
General information The adaptive light functions may consist of one Adaptive headlight range system or multiple systems, depending on the control equipment version: ▷ Adaptive Light Control. The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐ ances out acceleration and braking processes as ▷ Cornering light. well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of Activating the road is optimized. Press the button on the light switch ele‐ ment. High-beam Assistant The LED in the button lights up. The adaptive light functions are active when the Concept drive-ready state is switched on. The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches Adaptive Light Control the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.
General information General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high rameters, the light from the headlight follows the beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐ course of the road. uation allows. In the low speed range, the high To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive beams are not switched on by the system. Light Control does not swivel to the opposite The system responds to light from oncoming lane when the vehicle is at a standstill. traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐ bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. Cornering light The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time. In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering Activating light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a 1. Press the button on the light switch certain speed. element. The LED in the button lights up.
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 183
Lights CONTROLS
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
General information The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can be adjusted.
Safety information
Warning The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter is illuminated when the low beams are If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐ switched on. ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident. The headlights are automatically switched be‐ If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐ tween low beams and high beams. tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐ coming traffic is not momentarily blinded. The blue indicator light in the instrument Switch off the high beams manually if required. cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.
Driving interruption with activated high-beam As‐ Functional requirements sistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐ The setting can only be performed when the ve‐ vated when driving continues. hicle is stationary. The drive-ready state must be switched on and the light must be turned off. The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off. Adjusting the sensitivity To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐ mately 10 seconds. The system responds more Deactivating sensitively. A Check Control message is displayed.
Resetting the sensitivity Push the turn signal lever to the front again for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready state. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant is re‐ set to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever. System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually.
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 184
CONTROLS Lights
The system is not fully functional in the following Safety information situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐ sary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings. ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming The label is in the headlight and is visible from traffic on highways. the outside. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐ ence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior Fog lights mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc. Front fog lights Laser high beams Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low Concept beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway. The range of the high beams is increased and Functional requirement ensures an even better illumination of the road. The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights. General information When the high beams are switched-on, starting Switching on/off with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐ ser high beams in the headlight are automatically Press the button. switched on in addition to the LED high beams. Depending on the country variant, further infor‐ The green indicator light in the instru‐ mation can be obtained from the laser label on ment cluster lights up if the front fog the headlight. lights are switched on. If the automatic headlight control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 185
Lights CONTROLS
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off Functional requirement Press the button. The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Adjusting The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can be switched on and off independently. The but‐ Adjust the brightness with the ton is located in the rear roofliner. thumbwheel. Switching the reading lights on/off Press the button. Interior lights Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐ ing lights are located next to the interior lights in General information the front and rear. Depending on the equipment version, interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐ ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐ Ambient light trolled. General information Overview Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐ Buttons in the vehicle rior.
Switching on/off The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐ cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐ cle is locked. If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐ locked.
1. "CAR" Interior lights 2. "Settings"
Reading lights 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Ambient lighting" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ file currently used.
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 186
CONTROLS Lights
Selecting the color scheme Bowers & Wilkins Diamond 1. "CAR" Surround Sound System 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" General information 4. "Color" Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. 5. Select the desired setting. Brightness can be individually set. If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be Setting the brightness switched off. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Switching on/off 3. "Interior lighting" The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐ hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐ 4. "Brightness" hicle is locked. 5. Select the desired setting. 1. "CAR" Dynamic light 2. "Settings" Individual actions, for example incoming calls or 3. "Interior lighting" opened doors, are indicated by light effects. 4. "Bowers & Wilkins" 1. "CAR" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ 2. "Settings" file currently used. 3. "Interior lighting" Setting the brightness 4. "Dynamic light" 1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired setting. 2. "Settings" Dimmed while driving 3. "Interior lighting" Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed 4. "Bowers & Wilkins" when the vehicle is driven in the dark. 5. "Brightness"
1. "CAR" 6. Select the desired setting. 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Dimmed for night driving" The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ file currently used.
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the sun protection is closed, the lighting is switched off.
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 187
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. served. It also describes features and functions that are
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag In the rear 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Side airbag 3 Head airbag 6 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐ front passenger by responding to frontal impacts tects the side of the body in the chest and lap in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ area. equate protection. Depending on the equipment:
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 188
CONTROLS Safety
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag in risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as the rear protects the chest and lap area on the possible when the airbag is triggered. side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting rear seats. correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on Head airbag the dashboard. In the event of a side impact, the head airbag ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads protects the head. away from the side airbag. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ Ejection Mitigation mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐ The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ son. tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐ likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants senger side must stay clear - do not attach through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐ pact events. tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones. Knee airbag ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of cover panels, do not cover them or modify a frontal impact. them in any way. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on Protective effect the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or General information other objects to the front passenger seat that Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ are not specifically suited for seats with tion, e.g., in less severe accidents. integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ Information on optimum effect of the ets, over the backrests. airbags ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This Warning also applies to steering wheel covers, the If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ dashboard, and the seats. ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. system cannot provide protection as intended Even when you follow all instructions very and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐ gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to not be fully ruled out in certain situations. life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to timum protective effect of the airbag system. short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ ing impairment in sensitive occupants. ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Customer Relations for further information. 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 189
Safety CONTROLS
Functional readiness of the Strength of the driver's and airbag system front-seat passenger airbag
Safety information General information The explosive power that activates driver's/front- Warning seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat. Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ To maintain the accuracy of this function over jury. Do not touch individual components. the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the Control Display.
Warning Calibrating the front seats Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the Warning airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ There is a risk of jamming when moving the spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ a dealer’s service center or another qualified ment. service center or repair shop. A corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. Display in the instrument cluster 1. Press the switch and move the respective When drive-ready state is switched on, seat all the way forward, until it stops. the warning light in the instrument clus‐ 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates moves forward slightly. the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐ tem and the belt tensioners. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the Malfunction message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat ▷ Warning light does not come on the calibration. when drive-ready state is switched on. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as ▷ The warning light lights up continuously. possible. Have the system checked.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 190
CONTROLS Safety
Automatic deactivation of To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion: the front-seat passenger ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or airbags other items to the front passenger seat un‐ less they are specifically determined to be Concept safe for use on the front passenger seat. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the The system reads if the front passenger seat is front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ tem is to be installed on it. ance. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ push against the seat from below. senger's side are activated or deactivated. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. General information Indicator light for the front-seat Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ passenger airbags structions for children on the front passenger The indicator light for the front-seat passenger seat, see Children. airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbag. Safety information The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated. Warning After drive-ready state is switched on, the light briefly lights up and then indicates whether the To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag airbags are either activated or deactivated. function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ ▷ The indicator light lights up ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be when a child is properly used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries seated in a child restraint sys‐ or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ tem or when the seat is senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated. Malfunction of the automatic ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for deactivation system instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐ When transporting older children and adults, the cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐ vated. cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. Detected child restraint systems In this case, change the sitting position so that The system generally detects children seated in the front-seat passenger airbags are activated a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ and the indicator light goes out. straint systems required by NHTSA at the point If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ the person sit in the rear. ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 191
Safety CONTROLS
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐ ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child Warning restraint system has been detected and the Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a Intelligent Safety manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving Concept style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the and actively intervene where appropriate. driver assistance systems.
General information Warning Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ Due to system limits, individual functions can ligent Safety consists of one or more systems malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the that can help prevent an imminent collision. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety ▷ Front collision mitigation. systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. ▷ Evasion Assistant. ▷ Intersection collision warning. ▷ Person warning with City braking function. Overview ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ Button in the vehicle tection. ▷ Lane departure warning. ▷ Blind spot collision warning. ▷ Side collision mitigation.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Intelligent Safety and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Switching on/off propriate. Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 192
CONTROLS Safety
Button Status Front collision mitigation Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Concept Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The system may prevent some accidents. In the gent Safety systems are switched off event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐ or currently unavailable. pact speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ Button does not light up: all Intelligent nent collision and activates brakes independ‐ Safety systems are switched off. ently, if needed.
Press the button. General information The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ tem is displayed. tem is controlled by the following sensors: If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. all systems are now switched on. ▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds ual settings are activated and stored for the above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐ driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ings may vary with the current driving situation. is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐ are activated. tentionally, the approach control warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ tem reactions. ing settings are switched between: Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐ switched on. Basic settings are activated for the tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the sub-functions, for instance setting for warning system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐ time. sion and visibility also affect the timing of the "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are warnings. switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ Safety information vidually switched off. Warning Press and hold this button. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the All Intelligent Safety systems are driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility switched off. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate.
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 193
Safety CONTROLS
Camera Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Warning clean and clear. Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a With radar sensor risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed.
Switching on/off Intelligent Safety Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.
Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 194
CONTROLS Safety
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Early" equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ ▷ "Medium" tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting The selected time is stored for the driver profile is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu currently used. are activated. Warning with braking function Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ Display tween: A warning symbol appears in the instrument "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ switched on. Basic settings are activated for the ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ subfunctions. nent. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are Symbol Measure switched on according to the individual settings. Symbol lights up red: prewarning. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. Brake and increase distance. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic Manual switching off signal sounds: acute warning. Press and hold this button. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ ver, if necessary. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Prewarning Button Status This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance Button lights up green: all Intelligent to the vehicle ahead is too small. Safety systems are switched on. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ as warranted. gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Acute warning with braking function Button does not light up: all Intelligent An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐ Safety systems are switched off. minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ proaches another object at a high differential Setting the warning time speed. 1. "CAR" Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐ pending on the driving situation and the equip‐ 2. "Settings" ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐ 3. "Driver Assistance" panied by a brief activation of the braking 4. "Safety and Warnings" system. 5. "Front Collision Mitigation" With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐ tivation of the braking system is omitted. 6. Select the desired setting:
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 195
Safety CONTROLS
If an acute warning is provided, the system may er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ also provide assistance, such as through braking, tem’s operation and limitations. when there is risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. Detection range
Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐ fully. The system may also assist in braking if there is a risk of collision. The system's detection potential is limited. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account. City brake function: the brake intervention occurs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. Thus, a system reaction might not come or With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs might come late. to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h. The following situations may not be detected, for At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the instance: brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐ ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach sure. No automatic delay occurs. them at high speed. The brake intervention can be interrupted by ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively or sharply decelerating vehicles. moving the steering wheel. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The system’s ability to detect objects may be ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene Upper speed limit as warranted. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated System limits temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐ low this speed, the system is reactivated. Safety information Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ Warning lowing situations: The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ In tight curves. spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ of damage to property. Actively intervene as ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 196
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐ terior mirror. sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐ ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ viding targeted steering support. porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. Safety information ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Warning ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately The system cannot serve as a substitute for the after vehicle delivery. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch low in the sky. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ ▷ When it is dark outside. propriate. ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar sensors are dirty or covered. Warning ▷ Depending on the equipment version: after improperly performed work on the vehicle Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ paint in the area of the radar sensors. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit manner that is not consistent with their normal the function of the radar sensors and may even use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving cause them to fail. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, for example the warning time, the more warnings are Overview displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ Radar sensors actions. The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Evasion Assistant
Concept The system supports the driver in making eva‐ sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
General information Front center bumper. The system issues a warning and intervenes to support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 197
Safety CONTROLS
Person warning with City braking function, re‐ fer to page 203. ▷ Front collision mitigation is switched on. Front collision mitigation, refer to page 192. ▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around the vehicle.
Switching on/off Front side bumper. The system is automatically active after every driving off.
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster If a collision with a detected vehicle or a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Rear bumper. Symbol Measure Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Symbol lights up red: prewarning. sensors clean and unobstructed. Brake and increase distance.
Camera Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐ stacles. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ ver, if necessary.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐ destrians. Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ ver, if necessary. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Acute warning with evasion support clean and clear. An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle Functional requirements approaching another object at a high speed. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The ▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function is system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐ switched on. ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 198
CONTROLS Safety
Acute warnings may be provided even when Functional limitations there has been no prior warning. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: System limits ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Safety information ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Warning ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ The system is designed to operate in certain shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ terior mirror. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ of damage to property. Actively intervene as porarily switched off due to excessively high warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ temperatures. er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine tem’s operation and limitations. via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. Detection range ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside. ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar sensors are dirty or covered. ▷ Depending on the equipment version: after improperly performed work on the vehicle paint in the area of the radar sensors. The system's detection potential is limited. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit Only objects that are detected by the system are the function of the radar sensors and may even taken into account. cause them to fail. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The following situations may not be detected, for Intersection collision example: warning ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. Concept ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, The system may prevent some accidents with or sharply decelerating vehicles. cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐ ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. pact speed.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 199
Safety CONTROLS
The system sounds a warning in the city speed range before an imminent collision and activates Warning brakes independently, if needed. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due General information to its limits, the system may not issue warnings The system is controlled by the following sen‐ or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a sors: manner that is not consistent with their normal ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely ▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front and actively intervene where appropriate. bumper. ▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front bumper. Warning At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐ Due to system limits, individual functions can sued when a danger of collision with crossing malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the traffic is detected. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a The system issues a two-phase warning of a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐ tion. Overview The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐ Button in the vehicle tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐ ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the timing of the warnings.
Detection range Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐ cles enter into the detection range of the system.
Safety information Intelligent Safety
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate.
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 200
CONTROLS Safety
Camera Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.
Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror all systems are now switched on. clean and clear. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Radar sensors tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ The radar sensors are located in the front ual settings are activated and stored for the bumper. driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. Front side bumper. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
Front center bumper. Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 201
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status Symbol Meaning
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Danger of collision with vehicle Safety systems are switched on. crossing from the right.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ Danger of collision with vehicle gent Safety systems are switched off crossing from the left. or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Danger of collision with vehicle for Safety systems are switched off. which the direction of travel cannot be determined. Setting the warning time Display with prewarning 1. "CAR" The respective symbol lights up red: prewarning 2. "Settings" for vehicles that cross your direction of travel. 3. "Driver Assistance" Intervene yourself, for instance by braking. 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Front Collision Mitigation" Display with acute warning 6. Select the desired setting: The respective symbol flashes red and an acous‐ ▷ "Early" tic signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross your direction of travel. ▷ "Medium" Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. sary. The selected time is stored for the driver profile currently used. Prewarning For example, a prewarning is displayed when a Warning with braking function danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐ tected. Display If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted. General information A warning symbol appears in the instrument Acute warning with braking function cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ An acute warning is displayed in the event of an ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐ nent. hicle. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐ vide assistance, such as through braking, when there is risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 202
CONTROLS Safety
Brake intervention Detection range The warning prompts the driver to intervene. The system may also assist in braking if there is a risk of collision. The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill. The brake intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ The system's detection potential is limited. formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene Thus, a system reaction might not come or as warranted. might come late. The following situations may not be detected, for System limits instance: ▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by Safety information buildings, for instance. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, Warning or sharply decelerating vehicles. The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ Crossing bicycles. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk Functional limitations of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ lowing situations: tem’s operation and limitations. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. Upper speed limit ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. The system responds to crossing vehicles when your own speed is below approx. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ 50 mph/80 km/h. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ terior mirror. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 203
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because ▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun ▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper. low in the sky. ▷ When it is dark outside. Detection range ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar sensors are dirty or covered. ▷ Depending on the equipment version: after improperly performed work on the vehicle paint in the area of the radar sensors. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in the beam area of the radar sensors will also limit the function of the radar sensors and may even cause them to fail. The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ Warning sensitivity ided into two areas: The more sensitive the warning settings are, for ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the example the warning time, the more warnings are vehicle. displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ of the central area. actions. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about Person warning with City pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the braking function central area.
Concept Safety information The system can help prevent accidents involving pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an acci‐ dent, the system may reduce impact speed. Warning The system sounds a warning in the city speed The system cannot serve as a substitute for the range before an imminent collision and activates driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility brakes independently, if needed. and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch General information traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Warning The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ who are within the detection range of the sys‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due tem. to its limits, the system may not issue warnings Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a tem is controlled by the following sensors: manner that is not consistent with their normal
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 204
CONTROLS Safety
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving With radar sensor style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Overview Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed. Button in the vehicle Switching on/off
Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.
Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ Intelligent Safety tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, Camera all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ The camera is installed near the interior mirror. tween: Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are clean and clear. switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 205
Safety CONTROLS
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are The brake intervention can be interrupted by switched on according to the individual settings. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ moving the steering wheel. vidually switched off. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the Manual switching off limitations of the system and actively intervene Press and hold this button. as warranted. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. System limits
Button Status Safety information Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Warning
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ The system is designed to operate in certain gent Safety systems are switched off conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ or currently unavailable. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk Button does not light up: all Intelligent of damage to property. Actively intervene as Safety systems are switched off. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ Warning with braking function tem’s operation and limitations.
Display Upper speed limit If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐ The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐ when the speed of the vehicle is below approx. ment cluster and in the Head-up Display. 50 mph/80 km/h. The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds. Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. Brake intervention The following situations may not be detected, for The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a instance: warning is active, the maximum braking force is ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. used when the brake is applied. This requires the ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly cause of the viewing angle or contour. and forcefully. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. If there is a risk of collision, the system may also ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than assist with brake intervention. 32 in/80 cm. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 206
CONTROLS Safety
Functional limitations trians and animals on the street. The system de‐ The system may not be fully functional or may tects warm objects that are similar in shape to not be available in the following situations: human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐ mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. play. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ General information activated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ Thermal image shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ terior mirror. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery. The image shows the heat radiated by objects in ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because the field of view of the camera. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects a dark appearance. ▷ When it is dark outside. The ability to detect an object depends on the ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar temperature difference between the object and sensors are dirty or covered. the background and on the level of heat radiation ▷ Depending on the equipment version: after emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in improperly performed work on the vehicle temperature to the environment or that radiate paint in the area of the radar sensors. very little heat are difficult to detect. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ For safety reasons, when driving at speeds pact the function of the radar sensors and may above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient even cause them to fail. light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a Night Vision with fraction of a second. pedestrian and animal detection
Concept Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion is a night vision system. An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 207
Safety CONTROLS
Pedestrian and animal detection Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate.
Object detection and warning only functions in darkness. Warning Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ ficient heat radiation are detected. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due In addition, the system also detects animals to its limits, the system may not issue warnings above a certain minimum size, for instance deer. or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐ manner that is not consistent with their normal age activated: use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely ▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐ and actively intervene where appropriate. low. ▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐ low. Overview Range of object detection, with good ambient conditions: Buttons in the vehicle ▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. 330 ft/100 m. ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx. 490 ft/150 m. ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx. 230 ft/70 m. Environmental influences can limit the availability of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is Intelligent Safety located in a residential area, the animal detection is temporarily switched off.
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 208
CONTROLS Safety
Adjusting the thermal image Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when the thermal image is switched on. 1. Select brightness or contrast: ▷ "Brightness". ▷ "Contrast". 2. Set the desired value.
Thermal image Warning function
Display Camera Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐ Symbol flashes red and a sig‐ Acute warning. ternal temperatures are low. nal sounds. When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals The displayed symbol may vary and shows the when the windshield washer system is activated. side of the road on which the person or animal was detected. Switching on Warning of people or animals in Switching on automatically danger When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐ If a collision with a person or an animal detected cally active after every driving off. in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐ pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head- Switching on the thermal image up Display. The thermal image from the Night Vision camera Although both the shape and the heat radiation can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐ are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out. tion to the warning function. This function has no effect on object detection. Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display.
208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 209
Safety CONTROLS
Warning area in front of the vehicle Display in the Head-up Display The warning is displayed simultaneously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight The warning area for the person warning con‐ curves. sists of two parts: ▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. vehicle. ▷ At very high external temperatures. ▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area. Limits of pedestrian and animal With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐ detection tween the central or expanded area. In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians The entire area moves along with the vehicle in are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐ the direction of the steering angle and changes trians. with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐ creases, the area becomes, for instance longer Small animals are not detected by the object de‐ and wider. tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. Limited detection, for instance in the following Prewarning circumstances: Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐ ▷ People or animals who are fully or partially son is detected in the central area immediately in covered, especially when their heads are cov‐ front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right ered. side in the extended area. ▷ People who are not in an upright position, for Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐ instance lying down. mal is detected in the front of the vehicle. ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐ If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or cumbent bicycles). making an evasive maneuver. ▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐ Acute warning stance after an accident. Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐ mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the Lane departure warning vehicle. If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an Concept evasive maneuver immediately. The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 210
CONTROLS Safety
General information Functional requirement This camera-based system warns starting at a The camera must detect the lane markings for minimum speed. the lane departure warning to be active. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety Overview systems. Warnings are issued by means of a steering Button in the vehicle wheel vibration. The severity of the steering wheel vibration can be adjusted. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐ fore leaving the lane. Depending on the equipment version, if in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed, the system may intervene with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the Intelligent Safety vehicle in the lane.
Safety information Camera
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing road and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐ sponse to a warning. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Warning clean and clear. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Switching on/off to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a Switching on automatically manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving The lane departure warning activates automati‐ style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely cally after departure if the function was switched and actively intervene where appropriate. on at the end of the last trip. Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active after every driving off. The base setting is thereby activated.
210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 211
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on manually Setting the warning time Press the button. 1. "CAR" The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 2. "Settings" tem is displayed. 3. "Driver Assistance" If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 4. "Safety and Warnings" all systems are now switched on. 5. "Lane Departure Warning" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 6. Select the desired setting: equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ▷ "Early" ual settings are activated and stored for the ▷ "Medium" driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐ is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu pressed depending on the situation, are activated. for instance during passing without a turn signal or when purposely driving over lane Press the button repeatedly. markings in curves. The following settings are switched be‐ ▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. tween: The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are file currently used. switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. Setting the intensity of the steering "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are wheel vibration switched on according to the individual settings. 1. "CAR" Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ 2. "Settings" vidually switched off. 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" Manual switching off 5. "Vibration intensity" Press and hold this button. 6. Select the desired setting. All Intelligent Safety systems are The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ switched off. tems and stored for the driver profile currently used. Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Switch steering intervention on/off Safety systems are switched on. The steering intervention can be switched on Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ and off separately for blind spot collision warning gent Safety systems are switched off and lane departure warning. or currently unavailable. 1. "CAR" Button does not light up: all Intelligent 2. "Settings" Safety systems are switched off. 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings"
211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 212
CONTROLS Safety
5. "Lane Departure Warning" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐ 6. "Steering intervention" played. The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ The warning signal and Check Control message file currently used. are an encouragement to pay closer attention to the lane. Display in the instrument cluster With trailer towing The symbol illuminates green: at lane If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ marking was detected on at least one ing is activated, for instance during operation side of the vehicle and warnings can be with trailer or bicycle rack, no steering interven‐ issued. tion takes place.
Warning function End of warning For instance, the warning will be canceled in the If you leave the lane following situations: If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ Automatically after a few seconds. been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ ▷ When returning to your own lane. cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐ ting. ▷ When braking hard. When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐ ▷ When using the turn signal. sponding direction before changing the lane, a ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. warning is not issued. System limits Steering intervention Depending on the equipment version: if, in the Safety information speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed, the system may intervene Warning with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps The system is designed to operate in certain keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ vention can be noticed on the steering wheel tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ing an active steering intervention, the display in of damage to property. Actively intervene as the instrument cluster will blink. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ Warning signal tem’s operation and limitations. Depending on the equipment version: in the event of multiple active steering interventions by Functional limitations the system within 3 minutes without the driver's The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic lowing situations: warning will sound. A short warning signal will sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐ ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ginning with the third steering intervention, an continuous warning will sound.
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 213
Safety CONTROLS
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, General information merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor low in the sky. the area behind and next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum speed. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ The minimum speed is country-specific and is terior mirror. displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety systems. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high The system indicates whether there are vehicles temperatures. in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Before you change lanes after setting the turn after vehicle delivery. signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐ A Check Control message may be displayed tions described above. when the system is not fully functional. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds Blind spot collision warning of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐ tervene with a brief active steering intervention Concept and help guide the vehicle back into the lane. Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐ the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐ mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in displayed on the Control Display in the menu for various gradations in these situations. the steering intervention. Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 214
CONTROLS Safety
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar propriate. sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Switching on automatically stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐ to its limits, the system may not issue warnings vated after departure if the function was or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a switched on at the end of the last trip. manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving Switching on manually style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. Overview If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. Button in the vehicle "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ Intelligent Safety tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the Radar sensors subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are The radar sensors are located in the rear switched off. bumper.
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 215
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status Vehicles with side collision mitigation: switching steering Button lights up green: all Intelligent intervention on/off Safety systems are switched on. The steering intervention can be switched on Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ and off separately for blind spot collision warning gent Safety systems are switched off and lane departure warning. or currently unavailable. 1. "CAR" Button does not light up: all Intelligent 2. "Settings" Safety systems are switched off. 3. "Driver Assistance" Setting the warning time 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" 1. "CAR" 6. "Steering intervention" 2. "Settings" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 3. "Driver Assistance" rently used. 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" Warning function 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" Light in the exterior mirror ▷ "Medium" ▷ "Late" ▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐ put. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration 1. "CAR" Prewarning 2. "Settings" The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐ 3. "Driver Assistance" proaching from behind. 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" 5. "Vibration intensity" Acute warning 6. Select the desired setting. When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐ The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐ tems and stored for the driver profile currently brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror used. flashes brightly. The warning stops when the other vehicle has left the critical area or the turn signal has been deactivated.
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 216
CONTROLS Safety
Vehicles with side collision ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed mitigation much faster than your own. When there is no response to the vibration of the ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. steering wheel at speeds of up to ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. 130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active for instance by stickers. steering intervention. The steering intervention helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐ ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐ ing intervention can be noticed on the steering cle paint. wheel and can be manually overridden at any ▷ If cargo protrudes. time. Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ Flashing of the light pact the function of the radar sensors and may A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking even cause them to fail. serves as system self-test. For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the steering intervention can be limited, for instance System limits in the following situation: ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, Safety information merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. Warning ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ ▷ When lane markings are not white. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of damage to property. Actively intervene as of you. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because tem’s operation and limitations. of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ Upper speed limit shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. terior mirror. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ temporarily. porarily switched off due to excessively high If the vehicle speed falls below approx. temperatures. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine sponds according to the setting. via the Start/Stop button. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Functional limitations after vehicle delivery. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ A Check Control message is displayed when the lowing situations: system is not fully functional.
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 217
Safety CONTROLS
If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system towing is activated, for instance during operation will carry out an active steering intervention. with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ played. Safety information
Displaying warnings Warning Depending on the selected warning settings, The system cannot serve as a substitute for the e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. cess of premature warnings of critical situations. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Side collision mitigation
Concept Warning The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ sions. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings General information or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirement The camera must detect the lane markings for the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐ vention to be active. Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed Overview of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h. The minimum speed is country-specific and is Button in the vehicle displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety systems. The front camera determines the lane marking positions. If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision. For this purpose, the system issues a warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 218
CONTROLS Safety
Intelligent Safety Switching on/off
Switching on automatically Radar sensors The side collision mitigation activates automati‐ The radar sensors are located in the bumpers. cally after departure if the function was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. Front bumper. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored for the driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: Rear bumper. "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sensors clean and unobstructed. subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Camera Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off.
Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 219
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status If necessary, an active steering intervention takes place to prevent the collision and maintain the Button lights up green: all Intelligent vehicle within its own lane. Safety systems are switched on. The steering intervention can be noticed on the Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ steering wheel and can be manually overridden gent Safety systems are switched off at any time. or currently unavailable. System limits Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Safety information Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration Warning 1. "CAR" The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ 2. "Settings" tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ 3. "Driver Assistance" spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ 5. "Vibration intensity" er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ 6. Select the desired setting. tem’s operation and limitations. The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems and stored for the driver profile currently used. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ Warning function lowing situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed Light in the exterior mirror much faster than your own. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, for instance by stickers. ▷ After improperly performed work on the vehi‐ cle paint. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings Acute warning such as in construction areas. If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ dirt or water. brates. ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects. A Check Control message is displayed at the ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front same time. of you.
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 220
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because General information of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ terior mirror. ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ porarily switched off due to excessively high temperatures. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately the area behind the vehicle. after vehicle delivery. When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in certain speed, the system responds as follows: the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐ ▷ Active Protection: when a collision seems to pact the function of the radar sensors and may be unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐ even cause them to fail. gered. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. Safety information If the trailer power socket is occupied or trailer towing is activated, for instance during operation with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be Warning switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the played. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch Rear collision preparation traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Concept The system reacts to vehicles approaching from behind. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 221
Safety CONTROLS
Overview If equipped with Equipment Radar sensors Stop Assistant
Concept If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
General information The emergency stop function is not triggered automatically. The emergency stop function can only be triggered manually by the occupants. The radar sensors are located in the rear When the system is activated, the vehicle is bumper. brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar lane guidance. sensors clean and unobstructed. Depending on the equipment version and na‐ tional market version, the system includes a lane Switching on/off change function. With lane change function: on motorways or mo‐ The system is automatically active after every torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle driving off. to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐ The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐ tions: tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the ▷ When driving in reverse. actual road. ▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer towing is activated, for instance during opera‐ Overview tion with trailer or bicycle rack.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches slowly. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Parking brake ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, Functional requirements for instance by stickers. ▷ The function can be activated at speeds of ▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered, approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx. e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills. 155 mph/250 km/h. ▷ If cargo protrudes.
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 222
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Lane changes are executed at speeds of ap‐ ▷ Parking brake is set. prox. 43 mph/70 km/h up to approx. ▷ Interior lights are switched on. 62 mph/100 km/h. ▷ Central locking system is unlocked. Activating the emergency stop Displays in the instrument function cluster Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly to activate the emergency stop function. Symbol Status ▷ With lane change function: releasing the Emergency Stop function active. switch may trigger an automatic lane change. ▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for a maximum of 2 minutes. Without lane change function: ▷ The hazard warning system is switched on. ▷ An Emergency Request is triggered. Symbol Status Green steering wheel symbol: Canceling the emergency stop When lane markings are detected, function the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐ tion by actively taking control of the vehicle Gray steering wheel symbol: throughout the entire process. Lane guidance is briefly interrupted. For instance, the emergency stop function will be canceled in the following situations: Yellow steering wheel symbol: ▷ When steering. Lane marking driven over. ▷ When using the turn signal. When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the ▷ During acceleration. lane. ▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐ tem. Yellow steering wheel symbol: ▷ When canceling the Emergency Request. The hands are not grasping the ▷ When switching the selector lever position at steering wheel. The system is still standstill. active. ▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐ Red steering wheel symbol and a erator pedal after the function has been trig‐ signal sounds: gered. The hands are not grasping the ▷ When the switch of the parking brake is steering wheel. Interruption of lane pressed. guidance is imminent. Red steering wheel symbol and a At standstill signal sounds: As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system Lane guidance is switched off. will carry out the following settings: ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 223
Safety CONTROLS
System limits The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends confirming there are no statutory or regulatory Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐ constraints on use of the system in your state or ure. country prior to the initial use. In addition, the The system cannot replace the driving perform‐ laws with respect to use of the system should be ance of a driver who is fit to drive. verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐ ders are frequently crossed. BMW Drive Recorder Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed about the system. In addition, information about the system is required when handing off the ve‐ Concept hicle. The system stores brief video recordings of the surrounding area of the vehicle, e.g., to docu‐ Functional requirements ment traffic events. ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated. Additionally, the following parameters are stored ▷ Privacy Policy accepted. for the trip: ▷ Recording type selected. ▷ Date. ▷ Recording time selected. ▷ Time. ▷ Vehicle speed. Activating/deactivating ▷ GPS coordinates. The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐ fore the first use of the recording function. General information 1. "Apps" There are various ways for storing video record‐ 2. "Drive Recorder" ings: 3. Accept Privacy Policy. ▷ Automatic storage of the recording. 4. "Settings" The function allows the documentation of the event of an accident. 5. "Recording allowed" ▷ Manual storage of the recording. 6. Select the desired setting. The function allows the documentation of traffic situations. Recording functions The system records up to 20 seconds before Automatic recording and after the activation of the storage. The recording is stored automatically when the Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence. instance Panorama View.
Data protection Manual recording The permissibility of recording and using video Using the button recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐ lations of the country in which the system is to Press and hold this button. be used. The user is responsible for the use of the system and compliance with the respective regulations.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 224
CONTROLS Safety
Via iDrive Recording type 1. "Apps" 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 2. "Drive Recorder" 3. "Start recording" 3. "Settings" To stop the recording: "Cancel". 4. "RECORDING TYPE" Recording can also be started by selecting the 5. Select the desired setting: widget on the Control Display. ▷ "Manually" Recording playback and ▷ "Automatically" administration ▷ "Manually" and "Automatically" Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐ Recording time ported and deleted. 1. "Apps" For your own safety, the video recording is only displayed on the Control Display up to approx. 2. "Drive Recorder" 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions, 3. "Settings" the video recording is only displayed if the park‐ 4. Select the desired setting: ing brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in selector lever position P. ▷ "Before trigger" Recording time before an event. 1. "Apps" ▷ "After trigger" 2. "Drive Recorder" Recording time after an event. 3. "Saved recordings" 4. Select desired recording. Cameras 5. Select the desired setting: 1. "Apps" ▷ "Play" 2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ "Pause" 3. "Settings" ▷ "Previous" 4. "Camera selection" ▷ "Next" 5. Select desired camera. ▷ "Export" In case of an accident, the system switches au‐ ▷ "Delete" tomatically to "All" cameras. If a camera change occurred during the record‐ If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐ ing, different segments of the video can be se‐ era views are selected automatically. lected. System limits Adjusting In the event of serious accidents, it may not be possible to store recordings if the damage on the General information vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐ Different settings can be made. terrupted.
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 225
Safety CONTROLS
Active Protection Function When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and Concept passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐ ened once after driving away. Active Protection prepares occupants and the In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐ vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or vidual functions become active as needed: collision situations. ▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety General information belts. Active Protection consists of various PreCrash ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow functions, which can vary depending on the gap. equipment. ▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ sunroof, including sun protection. ing situations that might lead to an accident. This ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in includes the following critical driving situations: the front: automatic positioning of the back‐ ▷ Emergency stop. rest for the front passenger seat. ▷ Severe understeering. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ dent, the front safety belts are loosened again. ▷ Severe oversteering. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, Certain functions of several systems can, within stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the gering: safety belt before continuing on your trip. ▷ Front collision mitigation: automatic brake in‐ All other systems can be restored to the desired tervention. setting. ▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ tection: Brake Assistant. PostCrash – iBrake ▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐ nent rear collisions. Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring Safety information the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ vention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the Warning consequences thereof. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system At standstill limits, critical situation could not be detected reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident. After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐ Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch matically. traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Harder vehicle braking In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 226
CONTROLS Safety
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering For a brief period, the braking pressure will be behavior. higher than the braking pressure that is achieved ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of by the automatic braking function. Automatic trip. braking is interrupted. ▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐ Interrupting automatic braking era. It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ is active and can also display a recommendation sive maneuver. to take a break. Interrupt automatic braking: ▷ By pressing the brake pedal. Break recommendation ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. Adjusting The fatigue alert is active automatically with each Fatigue alert switching on of drive-ready state and can thus display a break recommendation. General information The break recommendation can also be The system can detect decreasing alertness or switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous 1. "CAR" trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it 2. "Settings" is recommended that the driver takes a break. 3. "General settings" Safety information 4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert" 5. Select the desired setting: Warning ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is made with a defined value. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's ▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or issued earlier. fatigue may not be detected or not be detected ▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made. in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving Display style to traffic conditions. If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with Function the recommendation to take a break. During the display, various settings can be se‐ The system is switched on each time drive-ready lected. state is switched on. After a break, another recommendation to take a After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ mately 45 minutes. creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account:
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 227
Safety CONTROLS
System limits The function may be limited in the following sit‐ uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 228
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant options In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC, this system ensures that the brakes respond This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. tions. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Drive-off assistant tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Concept served. This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Antilock Braking System Driving off ABS 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ ing. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases Depending on the vehicle loading or when a the active safety. trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Brake assistant Concept When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking assis‐ Within the physical limits, the system helps to tance to the furthest possible extent. It reduces keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing the braking distance to a minimum during an drive power and by braking the individual wheels. emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake Sys‐ General information tem ABS. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal ditions, for instance: for the duration of the emergency stop. ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 229
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
General information Warning When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the duced during acceleration and when driving in driver’s personal judgment in assessing the curves. traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust as soon as possible. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated. Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button. of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of light go out. damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load. Display In the instrument cluster Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Button in the vehicle Indicator/warning lights The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐ activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 230
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC Control Activating DTC Press the button. Concept TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF Control where drive power is optimized. lights up. The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but Deactivating DTC with somewhat limited driving stability. Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator General information light go out. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ mum traction. Driving stability is limited during Display acceleration and when driving in curves. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in Display in the instrument cluster the following situations: If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster. covered roads. ▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights ground. The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. vated. Overview Automatic program change Button in the vehicle In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol DSC is activated automatically: ▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐ tion ACC is activated. ▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent Safety systems. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive DSC OFF Concept xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐ cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐ sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control, further optimizes traction and
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 231
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the wheel begins to spin and automatically brakes driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐ this wheel. manded by the driving situation and road surface. The driving force is diverted to the wheel with The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change better traction. the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented As a result, the drive torque is transferred more to sport oriented. efficiently to the wheels during accelerations. Because of the needs-based use of the all- wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐ tion in consumption. HDC Hill Descent Control
Display on the Control Display Concept HDC Hill Descent Control is a downhill control Display xView display feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep 1. "CAR" downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐ 2. "Driving information" paved roads. 3. "xOFFROAD" When the system is active, the vehicle moves at or the speed set by the driver, without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. "xVIEW" While HDC is controlling the speed, the system The following information is displayed: automatically distributes the braking force to the ▷ With a navigation system: compass display individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐ for the driving direction. ity and driving stability. If necessary, the Antilock ▷ With navigation system: elevation for the cur‐ Braking System prevents the wheels from lock‐ rent position. ing. ▷ With navigation system: destination flag in compass direction to the destination. General information ▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐ Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds centage. below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. ▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication. Speeds can be set between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. ▷ Graphic display for the steering angle. When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system ▷ Level adjustment of the two-axle ride level reduces the speed to the set value, within the control. physical limits.
Automatic Differential Brake
The system controls the driving force by auto‐ matic brake intervention on individual wheels. The function works in the same way as a differ‐ ential lock and improves traction on a loose sur‐ face, for example. The system detects when a
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 232
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Overview Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Button in the vehicle Using the cruise control rocker switch The desired speed can be changed using the cruise control rocker switch on the steering wheel.
HDC
Activating HDC Press the button. The LED on the button lights up. ▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐ creases gradually. Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐ ▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the sired speed. speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed. Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the emergency braking function is deactivated. ▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐ creases gradually. Additional information: ▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the Emergency brake function, Active PDC, refer to speed decreases while the rocker switch is page 262. pressed.
Display in the instrument cluster Using the brake pedal A symbol and the selected de‐ While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐ sired speed are displayed. sired speed can be reduced by depressing the ▷ Indicator green: HDC is active. brake pedal. The system is actively braking the vehicle. Deactivating HDC ▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby. Press the button again. The LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated above Display in the Head-up Display approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. The HDC status can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Malfunction If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 233
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Integral Active Steering Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel Concept must be turned further at lower speeds, while the vehicle responds more sensitively to steering The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐ wheel movements in the higher speed range. neuverability and makes a more direct steering The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐ response possible. activated. General information Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐ Have the system checked by a dealer's service ble steering ratio and rear axle steering. center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. The steering is more direct because the variable steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the front wheels. At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐ sults in, for instance better directional stability and a more harmonious change of direction. In critical driving situations, the Integral Active Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐ poseful steering of the rear wheels before the driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐ steering.
Tuning The system offers several different tunings. The various tunings can be set using Driving Dy‐ namics Control. Additional information: Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140.
Using snow chains In order to guarantee free running of the wheels when operating with snow chains, rear axle steering of the integral active steering must be switched off when snow chains are mounted. Additional information: Rear axle steering during operation with snow chains, refer to page 369.
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 234
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and Operation options Switching on
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Press the button on the steering wheel. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are The current speed is accepted as the speed not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due limit. to the selected options or country versions. This If the system is switched on while the vehicle is also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ stationary or driving at low speeds, tems. When using these functions and systems, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ The marking in the speedometer is set to the served. corresponding speed. When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐ Speed Limiter namic Stability Control is switched on as well, if needed, and the driving mode is switched if ap‐ plicable. Concept The system can be used to set a speed limit, for Switching off instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding speed limits. Press the button on the steering wheel.
General information The system switches off automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations, for example: The system can limit the speed, starting at a value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be ▷ When the engine is switched off. driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When cruise control is switched on. ▷ When certain programs are activated via the Overview Driving Dynamics Control. The displays go out. Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting Button Function If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐ System on/off. tem is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Store current speed. Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐ gested speed manually.
Rocker switch: Changing the speed limit.
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 235
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Visual warning If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐ tor light in the instrument cluster flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally, a signal sounds. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds after some time. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐ changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal. If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐ hicle is not actively braked. Displays in the instrument When the speed limit is set during a trip to a cluster value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Display in the speedometer The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ ing a button: tive. Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ rupted. ▷ No marking: system is Exceeding the speed limit switched off. When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued. Indicator light The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐ There is no warning in this case. tem is switched on. Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set intentionally exceed the set speed limit. speed limit has been exceeded. When the vehicle speed drops below the set ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐ speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. terrupted.
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 236
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Cruise control Warning Concept The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ The system maintains the desired speed. The tervene where appropriate. system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed. Overview General information The system can be activated starting at Buttons on the steering wheel 20 mph/30 km/h. Button Function Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control settings can change under certain condi‐ Cruise control on/off. tions. For instance, the acceleration can change depending on the drive mode.
Safety information Continue cruise control with the last setting. Warning Pause cruise control. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Store current speed. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust gested speed manually. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Rocker switch: ate. Set speed.
Switching cruise control on/off Warning The use of the system can lead to an increased Switching on risk of accidents in the following situations, Depending on the equipment version, for instance: press the relevant button on the steer‐ ▷ On winding roads. ing wheel. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light conditions, or on a loose road surface. up and the marking on the speedometer is set to the current speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐ age to property. Only use the system if driving Cruise control is active. The current speed is at constant speed is possible. maintained and stored as desired speed.
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 237
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if When the system is switched on, the current necessary. speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. Switching off The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ Depending on the equipment version, eter. press the relevant button on the steer‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if ing wheel. necessary. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed is ton. deleted. Press the button. Pausing cruise control Changing the speed Interrupting manually When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations, for example: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or until the desired speed is set. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. Setting the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Maintaining and storing the speed resistance point, the desired speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum adjustable speed depends on the vehicle and the set hybrid system charac‐ teristic. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐ Press the rocker switch up or down once while ator pedal. the system is interrupted. After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 238
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
switch beyond the resistance point causes The symbol is displayed when the set the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. desired speed is reached.
Continuing cruise control System limits An interrupted cruise control can be continued The desired speed is also maintained downhill. by calling up the stored speed. The speed may not be maintained on uphill Make sure that the difference between current grades if the drive power is insufficient. speed and stored speed is not too large before Depending on the drive mode, the vehicle may calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ exceed or drop below the set desired speed in tional braking or accelerating may occur. some situations; for instance, on downhill or up‐ Press the button with the system inter‐ hill grades. rupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ Active Cruise Control with ues. In the following cases, the stored speed value is Stop & Go function ACC deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. Concept ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using Displays in the instrument the buttons on the steering wheel. cluster The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes Display in the speedometer automatically. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set tive, the marking indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The desired speed. speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ lows. rupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. General information ▷ No marking: system is switched off. A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles Indicator light driving ahead of you. Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise ▷ Indicator light green: system is active. control settings can change under certain condi‐ ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has tions. For instance, the acceleration can change been interrupted. depending on the driving mode. ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective Displays in the Head-up Display speed. Some system information can also be displayed If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and in the Head-up Display. then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 239
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Warning Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐ Safety information ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ ing situations: Warning ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving The system cannot serve as a substitute for the vehicle. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust Watch traffic closely and actively intervene driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic where appropriate. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Overview
Warning Buttons on the steering wheel An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Button Function Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ With steering and traffic jam assistant: ing. Cruise control on/off. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: With steering and traffic jam assistant: ▷ Set the parking brake. Select function. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ turn the front wheels in the direction of the tant: curb. Cruise control on/off. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a Store current speed. wheel chock. Speed Limit Assist: take over sug‐ gested speed manually.
Warning With steering and traffic jam assistant: The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted Pause cruise control. or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ Continue cruise control with the last dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic setting. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tervene where appropriate. tant: Continue cruise control with the last setting.
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 240
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Button Function Area of application
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ The system is best used on well-constructed tant: roads. Pause cruise control. The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. Increase the distance. The maximum speed that can be set is limited Switch distance control on/off. and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle equipment version. Reduce distance. The system can also be activated when station‐ Switch distance control on/off. ary. Rocker switch: Set speed. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Radar sensor With steering and traffic jam assistant: Assisted Driving Mode
General information This button is used to switch the config‐ ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐ marily used function.
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Set function Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ When the system is active, press the structed. button repeatedly until the desired func‐ tion is selected in the function bar. The function bar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the Camera bottom of the instrument cluster.
Symbol Function
Cruise control with distance control.
Depending on the equipment ver‐ sion, cruise control with distance control and steering and traffic jam assistant. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear. The selected function is shown in green.
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 241
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ If interrupting the system while stationary, press rently used. on the brake pedal at the same time.
Switching on Interrupting automatically With steering and traffic jam assistant: The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: 1. Press the button on the steering ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. wheel. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or 2. If necessary, set the cruise control. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. Without steering and traffic jam assistant: ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an up and the marking on the speedometer is set to extended period, for instance on a road with the current speed. very little traffic without curb or shoulder Cruise control is active. The current speed is markings. maintained and stored as desired speed. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if for instance by dirt or heavy fog. necessary. ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐ hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐ Switching off tem. To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Setting the speed Press the button on the steering wheel: Maintaining and storing the speed With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually When active, press the button on the steering wheel: Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐ With steering and traffic jam assistant. tivated.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ The current speed is maintained and stored as tant. desired speed. The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ eter.
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 242
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐ necessary. tance, possibly by braking. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ ton. Reduce distance Press the button. Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Changing the speed Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Increase the distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance.
Automatic adaptation of the distance Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ until the desired speed is set. ket version: the system can be adjusted so that the distance is automatically adjusted within the If active, the displayed speed is stored and the configured distance level according to the traffic vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road situation or the ambient condition, for instance is clear. poor visibility. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the The adjustment of the distance is shown in the resistance point, the desired speed increases display in the instrument cluster. or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past 1. "CAR" the resistance point, the desired speed 2. "Settings" changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. 3. "Driver Assistance" Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the 4. If necessary, "Driving" action. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" Adjusting the distance 6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
Safety information Continuing cruise control An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Warning Make sure that the difference between current The system cannot serve as a substitute for the speed and stored speed is not too large before driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk tional braking or accelerating may occur. of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust Press the button on the steering wheel with the the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐ system interrupted:
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 243
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
With steering and traffic jam assistant. After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐ played. Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant. Displays in the instrument cluster Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ ues. General information In the following cases, the stored speed value is Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ deleted and cannot be called up again: plays in the instrument cluster may vary. ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Display in the speedometer ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ Changing between cruise control tive, the marking indicates the with/without distance control desired speed. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ Safety information rupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. Warning ▷ No marking: system is switched off. The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored Distance to vehicle ahead of you speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is of damage to property. Adjust the desired shown. speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed. Symbol Description
Distance 1 Switch mode of the cruise control Switching cruise control without distance control off and on:
▷ Press and hold this button. Distance 2
▷ Press and hold this button. With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on distance control: Distance 3 Press the button.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on distance control:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Press the button.
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 244
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Symbol Description Indicator/warning lights
Distance 4 Symbol Description This value is set automatically Vehicle symbol white: after the system is switched on. No distance control display, as the accelerator pedal is being No distance control display, as pressed. the accelerator pedal is being Green symbol: pressed. A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol goes out if Detected vehicle no vehicle in front is detected. Vehicle symbol flashes green: Symbol Description Vehicle in front drove off.
Green symbol: Gray symbol: A vehicle has been detected System interrupted. ahead of you. Symbol flashes gray: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐ creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐ The system was deactivated but play will move away. applies the brakes until you ac‐ tively resume control by press‐ If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing erator pedal. the rocker switch. Vehicle symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive ma‐ neuver, if necessary.
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 245
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Alternative displays ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected. Symbol Description Head-Up Display, refer to page 176. Indicator light green: system is ▷ Distance too short. active. ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h. No indicator light: system is switched off. System limits Vehicle symbol flashes: Detection range The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you ac‐ tively resume control by press‐ ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ erator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐ tance bars flash red and an acoustic signal sounds: The detection capacity of the system and the Brake and make an evasive ma‐ automatic braking capacity are limited. neuver, if necessary. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be System interrupted. detected.
Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users. Desired speed ▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic Some system information can also be displayed lights. in the Head-up Display. ▷ For cross traffic. The symbol is displayed when the set ▷ For oncoming traffic. desired speed is reached.
Distance information The symbol is displayed when the dis‐ tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐ ing situations:
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 246
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Merging vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐ may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After tomatically restore the selected distance. It may releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ not be possible to restore the selected distance activated and controls speed independently. in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a Driving off truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐ In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off ably detected, the system requests that the automatically; for example: driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐ ▷ On steep uphill grades. sive maneuvers, if needed. ▷ In front of bumps in the road. ▷ With a heavy trailer. Cornering In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ orable weather or light conditions: ▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ When the desired speed is too high for a curve, tions: the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves ▷ Wet conditions. may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. ▷ Snowfall. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ ▷ Slush. tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle ▷ Fog. driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ ▷ Glare. tected very late. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ stance by braking, steering or evading.
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 247
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Drive power ▷ Cruise control. The desired speed is also maintained downhill. ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go func‐ The speed may not be maintained on uphill tion ACC. grades if the drive power is insufficient. The speed value is suggested as the new de‐ Depending on the drive mode, the vehicle may sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed exceed or drop below the set desired speed in value, the corresponding system must be acti‐ some situations; for instance, on downhill or up‐ vated. hill grades. Safety information Malfunction Warning Radar sensor The system cannot serve as a substitute for the The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐ driver’s personal judgment in assessing the sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the by damage incurred, for instance during parking. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust tem fails. driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Have the system checked by a dealer's service closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ center or another qualified service center or re‐ ate. pair shop. The system may be impaired when the detection range of the radar sensor is partially covered Warning such as by the license plate holder. The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐ Camera dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic The function for detecting and responding when conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in tervene where appropriate. the following situations: ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Overview after vehicle delivery. ▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A Buttons on the steering wheel Check Control message is displayed. Button Function Speed Limit Assist Apply suggested speed manually.
Concept Rocker switch: When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed Set speed, refer to Cruise Control. Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this new speed value can be applied for the following Switching on/off systems: 1. "CAR" ▷ Speed Limiter. 2. "Settings"
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 248
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
3. "Driver Assistance" When the SET icon lights up, press the 4. If necessary, "Driving" button. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Speed limits" Adapt to route 7. Select the desired setting: Concept ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit can be applied manually. The system can be configured so that the vehi‐ cle adapts the speed automatically to the route. ▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐ its are displayed in the instrument cluster For instance, the speed will be reduced in the without being applied. following situations, if necessary: ▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched ▷ Before making turns. off. ▷ Before a traffic circle. ▷ Before a curve. Displays in the instrument cluster Adjustment A message is indicated in the instrument cluster 1. "CAR" when the system and cruise control are acti‐ 2. "Settings" vated. 3. "Driver Assistance" Symbol Function 4. If necessary, "Driving" Depending on the equipment ver‐ 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" sion, the indicator light illuminates 6. "Adjust to route" green, together with the symbol for a cruise control system: System limits Speed Limit Assist is active and Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit detected speed limits can be ap‐ Info system. plied manually for the displayed system. Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info. Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for Detected change of a speed limit the Active Cruise Control ACC. with immediate effect. The system may not respond at all or with limita‐ tions to the route when the navigation system is Indicator light illuminates green: unable to clearly identify the position of the vehi‐ the detected speed limit can be cle. applied with the SET button. Additional information: After it has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed. System limits of Speed Limit Information, refer to page 173. Manual adoption A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise control manually.
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 249
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Steering assistant Radar sensors The radar sensors are located in the bumpers. Concept The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐ hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐ tem executes supporting steering movements, for instance when driving in a curve.
General information The system determines the position of the lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five Front center bumper. radar sensors and a camera. Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐ self according to the lane markings or vehicles in front. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
Warning Front side bumper. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.
Overview Rear bumper. Buttons on the steering wheel Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. Button Function
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/ off.
Switch function on.
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 250
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Camera Switching on/off
Assisted Driving Mode
General information This button is used to switch the config‐ ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐ marily used function. The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Set function clean and clear. When the system is active, press the button repeatedly until the desired func‐ Functional requirements tion is selected in the function bar. The function bar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed at the ▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h. bottom of the instrument cluster. ▷ Sufficient lane width. ▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐ Symbol Function ing on both sides is detected. Cruise control with distance control. ▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐ tected. Depending on the equipment ver‐ ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. sion, cruise control with distance ▷ Wide curves. control and steering and traffic jam assistant. ▷ Drive in the center of the lane. ▷ Turn signal switched off. ▷ The sensor system calibration process is The selected function is shown in green. complete. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Cruise control with distance control active. rently used. ▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened. ▷ Approach Control Warning active. Switching on ▷ Pedestrian Warning active. 1. Press the button on the steering ▷ Side Collision Warning active. wheel.
2. Adjust the steering and traffic jam assistant if necessary. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering.
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 251
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
System activates automatically as soon as all Displays in the instrument function conditions are fulfilled. cluster Steering wheel symbol lights up green. The system is active. Symbol Description Gray steering wheel symbol: With the system switched on, the person warn‐ ing with City braking function and the side colli‐ The system is on standby. sion mitigation are active. Green steering wheel symbol: Switching off The system is activated. The system supports the driver Press the button on the steering wheel. in keeping the vehicle within the lane. The indicator goes out. Yellow flashing steering wheel The system does not perform supportive steer‐ symbol: ing wheel movements. Lane marking driven over. Interrupting automatically The steering wheel vibrates The system is automatically interrupted in the where applicable. following situations, for example: Yellow steering wheel symbol ▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h. and a signal sounds, if applica‐ ▷ When the steering wheel is released. ble: ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. System interruption is imminent. ▷ When you manipulate steering. Steering wheel symbol flashes ▷ When leaving own lane. red, signal sounds: ▷ When the turn signal is switched on. System is switching off. ▷ When the lane is too narrow. Yellow steering wheel symbol: ▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐ The hands are not grasping the tected and there is no vehicle driving in front. steering wheel. The system is ▷ When Active Cruise Control ACC is inter‐ still active. rupted. Red steering wheel symbol and ▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐ a signal sounds: tened. The hands are not grasping the Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. steering wheel. System interrup‐ tion is imminent. The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering. The system reduces the speed to a standstill if applicable. System activates automatically as soon as all It is possible that the system will function conditions are fulfilled. not execute any supporting steering movements.
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 252
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Alternative displays Symbol Description
Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ Yellow steering wheel symbol: plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are displayed as follows: The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is Symbol Description still active. Gray steering wheel symbol: Red steering wheel symbol and The system is on standby. a signal sounds: Green steering wheel symbol: The hands are not grasping the The system is activated. steering wheel. System interrup‐ tion is imminent. Depending on equipment, yel‐ It is possible that the system will low flashing steering wheel sym‐ not execute any supporting bol: steering movements. Lane marking driven over. With Active Cruise Control, the The steering wheel vibrates system may reduce the speed. where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol Displays on the steering wheel and a signal sounds, if applica‐ ble: System interruption is imminent.
Depending on equipment, steer‐ ing wheel symbol flashes red, signal sounds: System is switching off.
Green steering wheel symbol and lane marking symbol: The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate The system supports the driver analogously to the displays in the instrument in keeping the vehicle within the cluster: lane. ▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent. ▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
The steering wheel displays can be switched on/off if required.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" 5. "Light elements"
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 253
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐ ings. All system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. System limits Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ tions: General information ▷ Wet conditions. The system cannot be activated or meaningfully ▷ Snowfall. used in certain situations. ▷ Slush. Safety information ▷ Fog. ▷ Glare. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic Warning situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ The system is designed to operate in certain stance by braking, steering or evading. conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ Driver Attention Camera spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as Always monitor the traffic conditions. warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ not the driver is paying attention to the traffic tem’s operation and limitations. conditions. The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully functional in the following situations: Hands on the steering wheel ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. contact in the following situations: ▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐ ▷ Driving with gloves. able sunglasses. ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes Extended Traffic Jam When driving within narrow lanes, the system Assistant cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐ stance in the following situations: Concept ▷ In construction areas. Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the ▷ Depending on the equipment, with automatic driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations. formation of emergency lanes. Steering support takes place without the driver ▷ Within city limits. actively steering.
Weather General information The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ The system uses the sensors of the steering and orable weather or light conditions: lane control assistant.
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 254
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Safety information Traffic Jam Assistant must be available in the respective country.
Warning Switching on The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the As soon as all functional requirements traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ will be displayed as an additional symbol fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust in the function bar. The toolbar is dis‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the played at the bottom of the instrument traffic situation closely, be ready to take over cluster. steering and braking at any time, and actively Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant intervene where appropriate. with the button on the steering wheel. State laws differ and the use of this function may The symbol for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant violate the law. Before use, check your state and is shown in green. local laws. Two green LED lights are illuminated on the Additionally, the notices for the Steering and steering wheel. Lane Control Assistant apply. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is Additional information: shown in green. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐ page 249. cle control.
Functional requirements Displays in the instrument ▷ The functional requirements of the steering cluster and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled. Functional requirements, refer to page 250. Symbol Description ▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐ Indicator light green: system is tive. active. ▷ The function is only available on certain street types, e.g. freeways. Indicator light white: system is ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ ready. clists. Gray indicator light: the system ▷ Sufficient lane width. has been interrupted. ▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead are detected. ▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h. Alternative displays ▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐ Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ ment cluster detects that the driver is paying plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are attention to the traffic. displayed as follows: ▷ When traveling to countries outside of the country of origin of the vehicle, Extended
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 255
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Indicator Description Safety information light
Indicator light green: system is Warning active. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Displays on the steering wheel system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering and Lane Control Assistant apply. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate page 249. analogously to the displays in the instrument cluster: Functional requirements ▷ Green: the system is active. ▷ The functional requirements of the steering ▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled. ▷ Red: system will be deactivated. Functional requirements, refer to page 250. ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ System limits clists and with physical barriers to oncoming traffic, such as crash barriers. The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐ ▷ Lane markings have been detected. sistant system apply. ▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h. ▷ The minimum speed is country-specific. Depending on the equipment version: Switch lane change assist on/off Automatic Lane Change 1. "CAR" Assistant 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" Concept 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Steering Assistance" The system additionally supports the driver when changing lanes on multilane roads. 6. "Automatic Lane Change"
General information Changing lanes The system uses the sensors of the steering and 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits lane control assistant. changing lanes.
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 256
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
2. Press the turn indicator lever in the required Displays in the instrument direction to the pressure point for signaling cluster briefly. Steering support in the required direction can Symbol Description be detected a short time later. Green steering wheel symbol. Green arrow symbol for lane- changing. The system carries out a lane change.
Green steering wheel symbol. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. The system detected the lane After the lane change, the system helps keep the change request. Lane change vehicle in the new lane. not currently possible. Canceling a lane change Depending on country specifica‐ The lane change can be canceled by steering tions: movement into the opposite direction. Green steering wheel symbol. Gray arrow symbol for lane- changing. Lane change not possible; func‐ tional requirements not met.
Alternative displays Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are displayed as follows:
256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 257
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Symbol Description Depending on the Green steering wheel symbol. equipment version: lane Gray line for lane marking on the change with active appropriate side. guidance Green arrow symbol for lane- changing. The system carries out a lane Concept change. The system assists the driver when lane changes are necessary to reach a navigation Green steering wheel symbol. destination. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. General information No arrow symbol for lane- The system uses the sensors of the steering and changing on the display. lane control assistant. The system detected the lane change request. Lane change Safety information not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐ Warning tions: The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Green steering wheel symbol. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Gray line for lane marking on the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the appropriate side. system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust Gray arrow symbol for lane- driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic changing. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Lane change not possible; func‐ ate. tional requirements not met. Additionally, the notices for the Active Cruise System limits Control and the Steering and Lane Control As‐ sistant apply. The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐ sistant system apply. Additional information: Active Cruise Control, refer to page 238. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 249.
Functional requirements ▷ Active Cruise Control is activated. ▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road. ▷ Lane markings on the side of the desired lane change detected. ▷ Navigation system: guidance is activated.
257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 258
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
▷ Adaptation to route details is activated. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" ▷ The function must be available in the country 6. "Adjust to route" in which the vehicle is driven. System limits Changing lanes The limits of the Active Cruise Control and 1. One or more lane changes are required to Steering and Lane Control Assistant systems ap‐ reach a navigation destination. ply. The system prepares for this lane change. For this purpose, the system determines a suitable opening in the traffic flow on the next PDC Park Distance Control lane. 2. When a gap is detected, the speed is Concept adapted so that the vehicle remains at the PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you level of the opening. are approaching slowly in front of or behind the 3. A Check Control message indicates a lane vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐ change suggestion. play on the Control Display. 4. When the traffic situation permits a lane Depending on the equipment version: obstacles change, the driver can steer the vehicle into at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the the next lane. side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by When equipped with Automatic Lane Change the side parking aid. Assistant: after the Check Control message has been displayed, a lane change can be ini‐ General information tiated by operating the turn signal. The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐ ments are located in the bumpers and possibly Display in the instrument cluster on the sides of the vehicle. The suggestion for the lane change is displayed The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐ and a green checkmark indicates the active func‐ mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. tion. An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐ Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ pending collision at a distance to the object of ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the approx. 27 in/70 cm. Assisted Driving View of the instrument cluster. For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic More information: Assisted Driving View, refer to warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐ page 157. ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Activate adaptation to route Safety information details 1. "CAR" Warning 2. "Settings" The system cannot serve as a substitute for the 3. "Driver Assistance" driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the 4. If necessary, "Driving" system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 259
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Switching on/off closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: Warning ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance the engine is running. Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ ▷ Depending on the equipment version: while layed due to physical circumstances. There is a approaching detected obstacles if the speed risk of injury or risk of damage to property. is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid activation distance depends on the situation driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control in question. is not yet active. You may switch automatic activation when ob‐ stacles are detected on and off.
Overview 1. "CAR" Button in the vehicle 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation" 6. "Automatic PDC Activation" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used. Depending on equipment, an additional camera view is also switched on.
Park assistance button Automatic deactivation during forward travel Ultrasound sensors The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, Switch the system back on, if needed. for instance in the bumpers. Switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button.
Functional requirements ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ▷ Off: the LED goes out. ers, bicycle racks or similar. The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. verse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 260
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ Visual warning tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐ verse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones
General information An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is The approach of the vehicle to an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal shown on the Control Display. Objects that are tone sounds from the left rear speaker. farther away are already displayed on the Control The shorter the distance to the object, the Display before a signal sounds. shorter the intervals. The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is The range of the sensors is represented in the sounded. colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are detected. When there are objects in front of and behind the vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐ than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant quired space. tone will sound. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ The intermittent tone and constant tone are played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐ different view with obstacle markings as needed: gaged. 1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed. The intermittent tone is switched off after a short 2. For instance "Park. sensors only" time when the vehicle is stationary. Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐ Volume ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐ hicles approaching in the front or rear from the The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted. side. 1. "CAR" Additional information: 2. "Settings" Cross traffic warning, refer to page 281. 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" System limits 5. "Volume PDC signal" Safety information 6. Set the desired value. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Warning rently used. The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 261
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ With small and low objects, for instance warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ boxes. er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of tem’s operation and limitations. the lane. ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in Trailer towing foam material. With a trailer, a trailer power socket in use or ▷ With plants and bushes. when trailer towing is activated, the rear PDC ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance functions will be switched off. curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone White symbol is displayed. sounds. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the range of the sensors is shown as a the vehicle is not taken into account by the shaded area on the Control Display. system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement False warnings The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐ following situations: cle within the detection range: ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with coats. ice. ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. for instance from passing vehicles or loud ▷ On rough road surfaces. machines. ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged ▷ In large buildings with right angles and or out of position. smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐ ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high rages. relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, ▷ In automatic car washes. cold, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on straight. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam ▷ With moving objects. cleaners or neon lights. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic ledges. Park Distance Control PDC activation on obsta‐ ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and cle detection, for instance in automatic car smooth surfaces. washes. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. Malfunction ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. A Check Control message is displayed.
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 262
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
White symbol is displayed, and the range Safety information of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display. Warning PDC Park Distance Control has failed. Have the The system cannot serve as a substitute for the system checked by a dealer's service center or driver’s personal judgment in assessing the another qualified service center or repair shop. traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ Depending on equipment tively intervene where appropriate. version: emergency brake Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC function, Active PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant apply. Concept Additional information: The emergency braking function of PDC initiates ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to an emergency braking in case of acute risk of page 258. collision. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 274. General information Temporary switching off This function may not be available. Contact your The emergency brake function can be switched authorized dealer’s service center or another off temporarily: qualified service center as to whether this addi‐ tional function is currently in your vehicle or when Confirm the message on the Control Display. it can be installed in your vehicle in the future. During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐ Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ uation, no further emergency braking will occur. vented under all circumstances. The function is available below walking speed Settings when driving in reverse or rolling backward. It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the be protected by the system. brake intervention. 1. "CAR" After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐ 2. "Settings" ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with 3. "Driver Assistance" caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐ erator pedal and release as needed. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the 5. "Active PDC with braking interv." vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at 6. Select the desired setting. any time. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the rently used. Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐ sistant. System limits The limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply.
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 263
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The system cannot be used in the following sit‐ Display uations, for example: ▷ When Hill Descent Control is active, the emergency braking function is deactivated. Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 231. ▷ When driving with a trailer. If required, deactivate the system via iDrive where applicable.
With Parking Assistant: To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ side parking aid cle. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ Concept stacles. The system warns of obstacles on the side of ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles the vehicle. were detected. ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the General information vehicle was not yet captured. The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐ sistant. Limits of the side parking aid The system only displays stationary obstacles Safety information that were previously detected by sensors while passing them. The system does not detect whether an obstacle Warning moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the The system cannot serve as a substitute for the markings are shown in black after a certain time. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐ traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. tured. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch The side parking aid is not available when the traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ trailer socket is occupied or trailer towing is acti‐ tively intervene where appropriate. vated. Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant Assistant apply. apply. Additional information: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 258. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 274.
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 264
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Without Surround View: Camera rearview camera
Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ play. Additionally, assistance functions can be shown in the display, e.g., help lines. The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. Safety information The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Switching on/off driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Switching on automatically Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine tively intervene where appropriate. is running.
Automatic deactivation during Overview forward travel Depending on the vehicle The system switches off when a certain driving equipment: button in the vehicle distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Park assistance button The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 265
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Switching the view via iDrive Parking aid lines If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via iDrive: Pathway lines 1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side. 2. "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera open. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ power socket can restrict the visibility range quired when parking and maneuvering on level of the camera. roads. Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and Display on the Control Display are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Function bars The assistance functions can be activated man‐ Turning radius lines ually via the function bars on the sides of the Control Display. 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. 2. With corresponding equipment: "Camera image" 3. ▷ "Parking aid lines". Pathway lines and turning radius lines are displayed. ▷ "Obstacle mark.". Turning radius lines can only be superimposed Depending on the vehicle equipment, the on the camera image together with pathway obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance lines. Control are displayed by markings. Turning radius lines show the course of the Zoom on trailer hitch: smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. 2. "Trailer hitch". A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is shown. Parking using pathway and turning radius More than one assistance function can be active lines at the same time. 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐ ing space.
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 266
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Setting brightness and contrast the green pathway line covers the corre‐ via iDrive sponding turning radius line. With the rearview camera switched on: Obstacle marking 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. 2. "Camera image" 3. To perform the desired setting: ▷ "Brightness" ▷ "Contrast"
System limits
Deactivated camera Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles When the camera is deactivated, for instance behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park when the tailgate is open, the camera image is Distance Control sensors. displayed hatched in gray. Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. Detection of objects The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding match the markings of the PDC Park Distance objects such as ledges may not be detected by Control. the system. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐ sistance functions also consider data from the Zoom on trailer hitch PDC Park Distance Control. To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch. trol chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.
With Parking Assistant Plus: Surround View
Two static circle segments show the distance Concept between the trailer and the trailer hitch. The system provides assistance in parking and A docking line dependent on the steering angle maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer shown on the Control Display. hitch. When zooming in, remember that the view may General information no longer show certain obstacles. Several cameras capture the area from different selectable perspectives.
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 267
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ Overview played: ▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system Buttons in the vehicle shows the camera perspective suitable for the respective driving situation. ▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas behind the vehicle. ▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐ senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle. ▷ Unobstructed camera perspective, movable via iDrive. ▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐ Park assistance button ing on the currently engaged gear. Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐ Panorama View ings or a part of it is depicted. Additionally, assistance functions are shown in the display, e.g., help lines. Cameras More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐ vated. The following assistance functions are automati‐ cally displayed: ▷ Side parking aid. ▷ Door opening angle. Front camera Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ tively intervene where appropriate. Rearview camera
267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 268
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Display on the Control Display
Overview
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐ terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the camera lenses. If required, clean the camera 1 Function bar, left lenses. 2 Camera image Switching on/off 3 Side view 4 Automatic camera perspective Switching on automatically 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ 6 Function bar, right tor lever position R is engaged when the engine 7 Rearview camera is running. 8 Selection window The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐ tive driving situation is displayed. Function bar on the left Additional information: The left function bar can be used for the direct Switching on/off, refer to page 259. selection of various views via iDrive. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. Switching on/off manually ▷ "Car wash". Press the park assistance button. ▷ "Parking": around the vehicle. ▷ "3D view": available camera. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ "Trailer hitch". ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera cannot be switched off if Side view the reverse gear is engaged. The side view can be selected for the right or left Automatic deactivation during vehicle side. forward travel This view helps when positioning the vehicle at the curb or with other obstacles on the side by The system switches off when a certain driving displaying the side surroundings. distance or speed is exceeded. The side view looks from rear to front and in case Switch the system back on, if needed. of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐ stacles.
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 269
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Automatic camera perspective ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to The automatic camera perspective shows a use the activation points for Panorama View. steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐ ing direction. Rearview camera This perspective adapts to the respective driving This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐ situation. era. As soon as obstacles are detected, the view Selection window changes to a fixed display of the area in front or at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary, The individual camera perspectives can be se‐ changes to a side view. lected in the selection window via iDrive. When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic camera perspective is closed and the system Parking aid lines uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera. If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐ Pathway lines era perspective when reverse gear is engaged. The automatic camera perspective will be re‐ tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable unobstructed camera perspective With selection of the movable camera perspec‐ tive, a circle appears on the Control Display. By turning the Controller or via touch function, specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐ Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ lected. quired when parking and maneuvering on level roads. The current perspective is marked with a camera symbol. Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel To leave the function, move the Controller side‐ movements. ways and select another camera function.
Function bar on the right Turning radius lines Assistance functions can be activated and set‐ tings can be entered via the right function bar via iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. ▷ "Autom. Parking". ▷ "Back-up Assistant". ▷ "Camera image": ▷ "Brightness". ▷ "Contrast". ▷ "Parking aid lines". Turning radius lines can only be superimposed on the camera image together with pathway ▷ "Obstacle mark.". lines.
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 270
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Turning radius lines show the course of the Car wash view smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐ ing space. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where The car wash view assists when entering a car the green pathway line covers the corre‐ wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's sponding turning radius line. own track.
Obstacle marking Zoom on trailer hitch To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park Distance Control sensors. Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera Two static circle segments show the distance image. between the trailer and the trailer hitch. The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings A docking line dependent on the steering angle match the markings of the PDC Park Distance helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer Control. hitch. When zooming in, remember that the view may no longer show certain obstacles.
Side parking aid
Concept The system warns of obstacles on the side of the vehicle.
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 271
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐ played in selector lever position P. To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐ cle. ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines. ▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ Limits of the display stacles. The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with distorted image for technical reasons.
Limits of the side parking aid Even if the symbols for the door opening angles do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐ The system only displays stationary obstacles play, the following needs to be noted when park‐ that were previously detected by sensors while ing next to other objects: passing them. Because of the perspective, higher, protruding The system does not detect whether an obstacle objects may be closer than they appear on the moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the Control Display. markings are not shown anymore in the display after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured. Panorama View
Door opening angle Concept
Concept If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐ cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening angles of the doors. The system does not provide a warning of ap‐ proaching traffic.
The system provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
General information Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 272
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in Storing activation points the front and rear capture the sideways traffic 1. Drive to the position at which the system is to area to improve the view. be switched on, and stop. Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front and rear end of the vehicle. 2. Press the button. The camera image shows different levels of dis‐ 3. Move the Controller to the right. tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for 4. "Activation point" distance estimations. The current position is displayed. Depending on the equipment version, the func‐ 5. "Save activation point" tion can only be used when driving forward. Activation points are, if possible, stored with Display on the Control Display town/city and street address, or else with the GPS coordinates. Press the button when the engine is run‐ ning. Using activation points Depending on the driving direction, the image of The use of activation points can be switched on the respective camera is displayed: and off. ▷ "Front": front camera image. ▷ "Rear": rear camera image. 1. Press the button. Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐ 2. Move the Controller to the right. fic warning can additionally warn of approaching 3. "Settings" vehicles using radar sensors. 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based" Additional information: 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically Cross traffic warning, refer to page 281. when set activation points are reached."
With navigation system: activation Displaying activation points points 1. Press the button. Concept 2. Move the Controller to the right. Positions where Panorama View should switch 3. "Manage points" on automatically can be stored as activation A list of all activation points is displayed. points provided that a GPS signal is received. Renaming or deleting activation points General information Up to ten activation points can be stored. 1. Press the button. Activation points can be used when driving for‐ 2. Move the Controller to the right. ward for the front camera. 3. "Manage points" A list of all activation points is displayed. 4. Select an activation point as needed. 5. To perform the desired setting: ▷ "Rename"
272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 273
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ "Delete activation point" The objects displayed on the Control Display ▷ "Delete all activation points" may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. Setting brightness and contrast Additional information: Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 258. Surround View or Panorama View switched on. Malfunction 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control 2. "Camera image" Display. 3. To perform the desired setting: A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐ ▷ "Brightness" cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐ ▷ "Contrast" era is displayed in black on the Control Display. Functional limitations The system can be used only to a limited extent in the following situations: With Parking Assistant ▷ In poor light. Plus: Remote 3D View ▷ In case of soiled cameras. ▷ With a door open. Concept ▷ With the tailgate open. The BMW Connected app and the pictures of ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. the Surround View cameras in combination with Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance the corresponding equipment enable the display open door, in the camera image mark areas that of the vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device. are currently not displayed. The function displays a momentary view of the situation. System limits Functional requirements Non-visible areas ▷ Data transmission must be activated. Because of the camera angle, the areas under Data protection, refer to page 67. the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras. ▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on the mobile device. Detection of objects ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: an activated driver Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding profile with an existing ConnectedDrive ac‐ objects such as ledges may not be detected by count is required. the system. Driver profiles, refer to page 68. Some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol chapter.
273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 274
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Switching the function on/off ▷ When other camera functions are being per‐ formed in the vehicle. Switching on/off with other ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking functions speed. 1. "CAR" ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in 2. "Settings" every country. 3. "General settings" ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function can only be used three times within two 4. "Data privacy" hours. 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "All services incl. analysis" ▷ "All vehicle services" With Parking Assistant: Parking Assistant Switching on/off individually Concept Pre-adjustment 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. "Select services individually" 6. "Connected App and cust. portal" 7. "Remote 3D View" The system supports the driver in the following Switching on/off situations: 1. "CAR" ▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel 2. "Settings" parking. 3. "General settings" ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the road, 4. "Data privacy" diagonal parking. The system orients itself with the middle of the parking space during 5. "Individual selection" diagonal parking. Functional limitations ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when driving out of parallel parking spaces. The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: General information ▷ In poor light. ▷ In case of soiled cameras. Handling ▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in Parking assistant handling is divided into three the display indicate areas that are not re‐ steps: corded by the system. ▷ Switching on and activating. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. ▷ Parking space search.
274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 275
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ Parking. System status and instructions on required ac‐ NOTICE tions are displayed on the Control Display. The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to both sides of the vehicle. property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Steptronic transmission The safety information of the PDC Park Distance The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐ Control applies in addition. ble parking line and takes control of the following functions during the parking operation: Additional information: ▷ Steering. PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 258. ▷ Accelerating and braking. Overview ▷ Changing gears. The parking operation is automatic. Button in the vehicle Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Park assistance button closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Ultrasound sensors
Warning If the trailer hitch is used, the driver assistance system can cause damage due to covered sen‐ sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐ tem should not be used during trailer towing or if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle rack. With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows, and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the parking spaces are measured and the distances to obstacles determined.
275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 276
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Functional requirements The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Ultrasound sensors Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ers. Switching on with reverse gear ▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. 1. Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space For measuring parking spaces search is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking" 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: Switching on via iDrive 5 ft/1.5 m. Display of the rearview camera or PDC view must be active. Suitable parking space 1. Move the Controller to the right. General information: 2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length Display: "Autom. Parking" of 1.7 ft/0.5 m. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum Display on the Control Display length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Parallel parking to the road: System activated/deactivated ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. Sym‐ Meaning ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. bol Diagonal parking: Gray: the system is not available. ▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's White: the system is available but not width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. activated.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length. System is activated. The depth of diagonal parking spaces must Parking space search is active. be estimated by the driver. Due to technical limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐ The parking procedure is active. The mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces. system takes over the steering.
For the parking operation ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed. ▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on with the button Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up.
276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 277
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Parking space search and system The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ status rently used.
Signal tones of the PDC Park Distance Control During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐ mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐ tance Control. A continuous tone sounds when the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐ ches/20 cm. ▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking space search is active. Parking using the parking ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking assistant spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active, Parking suitable parking spaces are highlighted and 1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐ an acoustic signal sounds. tant. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly For this, engage the reverse gear or press the detected, the system automatically adjusts parking assist button and activate the system the suitable parking method. In the case of on the Control Display, if needed. parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐ nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In Parking assistant is activated. this case, the desired parking method must 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a be selected manually. speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and ▷ The parking procedure is active. The sys‐ at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. tem takes over the steering. The status of the parking space search and ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ possible parking spaces are displayed on the ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and Control Display. straight, even if the system is deactivated. 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the When the system is deactivated, the displays parking operation: select the parking space on the Control Display are shown in gray. on the Control Display. The system takes over the steering. Switching signal tone for 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ suitable parking spaces on/off play. 1. "CAR" At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐ 2. "Settings" lector lever position is set. 3. "Driver Assistance" The end of the parking operation is indicated on the Control Display. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if 5. "Automatic Parking" needed. 6. "Alert if parking space detected"
277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 278
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Interrupting manually Switching off The parking assistant can be interrupted at any The system can be switched off manually: time: Press the park assistance button. ▷ Press the park assistance button.
▷ "Autom. Parking": select the symbol on System limits the Control Display. Safety information Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the Warning following situations: The system is designed to operate in certain ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ takes over steering. tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk surfaces. of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ overcome, such as curbs. er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ tem’s operation and limitations. pear. ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays No parking assistance clearances that are too small. The parking assistant does not offer assistance ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐ in the following situations: tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐ ▷ In tight curves. ceeded. ▷ When towing a trailer. ▷ When switching to another function on the Control Display. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. ▷ If the tailgate is open. Functional limitations ▷ If doors are open. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ ▷ When setting the parking brake. lowing situations: ▷ During acceleration. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel ▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an roads. extended period while the vehicle is station‐ ▷ On slippery ground. ary. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the A Check Control message is displayed. parking space. ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured Resuming parking space. An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge ued, if needed. of a port. Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the instructions on the Control Display.
278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 279
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be drive out of the parking space without further detected or suitable parking spaces may not steering movements. be detected at all. Safety information Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ Warning urements can run into physical limits. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the The limits of the ultrasonic measurement of the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Park Distance Control PDC apply. traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the Additional information: system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 258. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Malfunction closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another Warning qualified service center or repair shop. If the trailer hitch is used, the driver assistance system can cause damage due to covered sen‐ Depending on the sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐ equipment version: driving tem should not be used during trailer towing or out of a parking space if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle using the parking assistant rack. Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC Concept Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking The system makes driving out of parallel parking Assistant apply. spaces easier. Additional information: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to General information page 258. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 274. Steptronic transmission The parking assistant calculates an optimal line Functional requirements for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐ ▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects trol of the following functions during the maneu‐ in front of and behind the car are detected. ver: The distance to a detected curb is at least ▷ Steering. 6 inches/15 cm. ▷ Accelerating and braking. ▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐ ▷ Changing gears. sistant and an object is detected in front of the vehicle. The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can ▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐ ger than your vehicle.
279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 280
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse. General information The system takes control of the steering when Driving out of parking spaces driving in reverse along the stored route. 1. Switch on drive-ready state. The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐ 2. Steptronic transmission: erator pedal and brake. Press the park assistance button or shift into The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐ reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance switch on the parking assistant. Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant. 3. Tilt the controller to the right and activate the Additional information: parking assistant on the Control Display: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to "Autom. Parking" page 258. 4. On the Control Display, confirm the required ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 274. direction for driving out of the parking space if necessary. Safety information 5. Steptronic transmission: The system takes control of the maneuver. A Warning message will be displayed at the end of the maneuver. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the 6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the driving out of the parking space and drive off system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐ as usual. fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust The parking assistant is switched off auto‐ driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic matically. closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. System limits The limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. Warning If the trailer hitch is used, the driver assistance system can cause damage due to covered sen‐ With Parking Assistant: sors. There may be a risk of accident or risk of Reversing Assistant damage to property. The driver assistance sys‐ tem should not be used during trailer towing or Concept if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle rack. The system supports the driver when driving in reverse, for instance when driving out of tight or Additionally, the Safety Instructions for the PDC confusing parking or street situations. Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking The vehicle stores the driving movements of the Assistant apply. last route. This stored route can be driven back Additional information: with automated steering. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 258. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 274.
280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 281
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Functional requirements ▷ During activation or intervention by driving control systems or assist systems. ▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the route. ▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. ▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored. ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐ ▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐ speed of 22 mph/36 km/h. ing angle. ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated. ▷ When the display on the Control Display is cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐ Driving back with automated coming calls. steering 1. Press the park assistance button or shift into System limits reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you and the drive-ready state is switched on. encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and 2. Move the Controller to the right. take over control of the vehicle. 3. "Back-up Assistant" ▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is The system takes over the steering. limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning where required. is issued and the function may be canceled. 5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and ▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking and the brake. Assistant apply. When driving in reverse, pay attention to the Different influences can lead to side deviations vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐ an obstacle, stop immediately and take over ple, this includes the following factors: control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions ▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐ on the PDC Park Distance Control. tionary while storing the distance covered. 6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance reached and take control of the vehicle, such traveled. as by shifting to a forward gear. ▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐ At the end of the stored route, a signal will clines. sound and a request will be displayed, also with the instruction to take control of the ve‐ hicle. Cross traffic warning
Terminating the system Concept The system automatically cancels in situations At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐ such as the following: nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or detected sooner by the system than is possible takes over steering. from the driver's seat. ▷ When engaging a forward gear.
281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 282
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
General information Park assistance button
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system indicates approaching traffic. The radar sensors are located in the rear Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic bumper. area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well. Two additional radar sensors are located in the front bumpers.
Safety information
Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐ Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch tional radar sensors are located in the front traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ bumpers. propriate. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. Overview Switching on/off Button in the vehicle Activating/deactivating the system
With the button
1. Press the park assistance button. 2. Move the Controller to the right. 3. "Settings" 4. "Cross Traffic Warning" 5. "Activate function"
282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 283
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Via iDrive Light in the exterior mirror 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. "Cross Traffic Warning" 6. "Activate function"
Switching on automatically If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles play, it is automatically switched on as soon as are detected by the rear sensors and your own PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is vehicle is moving backwards. active and a gear is engaged. If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is Display in the PDC Park Distance switched on. Control view Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front system is switched on when a forward gear is engaged.
Switching off automatically The system is automatically switched off in the following situations: ▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed. ▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded. ▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐ In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐ ing assistant. spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sensors. Warning Display in the camera view General information The respective display is called up on the Con‐ trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the light in the exterior mirror may flash.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sensors.
283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 284
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle.
Acoustic warning In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐ nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐ spective direction.
System limits The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very high. ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, for instance by stickers. ▷ If the field of view of the sensors is covered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges or snow hills. ▷ If cargo protrudes. ▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow speed. ▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the sensors, that hide cross traffic. If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ ing is activated, for instance during operation with trailer or bicycle rack, cross traffic warning is not available for the area behind the vehicle.
284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 285
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and ▷ With the rocker switch in the center con‐ sole. options ▷ With the BMW display key. ▷ With the button in the lower section of the This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tailgate. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are The vehicle will adjust according to the se‐ not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due lected driving mode at drive-off. to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Sport level: also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Lowest driving level for driving at higher tems. When using these functions and systems, speeds. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. ▷ Normal level: Standard level for normal roads and speeds. Chassis components ▷ High level 1: Slightly elevated vehicle level for easy terrain at reduced speed. The chassis components are optimized for the vehicle and its scope of application and thereby If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at ensure the best possible Driving Dynamics. higher speeds. ▷ High level 2: Highest driving level for terrains with major Two-axle ride level control uneven surfaces in the lowest speed range. If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at Concept higher speeds. Air suspension ensures best possible driving Level adjustment takes place when all doors are comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐ closed. ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the damping is adjusted to the vehicle state. Safety information General information Warning Regardless of the load, the vehicle will be main‐ tained at the configured vehicle level. Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐ ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts. Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to level can be set to five levels. property. When adjusting the vehicle height, ▷ Entry level: make sure that the areas of movement around Lowest vehicle level setting. the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free. The entry level can be set when the vehicle is stationary with the following features:
285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 286
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Overview ▷ LED on the rocker switch flashes fast: the se‐ lected level is not possible at this time. Rocker switch in the vehicle ▷ All LEDs on the rocker switch are flashing: system is initializing. The selected level will be adjusted after the initialization where re‐ quired.
Automatic
While driving In the SPORT driving mode, SPORT+ driving mode or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers it‐ self automatically. Setting the level When a set vehicle level is exited due to the speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted accord‐ With the rocker switch in the center ing to the selected driving mode. console In the event of a flat tire When a loss of the tire inflation pressure is de‐ tected on a wheel, the wheel load will be reduced automatically to increase the possible range of travel. In this situation, only the normal level is available.
With the BMW display key
Concept Up The vehicle level can be adjusted with the BMW display key when the vehicle is stationary, for in‐ Push the rocker switch forward. stance for easier loading or as an entry aid. In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to next higher level when the rocker switch is Setting the level pressed. 1. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready state off using the Start/Stop button. Down 2. Closing the doors. Pull the rocker switch backward. 3. If necessary, switch on the display on the The vehicle will lower by one level. BMW display key and cancel the display lock. Display BMW display key, refer to page 85. ▷ LED on the rocker switch lights up: display of 4. On the BMW display key, change to the fol‐ the current level. lowing menu: "Entry level". ▷ LED on the rocker switch is flashing: adjust‐ 5. "Height control" ment procedure active. The vehicle raises or 6. ▷ "Lower": tap the button. The vehicle low‐ lowers itself. ers itself to the entry level.
286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 287
Driving comfort CONTROLS
For safety reasons, lowering is only possi‐ prevent overheating and is temporarily un‐ ble from the normal level or the Sport available or operates with a delay. Let the level. system cool, if needed. ▷ "Raise": tap the button. The vehicle will The rapidly flashing LED on the rocker switch raise itself from the entry level according indicates that the system is unavailable. to the selected drive mode. ▷ If the load is increased, the highest driving level may be locked or automatically exited in Terminating the adjustment procedure order to protect the system. An adjustment procedure that was started on the ▷ When the trailer power socket is in use or BMW display key can be terminated with the when trailer towing is activated, only the nor‐ BMW display key. mal level is available. "Cancel": tap the button. The vehicle raises or lowers itself back to the starting level. Wheel change Before a wheel change, deactivate the system: With the button in the lower tailgate Press the rocker switch forward or pull it back‐ When the tailgate is opened, the vehicle ward for approx. 7 seconds. After the rocker can be lowered to the entry level and switch is released, the LED indicator on the raised again by pressing the button. The flashing rocker switch will go out. of the LED in the button indicates the level Activating the system: press the rocker switch change. forward or pull it backward for approx. 7 seconds. During the raising procedure, the vehicle raises After the rocker switch is released, the LED indi‐ itself from the entry level to the level that was se‐ cator will reactivate. lected last or the normal level. Malfunction Terminating the adjustment procedure A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐ An adjustment procedure that was started with tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered the button in the lower tailgate can be terminated and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. with this button. Visit the nearest dealer's service center or an‐ Press the button again. The vehicle raises or other qualified service center or repair shop. lowers itself back to the starting level. Long periods when vehicle is System limits parked ▷ It may not be possible to change the level During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it during dynamic driving. can lower itself. This is not a malfunction. ▷ It may not be possible to change the level if When the drive-ready state is switched on with the axles are limited. the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the nor‐ mal level automatically. ▷ It may only be possible to lift the vehicle level while the engine is running. Depending on the state of the vehicle, raising to normal level may take several minutes. ▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery is too low, a level change may not be possible. ▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in quick succession, the system switches off to
287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 288
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Adaptive chassis
Concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic driving style or traveling on uneven road surfaces.
General information The driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐ hanced depending on the road surface condition and driving style.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Engine sound
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, you may be able to configure the sound of the engine. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Engine sound" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 289
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate control functions following components: Button Function ▷ Emission tested passenger compartment. ▷ Microfilter. Temperature. ▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐ perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Maximum cooling. Depending on the equipment: ▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. AUTO program. ▷ Ionization. Recirculated-air mode. ▷ Fragrancing. ▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC. Air flow, manual. ▷ Parked-car ventilation. Intensity AUTO program.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost and defog the wind‐ shield.
Rear window defroster.
Depending on the equipment:
289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 290
CONTROLS Climate control
Button Function Switching off ▷ Complete system: Seat and armrest heating, refer to page 126. Press and hold the button on the driver's side until the control panel or switches off. Active seat ventilation, refer to ▷ On the front passenger side: page 127. Press and hold the lower button on Climate control operation. the front passenger side. Open Climate menu, such as for the following settings: upper Temperature body temperature adjustment, parked-car ventilation. Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set Some of the functions can also be used via temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by voice, e.g., temperature. using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Opening the Climate menu Adjusting Press the button on the upper side. Using the button:
The Climate menu is displayed. Press the upper or lower button side to set the desired temperature. For example, the following climate control func‐ tions can be accessed via the Climate menu: Via iDrive: ▷ Fragrance. 1. "CAR" ▷ Air quality. 2. "Settings" ▷ Heating/ventilation. 3. "Climate control" ▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating 4. "Heating/ventilation" Individual settings can be entered for some of 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐ tensity. 6. "Temperature:" 7. Set the desired temperature. Switching on/off 8. "OK" Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ Switching on ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate Press any button except for the following: control will not have sufficient time to adjust the ▷ Menu/Climate Cont. set temperature. ▷ Rear window defroster. Temperature of the ventilation ▷ Lower air flow button side. ▷ Seat heating. General information ▷ Seat ventilation. The temperature of the ventilation in the upper body region can be adjusted.
290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 291
Climate control CONTROLS
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. Air conditioning is switched on automatically with colder toward blue, warmer toward red. the AUTO program. The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body When using the automatic climate control, con‐ region heats or cools noticeably, depending on densation water develops and collects under‐ the adjusted temperature. neath the vehicle. This does not change the set interior tempera‐ ture for the driver and front passenger. Maximum cooling
Adjusting Concept 1. "CAR" The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ 2. "Settings" timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the drive-ready or standby state switched on. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation" General information 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The function is available with external tempera‐ 6. "Temperature adjustment" tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the 7. Set the desired temperature. drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning Switching on/off Press the button. Concept The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ tem is switched on. humidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ gion. The vents need to be open for this. The car's interior can be cooled with the drive- ready or standby state switched on. The air flow can be adjusted with the program active. Switching on/off AUTO program Using the button: Press the button on the lower side. Concept The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats Via iDrive: the car's interior automatically. 1. "CAR" The air distribution and temperature are control‐ led automatically depending on the temperature 2. "Settings" in the car's interior and the desired temperature 3. "Climate control" setting including the selected intensity of the air 4. "Heating/ventilation" flow. 5. "A/C" Depending on the weather, the windshield and Switching on/off the side windows may fog up briefly when drive- Using the button: ready state is switched on. Press the button.
291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 292
CONTROLS Climate control
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program The selected intensity is shown on the climate switched on. control display.
Via iDrive: Automatic recirculated-air 1. "CAR" control AUC 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" Concept 4. "Heating/ventilation" The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐ ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air. 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The outside air supply is shut off and the interior 6. "Automatic" air is recirculated. Depending on the selected settings and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, General information side windows, upper body, and into the floor If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐ area. tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off Air conditioning is switched on automatically with automatically. the AUTO program. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ Point the side vents toward the side windows. ously flows into the car's interior. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window densation as much as possible. fogging increases. The AUTO program is switched off automati‐ cally, when manual air distribution is set. Switching on/off 1. "CAR" Intensity 2. "Settings" With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ 3. "Climate control" sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic 4. "Air quality" control for the air mass. 5. "Automatic" Using the button: If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ Press the lower or upper side of the culated-air mode or defog the windows. button: decrease or increase intensity.
Via iDrive: Recirculated-air mode
1. "CAR" Concept 2. "Settings" You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants 3. "Climate control" in the immediate environment by temporarily 4. "Heating/ventilation" suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle. 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" 6. "Level" Adjusting 7. Set the desired intensity. Using the button:
292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 293
Climate control CONTROLS
Press the button. The air flow may be reduced automatically to The LED is illuminated when recircu‐ save battery power. lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐ side air is shut off. Manual air distribution When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior. Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ Via iDrive: justed manually. 1. "CAR" Adjusting 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" Press the button repeatedly to select a program: 4. "Air quality" 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area. ▷ "Air recirculation" ▷ Upper body region and floor area. ▷ "Fresh air" ▷ Floor area. To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air ▷ Windows and floor area. mode switches off automatically after a certain ▷ Windows. amount of time, depending on the environmental ▷ Windows and upper body. conditions. ▷ Upper body region. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐ fogging increases. mate control display. If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ culated-air mode or defog the windows. SYNC program
Air flow, manual Concept Depending on the equipment, the following set‐ Concept tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the front-passenger side and the rear: The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. ▷ Temperature. ▷ Air flow. General information ▷ Air distribution. To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO ▷ AUTO program. program first. Switching on/off Adjusting 1. "CAR" Press the lower or upper side of the 2. "Settings" button: decrease or increase air flow. 3. "Climate control" The selected air flow is shown on the climate 4. "Synchronize" control display.
293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 294
CONTROLS Climate control
The program is switched off automatically if the Ventilation settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed. Concept Defrosting windshield and The air flow directions can be individually ad‐ remove condensation justed.
Concept Adjusting the ventilation Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows. General information The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct Switching on/off or indirect ventilation. Press the button. Open the vents and position them to ensure ef‐ fective climate control. The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ tem is switched on. Direct ventilation The air flow can be adjusted manually with the The air flow is directed towards the passengers. system switched on. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending If there is window condensation, press on the adjusted temperature. the button on the driver's side or switch on air conditioning to utilize the condensation Indirect ventilation sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐ The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐ shield. gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐ rectly, depending on the set temperature. Rear window defroster Front ventilation Press the button. The LED lights up. The function is operational when the drive-ready state is switched on. The rear window defroster switches off automat‐ ically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ incoming air. row 1. The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐ ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing eous pollutants from the outside air that enters of the vents, arrow 2. the vehicle. Have this combined filter changed during vehicle maintenance.
294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 295
Climate control CONTROLS
Ventilation in rear, center Rear automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐ row 3. Toward blue: colder. Climate control functions Toward red: warmer. Button Function Ventilation in the rear, on the Temperature. side Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ Seat heating, refer to page 126. row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2. Switching on/off
Via iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation"
295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 296
CONTROLS Climate control
5. "Second row of seats" Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ 6. "Activate heating/cooling" ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the The rear automatic climate control is not ready set temperature. for operation if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting the windows and removing condensation is active. Maximum cooling
Using the button: switching on Concept Press any button except for the following: The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the ▷ Lower air flow button side. drive-ready or standby state switched on. ▷ Seat heating. General information Using the button: switching off The function is available with external tempera‐ Press and hold the bottom of the but‐ tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the ton. drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off Temperature Press the button. Concept The LED is illuminated when the sys‐ The automatic climate control achieves the set tem is switched on. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, gion. The vents need to be open for this. and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting AUTO program Using the button: Concept Press the upper or lower button side to Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐ set the desired temperature. trolled automatically. Via iDrive: Switching on/off 1. "CAR" Using the button: 2. "Settings" Press the button. 3. "Climate control" The LED is illuminated with the AUTO 4. "Heating/ventilation" program switched on. 5. "Second row of seats" Via iDrive: 6. "Temp. left:" or "Temp. right:" 7. Set the desired temperature. 1. "CAR" The selected temperature is shown on the cli‐ 2. "Settings" mate control display. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation"
296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 297
Climate control CONTROLS
5. "Second row of seats" The selected air flow is shown on the climate 6. "Automatic" control display. Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is Manual air distribution directed to the upper body and into the floor area. Concept The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ Intensity justed manually. With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed: Adjusting Using the button: Press the lower or upper side of the button to select a program: Press the lower or upper side of the button: decrease or increase intensity. ▷ Upper body region.
Via iDrive: ▷ Upper body region and floor area. ▷ Floor area. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Locking the control elements 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation" Concept 5. "Second row of seats" The control elements of the rear automatic cli‐ 6. "Level" mate control can be locked. 7. Set the desired intensity. Activating/deactivating The air flow and air distribution are automatically 1. "CAR" regulated depending on the selected intensity. 2. "Settings" The selected intensity is shown on the climate control display. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation" Air flow, manual 5. "Second row of seats" 6. "Disable controller" Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. Ambient air package
General information Concept To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean program first. and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐ grances. Adjusting Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐ Press the lower or upper side of the pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐ button: decrease or increase air flow. grance, ionization contributes to well-being and relaxation while driving.
297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 298
CONTROLS Climate control
General information Switching on/off Two different fragrances can be selected in the 1. "CAR" vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible 2. "Settings" by replacing the fragrance cartridges. 3. "Climate control" The following criteria can influence the percep‐ 4. "Air quality" tion of scents in the car's interior: 5. "Ionization" ▷ Automatic climate control settings. ▷ Temperature and air humidity. Fragrancing ▷ Time of day and season. ▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, General information for instance fatigue. Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW a habituation effect. fragrance cartridges. Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not switching between the fragrances. suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty, The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. compartment. To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐ Safety information hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur prior to the trip. The system is automatically Warning switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐ grancing was switched on at the end of the last Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can trip. cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐ functions, and damage to the system. There is Functional requirements a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a ▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled. cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐ ▷ The interior temperature is be‐ grance cartridge. tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. ▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow out. Opening the Climate menu Press the button on the upper side. Selecting the fragrance The car's interior is fragranced depending on the The Climate comfort menu is displayed. selected fragrance. Individual settings can be entered for some of Two different fragrances can be selected in the the climate control functions. vehicle.
Ionization 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Concept 3. "Climate control" Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐ 4. "Fragrance" pended particles. 5. Select the desired fragrance.
298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 299
Climate control CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The cartridge holder slides down. rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off, adjusting intensity 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Fragrance"
5. "Level" 3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge. 6. Select the desired setting. Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the Highest intensity at Level 3. fragrance cartridge.
Display The illustrations on the Control Display show the actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Fragrance" 4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated, the fragrance cartridge. the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐ grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐ ing. When the fragrance cartridges are empty, a Check Control message is displayed once.
Inserting fragrance cartridges The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment. Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐ fer to page 315. 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 300
CONTROLS Climate control
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the The cartridge holder slides down. chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐ holder. sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance snaps lightly into place. indicated on the Control Display. Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐ grance indicated on the Control Display.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages. Make sure that no objects press against the cartridge holder from below, otherwise the 4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the function of the ambient air package could be holder. impacted. 8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment. Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐ fer to page 315. 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. Recycling Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken to a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for recycling.
300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 301
Climate control CONTROLS
Stationary climate control After the stationary climate control is switched off due to an insufficient state of charge, charge the high-voltage battery. The Concept stationary climate control is available again. Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's ▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐ perature. Switching on/off directly The system automatically cools, vents, or heats depending on the internal and external tempera‐ Concept ture. Snow and ice may be removed more easily. There are different ways to switch the system on or off. General information The system switches off automatically after ap‐ The stationary climate control can be switched prox. 30 minutes. on and off directly or via a preset departure time. The air automatically exits through the vents to Using the button the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the floor area. General information The system switches off automatically after a When the vehicle is in standby state, the system certain period of time. can be switched on or off via the automatic cli‐ If stationary climate control is used during the mate control buttons. charging process, less air conditioning capacity will be required while driving. This optimizes the Switching on range. Press any button except: ▷ Rear window defroster. Functional requirements ▷ Lower air flow button side. ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state ▷ Seat heating. and not in drive-ready state. ▷ Seat ventilation. ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged or the charging cable is connected. Switching off If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐ Press and hold the bottom button. charged, it can take some time after connect‐ ing the charging cable, until the stationary cli‐ mate control will be functional. The system switches off when the vehicle is ex‐ ited. ▷ Direct operation or departure time prese‐ lected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature. Via iDrive The system can be switched on or off via iDrive. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. 1. "CAR" ▷ To ensure the starting capability of the vehi‐ 2. "Settings" cle, the stationary climate control may be au‐ 3. "Climate control" tomatically switched off, for instance after re‐ peated switching on or due to an insufficient 4. "Preconditioning" state of charge of the high-voltage battery. 5. "Start now"
301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 302
CONTROLS Climate control
Via BMW display key ▷ Activate departure times. The system can be switched on or off via the A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between BMW display key. setting/activating the departure time and the planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐ Switching on riod of time for the climate control. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. Setting the departure time 2. "Preconditioning setting" Via iDrive 3. Tap on the symbol. 1. "CAR" 4. "Activate now" 2. "Settings" 5. "Start" 3. "Climate control"
Switching off 4. "Preconditioning" 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display 5. "Departure schedule" key. 6. Select the desired departure time. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 7. Set the departure time. 3. Tap on the symbol. 8. Select day of the week, if needed. 4. "Stop" Via BMW display key Display 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐ key. cates the system is switched on. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. Tap on the symbol. Climate control for departure 4. Select the desired departure time. time 5. Set the departure time. Concept 6. Select day of the week, if needed. 7. "OK" Different departure times can be set to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure. Activating the departure time
The activation time is automatically determined Functional requirement based on the temperature. If a departure time is to influence the switching Departure time with weekday: time and day of on of the stationary climate control, the respec‐ the week can be set. tive departure time must be activated first. On the desired weekdays, the system will be switched on promptly before the set departure Via iDrive time. 1. "CAR" Switch-off takes place automatically a few mi‐ 2. "Settings" nutes after the set departure time. 3. "Climate control" The departure time is preselected in two steps: 4. "Preconditioning" ▷ Set departure times.
302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 303
Climate control CONTROLS
5. Activate "Preconditioning for departure". 6. "Departure schedule" 7. Select the desired departure time. 8. Set the departure time. 9. Select day of the week, if needed. 10."Activate departure"
Via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. Tap on the symbol. 4. Tap on the symbol. Activate the desired departure time.
Display The symbol on the automatic climate control signals an activated departure time. symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐ cates the system is switched on.
Activating with BMW Connected app An appropriate BMW Connected app with re‐ mote function can be used to switch on the sys‐ tem either directly or via a preset departure time.
303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 304
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and Safety information options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control, It also describes features and functions that are such as the garage door, may result in injury, not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due for example, body parts becoming jammed in a to the selected options or country versions. This garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ damage to property. Make sure that the area of tems. When using these functions and systems, movement of the respective system is clear the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ during programming and operation. Also follow served. the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ mitter. Integrated Universal Remote Control Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging Concept or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally The integrated Universal Remote Control in the compatible with the integrated Universal Remote interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of Control. remote-controlled systems such as garage door Additional questions are answered by: drives, barriers, or lighting systems. ▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified General information service center or repair shop. The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex operate the remote control, the buttons on the Corporation. interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐ tions for the sake of security. If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐ mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐ sible operation.
304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 305
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming completed. Release the button. ▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for ▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ ▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐ gramming procedure. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless Programming systems. ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ General information onds: programming not completed. The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6. fully charged at the time of programming to en‐ To program other functions on other buttons, re‐ sure an optimal range of the integrated universal peat steps 3 to 5. remote control. 1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code 2. Initial setup: wireless system Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐ interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system. the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system. 3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system. away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second The required distance depends on the hand- person. held transmitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.
305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 306
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held the system: transmitter was detected but program‐ ming is not complete. 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ 2. Program the relevant button on the interior cedure three times to complete the pro‐ mirror as described. gramming procedure. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button If the integrated universal remote control on the system being programmed, e.g. at the remains nonoperational, continue with the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds special features for change code wireless for the next step. systems. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐ ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and onds: programming not completed. then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6. zation. Once synchronization is complete, the If the programming procedure is not completed, programmed function will be carried out. the previous programming will remain un‐ changed. Reprogramming individual buttons Operation 1. Switch on standby state. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be Warning programmed. The operation of remote-controlled systems 3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror with the integrated universal remote control, flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ such as the garage door, may result in injury, lease the button. for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system damage to property. Make sure that the area of to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm movement of the respective system is clear away from the buttons on the interior mirror. during programming and operation. Also follow The required distance depends on the hand- the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ held transmitter. mitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐ Canada: if programming with the hand-held erated using the button on the interior mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ while the drive-ready or standby state is terior mirror button and repeatedly press and switched on. To do this, hold down the button release the hand-held transmitter button for within receiving range of the system until the 2 seconds. function is activated. The interior mirror LED 6. The LED can light up in different ways. stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐ mitted. ▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ ming procedure is completed. Deleting stored functions Release the button. All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐ tions cannot be deleted individually. 306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 307
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ Ashtray terior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green rapidly. Front center console
Opening Sun visor 1. Press onto the cover.
Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out 1. Fold the sun visor down. 2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the 2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold side. the ashtray cover upward. 3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐ sor.
Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. Emptying 1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the cup holder.
307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 308
CONTROLS Interior equipment
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it. Front center console
3. Empty the container. Press onto the cover. Always empty the ashtray with the container open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning Contact with the hot heating element or the hot A cigarette lighter is located between the cup socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. holders in one of the marked positions. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. Rear center console There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the ciga‐ rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐ dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket. The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Operation Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be re‐ moved as soon as it pops back out.
308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 309
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Sockets Front center console
Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when standby and drive- ready state are switched on.
General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Press onto the cover. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during un‐ A socket is located between the cup holders in folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that one of the marked positions. devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding. Pull off the cover.
Rear center console NOTICE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt electrical system can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi‐ nals in the engine compartment.
A socket is located in the center console. NOTICE Pull off the cover. If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.
309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 310
CONTROLS Interior equipment
In the cargo area In the center console
NOTICE Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large USB connectors, may block or damage the cover when it is being opened or closed. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the cover is clear while opening and closing it.
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo area. Unfold the cover.
USB port
General information Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section Press onto the cover. on USB connections. Additional information: USB connections, refer to page 79.
In the center armrest
A USB port is located in the center console.
A USB port is located in the center armrest. Properties: ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. If the vehicle is equipped with thermo-cup hold‐ ers, a USB port is located in the center console.
Properties: 310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 311
Interior equipment CONTROLS
▷ USB port Type A. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data maintained in every direction when operating the transfer. device. ▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Wireless charging tray
Concept The wireless charging tray enables the following functions to be performed without cables:
▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐ Mounting position of the product. bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐ bile devices, which support the Qi standard. ▷ Charging the BMW Display key. Safety information ▷ Connect the mobile phone to the external an‐ tenna. Warning Depending on the country, this provides for When charging a device that meets the Qi better network reception and a consistent re‐ standard in the wireless charging tray, any production quality. metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage General information devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal When inserting the mobile phone, make sure transmission, between the device and the tray there are no objects between it and the wireless may impair the card function. There is a risk of charging tray. injury and risk of damage to property. When During charging, the surface of the tray and the charging mobile devices, make sure there are mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐ no objects between the device and the tray. peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐ lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐ NOTICE porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual. The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile The charge indicator shows on the Control phone into the tray can damage the tray or the Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐ mobile phone. There is a risk of damage to ity is being charged. property. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone NOTE into the tray. This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐ tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation. Overview Tray across in the center console:
311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 312
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Operation
Inserting the mobile phone The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐ mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm. 1. Open the tray cover. 2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray 1 LED with the display facing up. 2 Storage area 3. Close the tray cover.
Tray on the left in the center console: Removing the mobile phone 1. Open the tray cover. 2. Remove the mobile phone.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging. The blue LED stays illuminated once 1 LED the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐ 2 Storage area pability is fully charged. Orange The mobile phone is not charging. Functional requirements Temperature on the mobile phone ▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support possibly too high or foreign object in the required Qi standard. charging tray. If the mobile phone does not support the Qi Red The mobile phone is not charging. standard, the mobile phone can be charged Contact a dealer’s service center or using a special Qi-compatible charging case. another qualified service center or re‐ ▷ Standby state is switched on. pair shop. ▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the mobile phone. Forgotten warning ▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐ General information wise, the charging function may be impaired. If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten ▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in warning function, a warning can be output if a the center of the tray. mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐ cle.
312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 313
Interior equipment CONTROLS
The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐ ▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register ment cluster. their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number. Activating ▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐ 1. "CAR" bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.t- 2. "Settings" mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#). 3. "General settings" ▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http:// www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/ 4. "Wireless charging tray" register-signal-booster.html). 5. Activate reminder. ▷ AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐ System limits booster.com/). At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in ▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http:// the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc- phone may be limited and some functions may booster-registration.jsp). no longer work. Before use you must register your booster de‐ vice with your wireless provider. LTE-Compensator - Information If you should be requested by the FCC to cease and User Manual operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐ Your car is equipped with a wireless charging sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐ tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐ connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the vated by your local BMW dealer. best possible connection a signal booster (LTE- You must not remove the booster from the car Compensator) is used in conjunction with the nor use it with any other than the preinstalled WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this coupling device or antenna. Any modification of booster: the existing antenna or coupling device as well as This is a CONSUMER device. the use of other antennas or coupling devices BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐ will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐ VICE with your wireless provider and have your cense. provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐ The booster device fulfills the network protection sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐ standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐ ers may not consent to the use of this device on modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain their network. If you are unsure, contact your limits. provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐ Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive proved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at Model Number: LTECOMPB0 least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You Part Number: 6803145-01 MUST cease operating this device immediately if FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0 requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐ tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device. Please observe additionally the following infor‐ mation
313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 314
CONTROLS Interior equipment
BMW Travel & Comfort System
General information USB ports and fixtures for attaching special ac‐ cessories, for instance coat hangers, are located on the backrests of the front seats. Properties of the USB ports: ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ For charging of mobile devices. ▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview
The fixtures are located behind the marked cov‐ ers.
Installing special accessories 1. Slide the cover to the side.
2. Install the special accessories, refer to Instal‐ lation Instructions.
314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 315
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and Front passenger side glove options compartment
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Safety information cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Warning to the selected options or country versions. This Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, partment can be thrown into the car's interior the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ served. cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ Storage compartments ment immediately after using it.
General information Opening The vehicle interior contains multiple storage compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while Pull the handle. driving, for instance in the event of an accident, The light in the glove compartment switches on. braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Closing terior. Fold cover closed.
Locking NOTICE The glove compartment can be locked with an Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ integrated key. This prevents access to the glove age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to compartment. property. Do not use anti-slip pads. After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐ cle key can be handed over without the
315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 316
CONTROLS Storage compartments
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is Safety information parked by valet parking. Additional information: Warning Integrated key, refer to page 95. Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass Driver's side glove can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a compartment risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Safety information Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.
Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes Storage compartment in in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior the center console while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is Opening a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ ment immediately after using it.
Opening
Press onto the cover.
Closing Pull the cover on the handle bar back. Pull the handle.
Closing Storage compartment in Fold cover closed. the rear center console
The back of the center console contains one or Compartments in the doors two storage compartments.
General information There are storage compartments in the doors.
316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 317
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Center armrest, front Opening
General information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up, arrow 2.
Closing Press cover down until it engages.
Press the button. Front cup holder Closing Safety information Press cover down until it engages.
Warning Rear center armrest Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about General information the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled A storage compartment is located in the center liquids can distract from the traffic conditions armrest between the seats. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a Folding down risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐ weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.
Fold the center armrest forward.
317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 318
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening NOTICE When the thermo-cup holder is switched on and the cover is closed, the thermo-cup holder can overheat. There is a risk of damage to property. Switch the thermo-cup holder off be‐ fore closing the cover.
NOTICE Press onto the cover. Temperature sensitive items may be damaged by the hot metal insert of the thermo-cup holder. There is a risk of damage to property. Use suitable containers only.
Switching on Press the button for keeping cool or warm once each.
▷ Blue LED lights up: keep drinks cool. Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ ▷ Red LED lights up: keep drinks warm. sole. Switching off Closing Press the button repeatedly until the Pull the cover on the handle bar back. LEDs go out.
Maintaining the drink temperature Rear cup holder
General information Safety information When equipped with thermo-cup holder, drinks can be kept cool or warm. Warning Safety information Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an Warning evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled Contact with the hot metal insert of the liquids can distract from the traffic conditions thermo-cup holder can cause burn injuries. and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a insert when the thermo-cup holder is switched risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do on. not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 319
Storage compartments CONTROLS
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Clothes hooks Do not transport hot beverages. General information NOTICE The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear. With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers be‐ Safety information fore the center armrest is folded up. Warning Second row of seats Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐ struct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles General information from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐ not obstruct the driver's view. ent container sizes.
Opening Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐ weight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.
Fold the center armrest forward. Press the button and fold out the cup holder fully.
Reducing the size To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded in in 2 steps.
Enlarging To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again fully.
Closing Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
319 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 320
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Vehicle features and Warning options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit It also describes features and functions that are and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due secure objects and cargo properly. to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area. Loading
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight Warning of occupants and cargo should never exceed High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. age them internally and cause a sudden drop in 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐ may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐ hicle. bility, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available mitted gross weight. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐ Warning sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage driving, for instance in the event of an accident, and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of weight may not safely exceed the available injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ Step 4. terior. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
320 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 321
Cargo area CONTROLS
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how Lashing eyes in the cargo this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. area
Load General information Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for securing cargo. ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. The front lashing eyes are located under covers. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐ Multi-function hook sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear General information seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer A multi-function hook is located on the left and safety belts in the opposite buckle. right side in the cargo area. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow large cargo. Safety information ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. Warning ▷ Use the cargo area partition net to protect oc‐ Improper use of the multi-function hooks can cupants. Make sure that objects cannot pen‐ lead to a risk of objects flying about during etrate the cargo area partition net. braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. ▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. property. Only hang lightweight objects, ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo such as shopping bags, from the multi-function straps. hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
321 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 322
CONTROLS Cargo area
Folding down Storage compartment under the cargo floor panel
General information There is a storage compartment under the cargo floor panel.
Opening
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it engages.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the right side. Fold up the cargo floor panel. Storage compartment on the left side Closing Push the cargo floor panel downward. General information A storage compartment is located on the left Enlarging the cargo area side in the cargo area. Concept Opening The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests.
General information The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear or from the cargo area. Depending on the equipment version, the rear seat backrests can be folded down either man‐ ually or electrically.
Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover, arrow 2.
322 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 323
Cargo area CONTROLS
Safety information NOTICE
Warning Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐ Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐ age to property. Make sure that the area of rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage movement of the rear backrest including head to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ restraint is clear when folding down. ment of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down. Manual reclining of the backrest
Warning From the rear If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ ward. ment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely From the cargo area against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them.
Warning Once the rear seat backrest has been folded Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to down, the locking bracket protrudes into the release the rear seat backrest. car's interior. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ ▷ Left lever: fold down the left and middle rear erty. When the rear seat backrest is folded seat backrest. down, pay attention to the protruding locking ▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat bracket and keep this area unobstructed. backrest.
323 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 324
CONTROLS Cargo area
Folding back the backrest Return the rear seat backrest to the seat position Warning and engage it. The red marking behind the lever An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be disappears completely. thrown about the car's interior, such as in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive ma‐ Folding down the center section neuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam‐ age to property. Make sure the cargo cover is securely engaged in the brackets.
Closing
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the strap.
Cargo cover Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both sides into the brackets, arrow 2. Safety information Removing Warning The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐ Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ gage. tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior.
Warning Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2. body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let the cargo cover snap back into place. Stowing 1. Open the storage compartment on the left side.
324 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 325
Cargo area CONTROLS
Storage compartment on the left side, refer to page 322. 2. Fold up the cargo floor panel. 3. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it on the right side.
4. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐ age compartment on the left side.
Installing Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets. Make sure that the cover audibly engages on both sides.
325 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 326
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle options drive General information This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. The tachometer is available in the SPORT drive It also describes features and functions that are mode or in the M/S Sport program. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Do not exceed the maximum engine and road tems. When using these functions and systems, speed: the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and served. 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐ Breaking-in period ces. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km General information The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be Moving parts need to begin working together increased. smoothly. The following instructions will help you to ach‐ Tires ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in Safety information time. Drive conservatively for the first Warning 200 miles/300 km. Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ Brake system lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ Drive moderately during this break-in period. serve the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components. Following part replacement Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced.
326 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 327
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Driving on poor roads After a trip on poor roads After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires Concept for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear heavy soiling from the body. Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐ hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and qualities. General driving notes All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐ mentum. Closing the tailgate
Safety information Safety information
NOTICE Warning Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐ a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of unpaved terrain. an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐ terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage When driving on poor roads to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open. For your own safety, for the safety of passengers and of the vehicle, heed the following points: ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before Driving with the tailgate open driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be ▷ Do not take risks when driving. avoided: ▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. surface, the slower the speed should be. ▷ Drive moderately. ▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near Hot exhaust gas system the MAX mark. ▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent Warning Control HDC. High temperatures can occur underneath the ▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐ body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas tact with the ground. system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐ gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐ injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐ hicle's load. tem, including the exhaust pipe. ▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dy‐ namic Traction Control if available. 327 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 328
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper Warning than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm. If combustible materials, such as leaves or ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐ speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. haust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not re‐ Safety information move the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no com‐ NOTICE bustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ parking. ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ ment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When Mobile communication devices driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐ in the vehicle mum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.
Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ Braking safely fluence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. General information There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking property. If possible, in the car's interior use System ABS as a standard feature. only mobile phones with direct connections to Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐ an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual quire such. interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the Hydroplaning hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brak‐ On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can ing System ABS is in its active mode. form between the tires and road surface. In certain braking situations, the perforated brake This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐ It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of tional noises have no effect on the performance contact between the tires and the road surface, and operational reliability of the brake. ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Objects in the area around the pedals Driving through water Warning General information Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the When driving through water, follow the following: pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. ▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the ▷ Drive through calm water only. vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
328 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 329
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be Safety information safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Warning Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to curely fastened again after they were removed, high temperatures, brakes wearing out and for instance for cleaning. possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Pedal feel when driving off After turning on the drive-ready state from the idle state, the pedal may feel unusual, short Warning pedal distance. After the brake pedal has been In idle state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or fully released, the pedal will feel as usual again. with drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele‐ vant functions, for instance engine braking ef‐ Driving in wet conditions fect, braking force boost, and steering assis‐ When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐ tance, are restricted or not available at all. tly press the brake pedal every few miles. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle Ensure that this action does not endanger other state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or with traffic. drive-ready state switched off. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against Brake disc corrosion corrosion. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination In this way braking efficiency will be available on the brake pads are increased by the following when you need it. circumstances: ▷ Low mileage. Hills ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not General information used at all. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐ agents. ciency. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a You can increase the engine's braking effect by pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if generally this cannot be corrected. needed. Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con‐ densation water develops and collects under‐ neath the vehicle.
329 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 330
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Roof-mounted luggage ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. rack ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. General information ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening Installation only possible with roof rack. path of the tailgate. Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners Safety information gently.
Warning Driving on racetracks When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Warning of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of or motor sport type competition. There is a risk damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport Dynamic Stability Control when driving with or motor sport type competitions. roof load. Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This Mounting wear is not covered by the warranty. Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐ tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐ roof. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
330 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 331
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and Loading options Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the cargo area. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Stow the load as low and close to the trailer axle cific and optional features offered with the series. as possible. A low center of gravity in the trailer It also describes features and functions that are increases the driving safety of the entire vehicle- not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due trailer combination. to the selected options or country versions. This Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer tems. When using these functions and systems, load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ each case. served. Tire inflation pressure General information Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle and trailer. The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, drawbar For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for node weights, and the permissible gross vehicle higher loads applies. weight are specified in the technical data. For the trailer, the specifications of the manufac‐ The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐ turer apply. pension system on the rear axle and, depending Additional information: on the vehicle type, with a more powerful cooling Tire inflation pressure specifications, refer to system. page 355. When the trailer power socket is in use, the vehi‐ cle will be raised or lowered to the normal level Flat Tire Monitor FTM automatically. The adjustment to the normal level After correcting the tire inflation pressure or can occur when the trailer power socket is plug‐ hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the Flat Tire ged in or when driving off. Monitor. Additional information: Before driving Run-flat tires, refer to page 376.
Drawbar nose weight Tire pressure monitor The maximum load of the towing vehicle is low‐ After correcting the tire inflation pressure or ered by the weight of the trailer hitch and the hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire Pres‐ drawbar nose weight. The drawbar nose weight sure Monitor. increases the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the Additional information: approved gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 369. hicle.
331 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 332
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Exterior mirrors Safety information Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see both rear corners of the trailer, are available as Warning special accessories from a dealer’s service cen‐ Depending on the design and loading of trail‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair ers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐ shop. ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop‐ Power consumption erty. General information Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer. Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐ Before starting to drive, check the function of the ply necessary steering corrections as carefully trailer tail lights. as possible. Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐ tems/power consumers short when towing a camper to save the vehicle battery power. Warning The tire inflation pressure must be adjusted to Trailer tail lights the increased axle load in trailer towing. Driving ▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per side. with too low tire inflation pressure can damage ▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total. the tires. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total. of damage to property. Do not exceed a speed of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase the tire inflation pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note Towing a trailer the maximum possible tire inflation pressure in‐ dicated on the tire. General information If the trailer socket is occupied, some driver as‐ Uphill grades sistance systems are unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A Check Control message is dis‐ General information played where applicable. In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers is trailer socket not occupied, some driver assis‐ permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %. tance systems may have functional limitations or If higher trailer loads are approved at a later point may malfunction. in time, the gradient limit is 8 %. To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing. When the trailer socket is occupied or trailer tow‐ Starting on uphill grades ing is activated, some driver assistance systems The parking brake is automatically released are unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A when the accelerator pedal is activated. Check Control message is displayed where ap‐ In order to prevent rolling back during starting, plicable. use the parking brake. Additional information: Activating trailer towing, refer to page 333. 1. Pull and release switch before starting off.
332 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 333
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
The parking brake is set. ▷ When the power consumption of a trailer is 2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to too low, for instance due to tail lights in LED drive off. technology, to be detected by the system.
Hills Activating trailer towing A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency to swing more readily on hills. Concept Manually shift down to the next-lowest gear be‐ fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly. When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance systems may have functional limitations or may Trailer stabilization control malfunction. To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing.
Concept Activating This system supports the driver in stopping the 1. "CAR" swinging of a trailer. 2. "Settings" The trailer stabilization control detects swinging and automatically brakes the vehicle quickly to 3. "General settings" leave the critical speed range and stabilize the 4. "Trailer mode" vehicle-trailer combination. 5. "Trailer mode" General information If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer Mount for trailer hitch has not been hitched, the system can become active in certain driving situations, such as when General information using a bicycle rack with lighting.
Functional requirement The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is being towed and the trailer power socket is in use.
System limits The system cannot intervene or not intervene in time in the following situations, for instance: The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the ▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance on rear of the vehicle. slippery roads or loose surfaces. Information on suitable trailer hitches is found on ▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts, be‐ the underside of the mount, see arrow. fore swinging is detected. Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ page 411. vated or has malfunctioned.
333 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 334
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Safety information Fittings for trailer safety chain
Warning During driving operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system. Contact with the hot components can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot com‐ ponents. Do not perform work in the vicinity of hot components until after they have cooled down. There are two fittings on the mount for the trailer hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
Removing the cover Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for increased safety when driving with a trailer. Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a Brake Controller installed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center Pull the cover out of the back of the mount, and or repair shop. stow it in the vehicle. Information on installing a Brake Controller can be obtained from a dealer's service center or an‐ Trailer connector other qualified service center or repair shop.
The socket is located to the left of the mount for the trailer hitch.
334 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 335
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass options sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Tires to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption. served. Check the tire inflation pressure Reducing fuel consumption regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start‐ General information ing on a long trip. The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and ues. tire wear. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Observe the correct tire inflation pressure as well ferent factors. as the ECO tire inflation pressure, where applica‐ Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ble. ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ Additional information: fluence fuel consumption and the environmental Tire inflation pressure specifications, refer to impact. page 355. Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away without delay Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right Remove attached parts following away, but at moderate engine speeds. use This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐ Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear gine up to operating temperature. luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ lowing use. Look well ahead when driving Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel namics and increase the fuel consumption. consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
335 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 336
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle Have maintenance carried out driving ahead of you. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW Avoid high engine speeds recommends that maintenance work be per‐ Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ formed by a BMW service center. sumption and reduces wear. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐ If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ tem. cator.
Use coasting conditions Using the hybrid system When approaching a red light, take your foot off efficiently the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ Concept ator and let the vehicle roll. The vehicle's hybrid system runs automatically. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Through foresighted driving, the hybrid proper‐ The high-voltage battery is charged. ties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption and energy recovery are optimized. Charge regularly Charge the vehicle as often as possible at a Optimizing energy recovery charging facility. This will further reduce fuel con‐ sumption due to the use of electrical energy. Types of energy recovery Energy recovery is used to charge the high-volt‐ Switch off the engine during age battery. Energy recovery is important for the longer stops supply of electrical components and thus a pre‐ requisite for fuel efficiency. Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in Energy recovery appears in three stages during traffic congestion. coasting and braking: ▷ Low energy recovery: while coasting to a halt Switch off any functions that are without stepping on the brake. not currently needed ▷ Average energy recovery: while decelerating slightly by gently pressing the brake pedal. Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ Maximum energy recovery: when pressing crease fuel consumption, especially in city and the brake pedal somewhat more firmly pro‐ stop-and-go traffic. vided that the pointer remains in the middle area of the CHARGE indicator in the instru‐ Switch off these functions if they are not needed. ment cluster. The ECO PRO and ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL With adaptive recuperation, the system decides drive modes support the energy-conserving use the strength of the energy recovery based on the of comfort functions. In HYBRID ECO PRO, the situation while coasting. comfort functions are automatically deactivated, either fully or partially. In ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL drive mode, deactivation of comfort functions must be set first.
336 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 337
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Optimum energy recovery ▷ Set the properties of the hybrid system to Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with ELECTRIC or ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL using optimizing energy recovery. Driving Dynamics Control. As soon as the display shows the maximum en‐ Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. ergy recovery, only press the brake pedal harder ▷ Follow the indicators for electric driving in the if required by the situation. instrument cluster. Further information: elec‐ tric driving: ELECTRIC and ELECTRIC INDI‐ Exemplary traffic situations for fuel VIDUAL. efficiency Displays of the hybrid system, refer to In many driving situations, the hybrid system al‐ page 160. lows for a particularly efficient energy manage‐ ment. Using the navigation system ▷ Stop-and-go traffic: regularly The combustion engine is switched on or Use the navigation system also for familiar and over automatically by the hybrid system. regularly traveled routes. When the navigation system destination guidance is active, the hybrid ▷ Driving with constant speed: system uses the existing navigation data. The The electric motor relieves the combustion upcoming course of the road is analyzed. Hybrid engine periodically by also being switched on. operation adapts to the specific route sections. The function may be restricted if the navigation Optimizing fuel consumption data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ ample. Charging the vehicle regularly Charge the vehicle regularly and completely us‐ ing a suitable charging device. This will reduce Drive modes for optimizing fuel consumption due to the use of electrical en‐ consumption ergy. Longer idle periods can reduce the charge state Concept of the high-voltage battery. The HYBRID ECO PRO and ELECTRIC INDI‐ Using the stationary climate control VIDUAL drive modes support a fuel-efficient driv‐ regularly ing style. For this purpose, comfort features such as the climate control output and, where Run advance climate control in the vehicle during applicable, the engine control are adjusted. In charging before driving off. This optimizes the ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL drive mode, deactivation range. of comfort functions must be set first. Stationary climate control, refer to page 301. Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ cally decoupled from the transmission in the Avoiding the use of the combustion D selector lever position and the engine is engine switched off. The D selector lever position re‐ Follow the following information to avoid using mains engaged. the combustion engine: In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO PRO tips, can be displayed in HYBRID ECO PRO
337 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 338
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
drive mode to assist with a fuel-efficient driving Configuring ELECTRIC style. INDIVIDUAL
General information Via the Driving Dynamics Control The system includes the following 1. Activate ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL. EfficientDynamics functions and 2. "Configure ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" EfficientDynamics displays: ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control. Via iDrive ▷ ECO PRO climate control. 1. "CAR" ▷ ECO PRO light and sight. 2. "Settings" ▷ HYBRID ECO PRO: Driving style analysis. 3. "Driving mode" Overview 4. "ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" 5. "Configure ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO functions The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ vated/deactivated: HYBRID button ▷ "ECO PRO seat heating" ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ELECTRIC button ▷ "ECO PRO light and sight" Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. Activating HYBRID ECO PRO ECO PRO seat climate control 1. Press the button. The output of seat heating and, where applica‐ 2. "HYBRID" ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ELECTRIC 3. "ECO PRO" INDIVIDUAL is activated.
Activating ELECTRIC ECO PRO climate control INDIVIDUAL Climate control is set to be efficient. This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from 1. Press the button. the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's 2. "ELECTRIC" interior more slowly, to economize on consump‐ 3. "INDIVIDUAL" tion.
338 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 339
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
ECO PRO light and sight System limits The output of exterior mirror heating and rear ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, window defroster is reduced. outdated or not available. ▷ With country-specific restrictions on map Resetting the settings based route sections. Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard ▷ With temporary and variable speed limits, settings: such as in construction areas. "Reset" ▷ While Active Cruise Control is active. ▷ With defective, dirty or covered sensors. Adaptive recuperation HYBRID ECO PRO: Driving Concept style analysis The adaptive recuperation supports an adaptive and comfort oriented driving style. Map data and various sensors analyze the current driving situa‐ Concept tion, such as the distance to the vehicle in front. The function helps develop an especially effi‐ cient driving style and to conserve fuel. General information For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The system decides based on the situation if and The assessment is done in various categories how much the energy is recovered through recu‐ and is displayed on the Control Display. peration or if the vehicle coasts. Depending on This display will help you adjust your driving style the strength of the recuperation, the vehicle is and save some fuel. decelerated differently while coasting. General information Functional requirements The current trip is assessed. The system active under the following condi‐ To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO tions: PRO tips are displayed during driving. ▷ Brake pedal not depressed. The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐ ▷ Accelerator pedal not operated. justing your driving style. ▷ Adaptive recuperation is activated ▷ SPORT drive mode is not activated. Functional requirement ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated. The function is available in HYBRID ECO PRO drive mode. Activating/deactivating Calling up the Driving style 1. "CAR" analysis 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "General settings" 2. "Driving information" 4. "Energy recovery" 3. "Driving style analysis" 5. "Adaptive recuperation"
339 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 340
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Display on the Control Display The display of the Driving style analysis shows the efficiency of the Driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the more bars are displayed in color. In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐ played with an inefficient driving style.
340 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 341
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
341 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 342
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts. options For optimal use of the energy from the power mains, charging at a charging station, for in‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ stance BMW Wallbox, is recommended. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are Charge current not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This General information also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, The charge current strength is indicated in am‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ peres. served. The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐ imum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a household Charging the vehicle, socket or charging station. General Level 1 charging Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own Concept household socket, or at other household sock‐ The vehicle can be charged using various charg‐ ets, the permitted charge current strength must ing cables at charging stations or household be determined by a qualified electrician, for ex‐ sockets. ample. Control and monitoring of the charging process The charge current strength for Level 1 charging are handled completely automatically. The can be adjusted in the vehicle in ampere. charge current strength can be set via iDrive. At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charg‐ ing is set to the lowest level. General information Depending on the country-specific version, one of several ampere ratings is printed on the High-voltage battery Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the The high-voltage battery is used as an energy limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be the charge current is set to the highest level. De‐ charged by energy recovery during the trip or via pending on the charge current, the charge cur‐ the power grid. rent strength may vary when lower levels are set. In order to operate the high-voltage battery opti‐ mally, charge the vehicle regularly and fully using Set current limit a compatible charger. The current limit for charging via the When charging via the power grid, you can chose Level 1 charging cable can be set. between the following variants: Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle ▷ Household socket. must be charged with a different charge current ▷ Level 2 charging station.
342 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 343
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
strength. By default, the current limit of the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends charge current is set to the lowest level. that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐ tion, you have the compatibility of the following 1. "CAR" components confirmed: 2. "Plan charge/climate" ▷ Charging cable. 3. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ Charging station. 4. "Settings" ▷ Household socket and connected circuits. 5. "AC settings" 6. "Current limit" 7. Select the desired setting. Warning Settings are stored. When you change charging Damaged or worn charging devices, for in‐ locations you also might need to change the set‐ stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a ting for charging. risk of fire. Only use charging devices that are in good condition. Set the charge current strength at other house‐ hold sockets to the lowest level. Depending on the charge current setting, the Warning charging duration changes. Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a Maintaining the charge state risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from easily flammable materials is not maintained. If it is necessary to conserve the electrical range There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to for a later time during the trip, for example, BAT‐ property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and TERY CONTROL can be used to maintain or in‐ charge it simultaneously. crease the current charge state of the high-volt‐ age battery.
Safety information Warning Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. High voltage is present at the Warning charging connection. There is a risk of injury or Improper working with electrical current can danger to life. lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to that work on the charging connection, for in‐ life. Observe the general safety regulations stance cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s when working with electrical current. service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop.
Warning A faulty and incorrectly designed charging de‐ vice at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.
343 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 344
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
Charging cable Charging at household socket connections is performed with alternating current. When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the effi‐ General information ciency values may differ from those stated on the Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging energy label. cable or the permanently installed charging cable of a charging station to charge the vehicle. Level 2 charging cable Different charging cables can be required de‐ Depending on the country version, the vehicle is pending on the country. supplied with a Level 2 charging cable. The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to Safety information quickly recharge at sockets of designated Level 2 charging stations using a special connec‐ Warning tor. Charging is performed with alternating cur‐ rent at designated Level 2 charging stations. The Non-compatible charging cables or unsuitable charging process can be completed faster than charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐ at household sockets. age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use charging cables or charging stations for charg‐ A charge current strength of up to maxi‐ ing that are suitable for the respective vehicle mum 16 A is possible. type. The charging cable may be permanently installed A dealer's service center will be glad to provide at the charging station. information about suitable charging cables. Storage For the delivery, the charging cable is stowed in Warning the luggage compartment, for instance under the Improper use of the charging cable can prevent cargo floor panel or in a bag. charging and lead to damage, for instance ca‐ Stow charging cable after use in the same place ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging again. cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not If the charging cable is stowed in a bag, fasten extend it using cables or adapters. the bag at an open lashing point in the luggage compartment.
Warning Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables only.
Level 1 charging cable Depending on the country version, the vehicle is Depending on the national-market version, the supplied with a Mode 2 charging cable. charging cable is located under the cargo floor Level 1 charging cables can be used to charge panel. the vehicle from grounded household sockets.
344 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 345
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
If required, store the charging cable with the in‐ 3. Insert the appropriate charging cable connec‐ stalled connector cover to prevent moisture in tor, and push it in until it engages. the charging cable plug. Removing Connecting General information Charging socket flap When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable. If necessary, clean the area between the charg‐ ing socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.
Disconnecting a charging cable 1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key if it is locked. The charging socket flap is located on the left Charging cable is unlocked. side of the vehicle. 2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐ Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐ row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the structed. gripping areas. Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.
Connecting a charging cable To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐ cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. To open the charging socket flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The charging socket 3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐ flap opens. ing socket, arrow 2. 4. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐ gages. 5. Attach cover of the charging cable connector, if needed. 6. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging station as appli‐ cable. 2. Connect the Level 1 charging cable to the 7. Stow the charging cable. household socket or the Level 2 charging ca‐ ble to the port on the charging station.
345 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 346
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
At a charging station, insert the permanently grade. The charging procedure may not continue installed charging cable in the place provided automatically after the successful installation. for it. Safety information Performing emergency release The charging cable is locked when the vehicle is Warning locked and during the charging process. Improper use of the power mains connection In case of an electrical malfunction, the charging can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. cable can be manually unlocked. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to 1. Opening the hood. property. Use the charging cable only for charg‐ ing the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca‐ 2. Release the button from the holder. bles or adapters. 3. Pull the knob. The charging cable is manually unlocked. Warning If the charge current strength is adjusted incor‐ rectly, the power mains of the household socket can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level.
4. Remove charging cable. Detach, refer to page 345. Warning Have the locking system of the charging socket An incorrectly connected charging cable can checked at the dealer’s service center or another lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is qualified service center or repair shop after emer‐ a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. gency unlocking of the charging cable. Make sure that the charging cable connector is completely inserted in the charging socket. Charging process Starting the charging process General information 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the parking brake, if needed. At high or low outside temperatures, preheating/ 2. Planning the charging process. precooling of the high-voltage battery may cause longer charging times. For planning the charging process, refer to page 347. If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐ 3. Switch off drive-ready state. rupt the charging process. Charging will resume 4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the automatically. household socket or Level 2 charging cable A charging procedure is canceled or not started to the port on the charging station. due to the installation of a Remote Software Up‐
346 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 347
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
5. Open the charging socket flap. To check the charging state, press the but‐ 6. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle. ton on the vehicle key. The charging status is in‐ dicated on the indicator light. In some cases the Connecting the charging cable, refer to vehicle is locked. page 345. Additional messages about the charging status 7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐ Charging status display nected app on a smartphone.
Indicator light at the charging Planning the charging process socket The charging status for charging with a charging General information cable is indicated on the charging socket indica‐ The charging process can be adapted to con‐ tor light. straints, such as the cost of electricity, available power sources, or a low ambient temperature. The vehicle controls the charging process in such a way that the charging process is com‐ pleted if possible at the departure time. A depar‐ ture time must be set for this purpose. The following functions are available: ▷ Immediate charging. ▷ Charging in the time frame. ▷ Intelligent charging. Charging status If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via iDrive. Settings for the stationary cli‐ Light Charging status mate control and charging process are also ac‐ cepted for planned departure times. White Charging cable can be con‐ nected or removed. Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next charging process. Flashes yel‐ Charging process is being pre‐ low pared. 1. Switch off drive-ready state. 2. "Charge immediately once" Blue Charging process paused. Additional information: Flashes blue Charging process is active. Departure time, refer to page 350. Flashes red Fault in the charging process. Setting the charging mode Green Charging process is completed. 1. "CAR"
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light 2. "Plan charge/climate" goes out after some time. 3. "Charging mode:" When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indicator 4. Select the desired settings: light flashes continuously. The other indicator lights go out after some time.
347 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 348
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
▷ "Charge immediately": the charging proc‐ so the vehicle can be as fully charged as possible ess starts as soon as the charging cable is and, if applicable, its climate adjusted by the de‐ connected. parture time. ▷ "Charging in time slot": if a departure time If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can is set, a time window for charging with a be made via iDrive. favorable electricity rate can be set. The set time window can be ignored for the next ▷ "Intelligent charging": intelligent charging charging process: "Charge immediately once" can adapt the charging process dynami‐ cally via the Internet to the environmental Intelligent charging conditions. Concept Charging in the time frame Intelligent charging can adapt the charging proc‐ ess dynamically via the Internet to the environ‐ General information mental conditions, such as the availability of solar During the charging process, a time window for power or time-variable electricity rates. Intelligent charging with a favorable electricity rate can be charging is part of BMW's Digital Charging Serv‐ set. ice. To set a time window for favorable charging, a Further information about the Digital Charging departure time must be set. Service is available on the Internet: If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can https://charging.bmwgroup.com be made via iDrive. General information Setting the time window for favorable-rate Intelligent charging does not display an end of If a departure time is set, a time window for charge time in the instrument cluster. charging with a favorable electricity rate can be If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can set. be made via iDrive. 1. "CAR" Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next 2. "Plan charge/climate" charging process. 3. Move the Controller to the right. 1. Switch off drive-ready state. 4. "Settings" 2. "Charge immediately once" 5. "AC settings" Functional requirements 6. "Charging time slot" ▷ Account on the BMW charging portal. 7. Select the desired setting: ▷ A subscription to the intelligent charging ▷ "From:": set rate start. service has been obtained. ▷ "Until:": set rate end. ▷ Suitable Wallbox. Intelligent charging enables the time window to ▷ Departure time set. be set automatically for current locations. ▷ Charge current strength setting to highest The vehicle can also start the charging process level. before the selected time window begins or end it after the selected time window finishes. The starting point of the charging process is adjusted
348 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 349
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
Configuring the BMW charging service Information regarding the charging process is Use one of the following to configure the shown on the charging screen. BMW charging service: Display Meaning ▷ BMW remote app on the smartphone. Blue connector: charging process ▷ BMW charging portal in the Internet. active or completed. White connector: charging process Stopping the charging process interrupted. The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and contin‐ End of charging time. ued at a later time by connecting the charging Set departure time. cable. This enables other consumers to use the power connection or prevents simultaneous high Charging progress bar. power from multiple consumers, for example. Additional information: Indicator in blue: charged electrical Detach, refer to page 345. range.
Continuing the charging process Display in white: actual maximum If the charging process is interrupted, for in‐ available electric range with fully stance through a temporary power failure, the charged high-voltage battery. charging process is automatically continued after Departure time set. the interruption.
Terminating the charging Climate control activated at depar‐ process ture time. 1. Remove the charging cable from the vehicle. Flashing: ventilation active. Detach, refer to page 345. 2. Stow the charging cable as required. 3. Press on the charging socket flap until it en‐ Flashing: heating active. gages. 4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. Flashing: cooling active.
Displays in the instrument cluster Additional information: Charging screen, refer to page 159. The charge state indicator light shows the charge state of the high-voltage battery in the in‐ strument cluster, if standby state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged. Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system is still under high voltage.
349 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 350
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
Departure time Activating the departure time 1. "CAR" Concept 2. "Plan charge/climate" For optimum range and climate control, the de‐ 3. Move the Controller to the right. parture time can be set before parking the vehi‐ 4. "Departure schedule" cle. 5. Select the desired departure time. General information 6. "Activate departure" Up to three regular departure times or a one- With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre‐ time departure time can be activated. heated or precooled if climate control is set. The set departure time will be deactivated, if the The following settings are possible for departure departure time was ignored three times in a row. time: ▷ Climate control for departure time. ▷ Scheduling of up to three regular departure Climate control times. ▷ Planning a one-time departure time. General information If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can The following settings for vehicle air conditioning be made via iDrive. Settings for climate control are possible: and charging process are also applied for sched‐ ▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐ uled departure times. ately. Climate control for departure The range is reduced if stationary climate control is activated without a charging cable time connected. 1. "CAR" ▷ Planned climate control at the set departure 2. "Plan charge/climate" time. 3. Move the Controller to the right. Additional information: 4. "Precond. for depart." Stationary climate control, refer to page 301.
Setting the departure time 1. "CAR" Discharged high-voltage 2. "Plan charge/climate" and vehicle battery 3. Move the Controller to the right. 4. "Departure schedule" General information 5. Select the desired departure time. In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehi‐ cle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐ 6. Set the time and weekday. quired for operation of the onboard electronics. Up to three regular departure times and a one- If the high-voltage battery is discharged and the time departure time can be set. combustion engine is started, air conditioning may be limited.
350 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 351
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation of the vehicle is possible.
Starting the vehicle If the vehicle battery is discharged, the combus‐ tion engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Additional information: Jump-starting, refer to page 405.
351 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 352
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and Safety information options Warning This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Simultaneous charging and refueling poses a cific and optional features offered with the series. risk of fire if a sufficient safety distance from It also describes features and functions that are easily flammable materials is not maintained. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to to the selected options or country versions. This property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ charge it simultaneously. tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. NOTICE With a driving range of less than Follow the following when 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ refueling sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly. General information Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel‐ ing. NOTICE To also ensure all engine functions under unfav‐ Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the orable conditions, for instance steep vehicle incli‐ fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted nations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel should be surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. refueled. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling. When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. Tank vent ▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks Concept off the first time. The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐ The fuel tank is designed for special require‐ ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning ments that arise from hybrid operation of the ve‐ light may light up. hicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion en‐ Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐ gine or electric motor. tion. Additional information: Fuel quality, refer to page 387.
352 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 353
Refueling MOBILITY
General information 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. Excess pressure may build up in the fuel tank as a result of gasoline vapors; this pressure is dissi‐ pated before the fuel cap is opened.
Overview
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
The button is located in the storage compart‐ ment of the driver's door.
Venting the tank 1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Press the button to start the pressure 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to equalization. the fuel filler flap. The tank venting status is displayed in the in‐ strument cluster. In rare cases, tank venting can last several minutes. When tank venting has finished, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for opening. 3. Open the fuel filler flap. If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank venting, press the button again. Additional information: If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler Tank ventilation system, refer to page 352. flap even after pressing the button again, un‐ lock the fuel filler flap manually. Closing Emergency unlocking, refer to page 354.
Warning Fuel cap The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ Opening not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Before opening, vent the tank.
353 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 354
MOBILITY Refueling
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐ lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault. The release is located in the cargo area.
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover, arrow 2.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐ bol. This silently releases the fuel filler flap. 3. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. 4. Carefully open the fuel cap. Excess pressure can build up in the fuel tank from gasoline va‐ por. 5. Refuel the vehicle as usual. The excess pres‐ sure in the tank may make refueling difficult, for instance the fuel pump nozzle may shut off frequently. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a deal‐ er's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
354 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 355
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure options specifications In the tire inflation pressure table This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to It also describes features and functions that are page 355, contains all tire inflation pressure not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due specifications for the specified tire sizes at the to the selected options or country versions. This ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, served. please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. On the Control Display General information The current tire inflation pressure values and the The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure intended tire inflation pressure values for the influence the following: mounted tires can be displayed on the Control ▷ The service life of the tires. Display. ▷ Road safety. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the ▷ Driving comfort. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must have been set for the mounted tires. ▷ Fuel consumption. The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ Safety information cated on each tire. The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ cated in the lower area of the Control Display. Warning A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure Checking the tire inflation may heat up significantly and sustain damage. pressure This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking re‐ General information sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ pressure increases with the tire temperature. fore a long trip. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐ tion pressure. The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
355 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 356
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Checking using tire inflation The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied pressure specifications in the tire automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐ inflation pressure table tings have been made. 1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ levels for the mounted tires. sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. Tire inflation pressures up to 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual 100 mph/160 km/h tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐ tended tire inflation pressure. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed ues in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust onto the tire valves. as necessary. The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ bient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: ▷ A driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded. ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip. These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door Checking using the tire inflation pillar. pressure specifications on the Control Display Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐ sure levels deviate from the intended tire pressure value. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐ tended tire inflation pressure.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure With runflat tires: Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. With Tire Pressure Monitor:
356 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 357
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Tire inflation pressure values up Tire inflation pressures at max. to 100 mph/160 km/h speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
X5 xDrive45e Warning
Tire size Pressure specifications In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess in bar/PSI of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐ Specifications in ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant bar/PSI with cold table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire tires damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ 265/50 R 19 110 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42 mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in H XL A/S the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as nec‐ 275/45 R 20 110 essary. H XL A/S 265/50 R 19 110 Tire inflation pressure values H XL M+S over 100 mph/160 km/h 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S X5 xDrive45e Front: 275/45 R 2.6 / 38 - Without high-speed tuning feature 20 110 Y XL Tire size Pressure specifications Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.8 / 41 in bar/PSI 112 Y XL Specifications in Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 - bar/PSI with cold 21 107 Y XL tires Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.0 / 44 111 Y XL 265/50 R 19 110 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 H XL A/S Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 - 21 107 V XL M+S 275/45 R 20 110 H XL A/S Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.0 / 44 265/50 R 19 110 111 V XL M+S H XL M+S 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S
Front: 275/45 R 2.6 / 38 - 20 110 Y XL Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.8 / 41 112 Y XL
357 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 358
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire identification marks in bar/PSI Front: 275/40 R 2.6 / 38 - Tire size 21 107 Y XL 245/45 R 18 96 Y Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.0 / 44 245: nominal width in mm 111 Y XL 45: aspect ratio in % Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - R: radial tire code 21 107 V XL M+S 18: rim diameter in inches Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 3.2 / 46 96: load rating, not for ZR tires 111 V XL M+S Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
With high-speed tuning feature Maximum tire load Tire size Pressure specifications Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible in bar/PSI weight for which the tire is approved.
Specifications in Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall bar/PSI with cold and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on tires the certification label on the driver door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight 265/50 R 19 110 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and H XL M+S tire loads, respectively.
Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 - Speed letter 20 110 Y XL
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45 Designation Maximum speed 20 112 Y XL Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - R up to 106 mph/170 km/h 21 107 Y XL S up to 112 mph/180 km/h Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 21 111 Y XL T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 - H up to 131 mph/210 km/h 21 107 V XL M +S V up to 150 mph/240 km/h Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49 W up to 167 mph/270 km/h 21 111 V XL M Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h +S (Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 2120
358 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 359
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand the actual conditions of their use, however, and xxx: tire size and tire design may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and 2120: tire age differences in road characteristics and climate. Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Traction Tire age The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Recommendation Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least conditions on specified government test surfa‐ every 6 years. ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Manufacture date The traction grade assigned to this tire is based You can find the manufacture date of the tire on on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and the tire's sidewall. does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ Designation Manufacture date planing, or peak traction characteristics. DOT … 2120 21st week 2020 Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Uniform Tire Quality Grading and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Quality grades can be found where applicable on generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and when tested under controlled conditions on a maximum section width. specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐ A sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐ DOT Quality Grades ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐ Treadwear der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Traction AA A B C No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than Temperature A B C the minimum required by law. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Warning The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ Treadwear lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not The treadwear grade is a comparative rating overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or based on the wear rate of the tire when tested excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ bination, can cause heat buildup and possible ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 tire failure. would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon
359 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 360
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage Run-flat tires, refer to page 363, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC General information marked on the sidewall. Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign M+S objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as Winter and all-season tires with better cold well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can weather performance than summer tires. cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ pension parts. This is more likely to occur with Tire tread low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ Summer tires pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐ Do not drive with a tire tread of less than file tires. 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ risk of hydroplaning. functions: ▷ Unusual vibrations. Winter tires ▷ Unusual tire or running noises. Do not drive with a tire tread of less than ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for to pull to the left or right. winter operation. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ Minimum tread depth tions, for instance: ▷ Driving over curbs. ▷ Road damage. ▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. ▷ Vehicle overloading. ▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire Warning circumference. These wear indicators have the Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, legally required minimum height of which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There 0.063 in/1.6 mm. is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and The positions of the wear indicators are marked stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s tor. service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐
360 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 361
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your but have them replaced. vehicle type.
Warning Warning Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ Mounted steel wheels can cause technical stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high problems, for instance unexpected loosening of speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross- the lug bolts and damage to the brake discs. section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ wheels. ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ ble, avoid driving over objects or road condi‐ tions that may damage tires, or drive over them Warning slowly and carefully. Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as Changing wheels and tires the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. To maintain good handling and vehicle Mounting and wheel balancing response, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out figuration from a single manufacturer. The by a dealer’s service center or another qualified manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that service center or repair shop. you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐ ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for Wheel and tire combination your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted General information on the vehicle as soon as possible. You can ask the dealer's service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and Warning wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The Safety information wheel may come loose during driving. There is a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel studs that have been categorized as suitable Warning for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐ Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your turer of the vehicle. vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐ erances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
361 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 362
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Recommended tire brands usually do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐ mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐ able from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ With winter tires mounted, observe and do not cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire exceed the permissible maximum speed. brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Changing runflat tires When changing from run-flat tires to standard New tires tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit. Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing Further information is available from a dealer's circumstances when tires are brand-new; they service center or another qualified service center achieve their full traction potential after a break-in or repair shop. time. Drive conservatively for the first Rotating wheels between axles 200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires Warning Rotating tires between the axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front Warning and rear axles can cause damage to the tires Retreaded tires can have different tire casing and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do structures. With advanced age the service life not rotate the tires between the axles on vehi‐ can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ front and rear axles. ommend the use of retreaded tires. Different wear patterns can occur on the front The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐ and rear axles depending on individual driving ommend the use of retreaded tires. conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐ Winter tires formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair General information shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed. Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they
362 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 363
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Storing tires cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Tire inflation pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Warning Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ Storage ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk ▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark of accident or risk of damage to property. Do place. not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary oil, grease, and solvents. steering corrections as carefully as possible. ▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags. ▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Label Run-flat tires
Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐ stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐ Run-flat System Component RSC. ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special rims. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ main drivable to a restricted degree in the event Repairing a flat tire of a tire inflation pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with Safety measures a flat tire. ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Safety information ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by Warning setting the parking brake. The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ are in the straight-ahead position and engage stance, reduced lane stability when braking, the steering wheel lock. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
363 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 364
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐ Overview hind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an Storage appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside. The Mobility System is located behind the left side trim in the cargo area. General information Unlock the cover of the left side panel, arrow 1, ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility and fold open, arrow 2. System found on the compressor and sealant container. Sealant container ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐ netrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only when they are visibly protruding from the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1. container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the wheel Observe use-by date on the sealant container. electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportu‐ nity. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.
364 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 365
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Compressor Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ 1 Sealant container unlocking late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to 2 Sealant container holder life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ 3 Tire pressure gage ficient ventilation. 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button 5 On/off switch NOTICE 6 Compressor The compressor can overheat during extended 7 Connector/cable for socket operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ 8 Connection hose erty. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes. Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from Filling passing traffic and on solid ground. 1. Shake the sealant container. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐ hind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.
365 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 366
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. connector into the power socket in the vehi‐ cle interior.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ 6. With standby state or drive-ready state gages audibly. switched on, switch on the compressor.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.0 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure
Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
366 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 367
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Removing and stowing the sealant center or another qualified service center or container repair shop. 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is tainer from the tire valve. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached. 2. Press the red unlocking device. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ 3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. pressor. 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐ the vehicle interior. ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐ ute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location. 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ the vehicle interior. sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor. When the tire pressure does not reach at least 2 bar, contact a manufacturer service
367 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 368
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in Snow chains the vehicle interior. Safety information
Warning With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐ ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐ tact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of 2.0 bar: snow chains. ▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor. Warning ▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage button on the compressor. tires and vehicle components. There may be a 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ risk of accident or risk of damage to property. pressor from the tire valve. Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐ ficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions. the vehicle interior. 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Fine-link snow chains Continuing the trip The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of of 50 mph/80 km/h. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again. Information regarding suitable snow chains is Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ tainer of the Mobility System promptly. other qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: ▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 376. Use ▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 369. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: ▷ 265/50 R19. ▷ 275/45 R20. Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions.
368 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 369
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after 4. "Tire chains" mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in 5. "Snow chains installed" incorrect readings. Starting with the permissible maximum speed Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in axle steering will be switched on again automati‐ incorrect readings. cally. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the drive power. Tire pressure monitor
Maximum speed with snow Concept chains The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when four mounted tires. The system warns you if using snow chains. there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Rear axle steering during General information operation with snow chains Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ tion pressure and tire temperature. General information Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can In order to guarantee free running of the wheels automatically compare the specified target pres‐ when operating with snow chains, rear axle sures with the actual tire inflation pressures. steering of the integral active steering must be If tires are being used that are not specified on switched off when snow chains are mounted. the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, such as tires with special approval, the system Safety information needs to be actively reset. The system will then take over the actual tire inflation pressures as the Warning target pressures. When rear axle steering is switched on and When operating the system, also note the infor‐ snow chains are mounted, there can be contact mation found in the Tire inflation pressure chap‐ between snow chains and the chassis. There ter. may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to Additional information: property. With mounted snow chains, switch off Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 355. the rear axle steering. Safety information Switching off rear axle steering The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐ Warning ing that snow chains are installed. The display of the target pressures is not a substitute for the tire inflation pressure details 1. "CAR" on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐ 2. "Settings" tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation 3. "General settings" pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐ anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
369 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 370
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of Changing settings injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure 1. "CAR" that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐ played correctly and match the details on the 2. "Vehicle status" tires and on the vehicle. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. "Tire settings" Functional requirements 5. "Tire selection" 6. "Manual" The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of 7. "Tire type" tire inflation pressure is not assured: ▷ "Summer" ▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the ▷ "Winter/All-year" correct details on the mounted tires must be 8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the entered in the tire settings. rear axle. ▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not activate For tires with special approval: until after driving for a few minutes: "Other tires". ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. Observe further proceeding in the perform a ▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐ reset section. val. 9. Select the maximum road speed that will be ▷ After changing the tire setting. used with the tires. ▷ For tires with special approval: 10."Save tire settings" ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset The measurement of the current tire inflation was performed with the correct tire infla‐ pressure is started. The measurement progress tion pressure. is displayed. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ Status display formed. ▷ Wheels with wheel electronics. Current status The system status can be displayed on the Con‐ Tire settings trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ tive. General information 1. "CAR" The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐ 2. "Vehicle status" ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle or directly on the tires. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The tire details do not need to be re-entered The current status is displayed. when the tire inflation pressure is corrected. For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐ Current tire inflation pressure tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐ The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for placement, the settings of the tire sets used last each tire. can be selected.
370 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 371
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
The current tire inflation pressures may change One to four yellow wheels during driving operation or depending on the ex‐ A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐ ternal temperature. sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Current tire temperature Gray wheels Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐ It may not be possible to identify tire inflation peratures are displayed. pressure losses. The current tire temperatures may change while Possible causes: driving or due to the external temperature. ▷ Malfunction. Target pressure ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, after confirmation of the tire settings. The target pressure for the tires on the front and rear axles is displayed. ▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is per‐ formed for the system. The specified target pressures take the influence of driving operation and external temperature on the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐ For tires with special approval: ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐ perform a reset pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐ 1. "CAR" tures and travel times. 2. "Vehicle status" The displayed target pressure may change and 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" may differ from the tire inflation pressure details on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐ 4. Make sure that correct tire settings have flation pressure can thus be corrected to the been made. value of the displayed target pressures. Tire settings, refer to page 370. The target pressure is immediately adjusted if 5. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings. off. 6. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset". Tire conditions 7. Drive away. General information The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ ing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…". Tire and system status are indicated by the color After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire of the wheels and a text message on the Control inflation pressures are accepted as the target tire Display. inflation pressures. The reset is completed auto‐ Any existing messages may not be deleted if the matically while driving. target pressure is not reached after the tire infla‐ After a successfully completed reset, the wheels tion pressure is corrected. on the Control Display are shown in green and the following is displayed: "Reset successful." All wheels green You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you ▷ The system is active and bases warnings on continue the reset resumes automatically. the target pressures. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is active and bases warnings on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
371 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 372
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Messages: for tires without In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ special approval sage appears on the Control Display. Symbol Possible cause General information There is a tire inflation pressure loss. A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information Measure 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a Warning speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas inflation pressure impacts handling, such as station, check the tire inflation pressure in all steering and braking response. Run-flat tires four tires and correct if necessary. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle If there is a significant loss of tire is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ inflation pressure mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. If a tire inflation pressure check is required In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ Message trol Display. A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ Symbol Possible cause pears on the Control Display. There is a flat tire or a major loss in Symbol Possible cause tire inflation pressure. Inflation was not carried out accord‐ ing to specifications, for instance when the tire has not been suffi‐ Measure ciently inflated or in the case of a 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. natural steady tire pressure loss. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Measure 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. mal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ If the tire inflation pressure is too bol containing the letters RSC marked on the low tire's sidewall. Run-flat tires, refer to page 363. Message 3. Read the description on What to do in case of A yellow warning light is illuminated in a flat tire. the instrument cluster.
372 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 373
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to Measure page 374. 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. Messages: for tires with special 2. Perform a system reset. approval If the tire inflation pressure is too General information low A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in Safety information the instrument cluster.
Warning In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as Symbol Possible cause steering and braking response. Run-flat tires There is a tire inflation pressure loss. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle No reset was performed for the sys‐ is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ tem. The system issues a warning mation on run-flat tires and continued driving based on the tire inflation pressures with these tires. stored during the last reset.
Measure If a tire inflation pressure check is 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a required speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
Message 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas station, check the tire inflation pressure in all A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ four tires and correct if necessary. pears on the Control Display. 3. Reset the system. Sym‐ Possible cause bol If there is a significant loss of tire Inflation was not carried out accord‐ inflation pressure ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has not been sufficiently inflated. Message The system has detected a wheel A yellow warning light is illuminated in change, but no reset was done. the instrument cluster. The tire inflation pressure has fallen In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ below the level of the last reset. pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐ No reset was performed for the sys‐ trol Display. tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
373 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 374
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Symbol Possible cause Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel electronics. Have the There is a flat tire or a major loss in electronics replaced at the next opportunity. tire inflation pressure. No reset was performed for the sys‐ Run-flat tires tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures Safety information stored during the last reset. Warning Measure The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, vers. braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. bol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. Run-flat tires, refer to page 363. Warning 3. Read the description on What to do in case of Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ a flat tire. ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when page 374. driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary Actions in the event of a flat tire steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Maximum speed Check the tire inflation pressure in all four You may continue driving with a damaged tire at tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. of a flat tire kit. Continued driving with a flat tire For tires with special approval: when the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Follow the following when continuing to drive Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐ with a damaged tire: set. In this case, perform the reset. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ If tire damage cannot be found, contact a vers. dealer’s service center or another qualified 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. service center or repair shop. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by tires at the next opportunity. changing the wheel.
374 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 375
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Possible driving range with a These circumstances may cause a warning depressurized tire when temperatures fall very sharply. The distance for which it may be possible to Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, play again after a short distance. external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ Sudden tire pressure loss ing style is used. The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight damage caused by external circumstances. and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up Failure performing a reset to 50 miles/80 km. Tires with special approval: the system will not function correctly if a reset was not performed, Vehicle handling with damaged tires for example a flat tire may be indicated although Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle the tire inflation pressures are correct. differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Malfunction ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. ▷ Longer braking distances. Message ▷ Changed self-steering properties. The yellow warning light flashes and is Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering then illuminated continuously. A Check maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance Control message is displayed. It may not curbs or potholes. be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Final tire failure Measure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is cate the final failure of a tire. mounted: have the wheels checked, if Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the needed. tire could come loose and cause an accident. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ with the same radio frequency: after leaving ice center or another qualified service center or the area of the interference, the system auto‐ repair shop. matically becomes active again. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system System limits was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again. Temperature Malfunction: have the system checked. The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Declaration according to NHTSA/ Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ Monitoring System tion pressure. Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the be checked monthly when cold and inflated to tire temperature falls again. 375 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 376
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐ flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ Concept hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The system detects tire inflation pressure loss should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, tween the individual wheels while driving. your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐ In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates diameter and therefore the rotational speed of a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐ nates, you should stop and check your tires as The system does not measure the actual infla‐ soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tion pressure in the tires. pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Functional requirements tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ The following conditions must be met for the ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note tire inflation pressure is not assured: that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- tion pressure. inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new Your vehicle has also been equipped with a value, an initialization was performed. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS Status display malfunction indicator is combined with the low The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a can be displayed, for instance whether the FTM malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ is active. mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon 1. "CAR" subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ 2. "Vehicle status" function exists. When the malfunction indicator is 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐ The status is displayed. tect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement Initialization required or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that An initialization must be performed in the follow‐ prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ ing situations: ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ justed. hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
376 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 377
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Performing initialization In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat Symbol Possible cause tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. 1. "CAR" Measure 2. "Vehicle status" 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" vers. 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ off. mal tires or run-flat tires. 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular sym‐ 6. Drive away. bol containing the letters RSC marked on the The initialization is completed while driving, tire's sidewall. which can be interrupted at any time. Run-flat tires, refer to page 363. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. Actions in the event of a flat tire
Messages Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. General information To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐ bility Control is switched on, if needed. sure gage of a flat tire kit. When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Safety information is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor FTM may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the Warning system. A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐ inflation pressure impacts handling, such as sible, please contact a dealer’s service center steering and braking response. Run-flat tires or another qualified service center or repair can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of shop. accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ changing the wheel. mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.
377 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 378
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Run-flat tires Possible driving range with a depressurized tire Safety information The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle Warning is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ ing style is used. stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Warning differently, potentially leading to conditions such Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ as the following: ing to drive with a flat tire. There may be a risk ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when ▷ Longer braking distances. driving with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately ▷ Changed self-steering properties. brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering steering corrections as carefully as possible. maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. cate the final failure of a tire. Continued driving with a flat tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Follow the following when continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ repair shop. vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. System limits 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four The system could be delayed or malfunction in tires at the next opportunity. the following situations: When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ check the tire inflation pressure regularly. tem. ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ nal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
378 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 379
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
▷ The system has not been initialized. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐ Warning face. The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, provided in order to perform a wheel change in high lateral acceleration (drifting). the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ signed for frequent use; for example, changing ▷ When driving with snow chains. from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ quently may cause it to become jammed or Changing wheels/tires damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a General information breakdown. When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immedi‐ ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure Warning due to a flat tire. On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example If needed, the tools for changing wheels are snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip available as accessories from a dealer’s service away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, center or another qualified service center or re‐ change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ pair shop. sistant surface.
Safety information Warning DANGER The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐ The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any all safety measures are observed, there is a risk other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack. of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Warning vehicle and do not start the engine. When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may DANGER slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ of injury or risk of damage to property. When hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐ jack to bear weight. They have the potential to serted in the jacking point next to the wheel exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ housing. ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.
379 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 380
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
On a slight downhill gradient Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐ ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐ Warning jects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of Incorrect handling of the vehicle jack can dam‐ both the front and rear axles against the rolling age the vehicle's underbody and expose high- direction. voltage components. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the Lug bolt lock jacking point next to the wheel housing. Make sure not to damage any of the underbody pan‐ Concept eling parts. The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding. Securing the vehicle against rolling Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard General information vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ to the onboard vehicle tool kit. tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the 1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. wheel to be changed. 2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
380 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 381
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug Jacking points for the vehicle bolt. jack Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If nec‐ essary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug lock bolt. 2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐ ing on the lug bolt. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ Preparing the vehicle cated at the indicated positions. ▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the im‐ mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐ able hazard warning light at an appropriate distance. ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. ▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐ ment. Two-axle ride level control, refer to page 285.
381 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 382
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐ ply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand. 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐ cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
382 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 383
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Mounting a wheel 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐ Warning est dealer's service center or another quali‐ Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section fied service center or repair shop. wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The wheel may come loose during driving. There is a risk of accident. Use only two-section wheel studs that have been categorized as suitable for the respective wheel type by the manufac‐ turer of the vehicle.
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ wise pattern until hand-tight. When non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐ companying lug bolts may have to be used as well. 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ tern. 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ cle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐ der the cargo floor panel because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
383 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 384
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. served. It also describes features and functions that are
Overview
1 Vehicle identification number 5 Oil filler neck 2 Filler neck for washer fluid 6 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling 3 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 7 Coolant reservoir, engine 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
384 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 385
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood Warning Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of hood is clear Warning during opening and closing. Improperly executed work in the engine com‐ partment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an NOTICE accident and damage to property. Have work in Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to er’s service center or another qualified service property. Make sure that the wipers with the center or repair shop. wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.
Warning The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ NOTICE ing components. Certain components in the When the hood is closed, it must engage on engine compartment can also move with the both sides. Pressing again can damage the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator hood. There is a risk of damage to property. fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into Open the hood again and then close it energet‐ the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ically. Avoid pressing again. ing and hair away from moving parts.
Opening Warning 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. There are protruding parts, for instance locking Hood is unlocked. hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐ ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood. 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened. 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
385 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 386
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm. The hood must engage on both sides.
386 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 387
Operating materials MOBILITY
Operating materials
Vehicle features and Safety information options CAUTION This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ It also describes features and functions that are ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due stalling, especially under certain environmental to the selected options or country versions. This conditions such as high ambient temperature also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and high altitude, may occur. tems. When using these functions and systems, If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations General information may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐ Depending on the region, many gas stations sell nance. fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐ ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. the following in the case of gasoline engines: Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ ▷ Leaded gasoline. taining metal must not be used. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, or iron. i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ dards: ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.
387 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 388
MOBILITY Operating materials
Engine oil NOTICE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and General information the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage The engine oil consumption is dependent on of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel your driving style and driving conditions. with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ M100. ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance: NOTICE ▷ Sporty driving style. Fuel that does not comply with the minimum ▷ Break-in of the engine. quality can compromise engine function or ▷ Idling of the engine. cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified not comply with the minimum quality. as not suitable. Different Check Control messages appear on the Control Display depending on the engine oil Recommended fuel grade level. BMW recommends AKI 91. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated Safety information performance and consumption values. NOTICE Minimum fuel grade An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ BMW recommends AKI 89. gine damage. There is a risk of damage to If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, property. Immediately add engine oil. the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐ ing principles:
388 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 389
Operating materials MOBILITY
▷ Monitoring. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible ▷ Detailed measurement. operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when General information taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. Monitoring Functional requirements Concept ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. The engine oil level is monitored electronically ▷ Drive-ready state is activated. while driving and can be shown on the Control ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P Display. and accelerator pedal not depressed. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible ▷ The combustion engine is at operating tem‐ operating range, a Check Control message is perature. displayed. A red indicator light indicates that the en‐ Performing a detailed measurement gine oil pressure is too low. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" Functional requirements 3. "Engine oil level" A current measured value is available after ap‐ 4. "Engine oil measurement" prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐ 5. "Start measurement" bustion engine running. The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Displaying the engine oil level 1. "CAR" Adding engine oil 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" General information The engine oil level is displayed. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to System limits be added is indicated in the message shown on When making frequent short-distance trips or the Control Display. using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ Only add suitable types of engine oil. sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready the measured value for the last, sufficiently long state before adding engine oil. trip is displayed. Take care not to add too much engine oil. Detailed measurement
Concept The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
389 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 390
MOBILITY Operating materials
Safety information Opening, refer to page 385. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. Warning Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐ low the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. 3. Add engine oil. 4. Close the lid. NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ Engine oil types to add gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil. General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. NOTICE Only add the types of engine oil which are listed. Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ Safety information age to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ NOTICE ice center or another qualified service center or Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a repair shop. risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐ tives.
Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ NOTICE partment. Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in Additional information: the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐ For an overview, refer to page 384. age to property. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil Adding engine oil rating. 1. Opening the hood. Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:
390 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 391
Operating materials MOBILITY
Oil rating The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ BMW Longlife-01 FE. fied service center or repair shop change the en‐ gine oil. BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long‐ life-17 FE+ oil ratings are not suitable for the 50i gasoline engine.
Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Coolant Oil rating API SL. General information API SM. Coolant consists of water and additives.
API SN. Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐ ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixing Viscosity grades ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐ tives is available from a dealer’s service center or Viscosity grades another qualified service center or repair shop. SAE 0W-20. Safety information SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings and Warning viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested With the engine hot and the cooling system from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. fied service center or repair shop. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down. Engine oil change
Warning NOTICE Additives are harmful and incorrect additives Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ and risk of damage to property. Do not allow gine damage. There is a risk of damage to additives to come into contact with skin, eyes property. It is recommended that you do not or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐ only. hicle.
391 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 392
MOBILITY Operating materials
Coolant level 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ General information sure to dissipate, then open it. Depending on the motorization, there are up to 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. two coolant reservoirs in the engine compart‐ 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to ment. Check and top up the coolant levels on a the specified level; do not overfill. regular basis. 6. Close the lid. The coolant level is indicated using minimum 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated and maximum markings in the filler neck of the as soon as possible. coolant reservoir. Additional information: Disposal For an overview, refer to page 384. Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of Checking the coolant level coolant and coolant additives. 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 385. Washer fluid 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ General information sure to dissipate, then open it. All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. voir. 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between Use a mixture of tap water and windshield the minimum and maximum marks in the filler washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield neck. washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk 6. Close the lid. of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐ tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away Adding coolant from ignition sources. Do not refill operating 1. Let the engine cool. materials into different bottles. Store operating 2. Opening the hood. materials out of reach of children. Opening, refer to page 385.
392 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 393
Operating materials MOBILITY
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is Overview regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.
Warning Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ gine compartment. jury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ Malfunction ervoir. The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐ trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐ correct readings at temperatures below NOTICE +5 ℉/-15 ℃. Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer concen‐ trates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐ trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.
393 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 394
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information options Information on service notifications can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Additional information: cific and optional features offered with the series. Service notifications, refer to page 170. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Service data in the vehicle key to the selected options or country versions. This Information on the service notifications is contin‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ uously stored in the vehicle key. The service tems. When using these functions and systems, center can read this data out and suggest a the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ maintenance scope for the vehicle. served. Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐ BMW maintenance system cently.
The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ Storage periods cations and thereby provides support in main‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery taining road safety and the operational reliability was disconnected are not taken into account. of the vehicle. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ another qualified service center or repair shop tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐ try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐ and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ separately. Further information is available from a activated-charcoal filter. dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Maintenance Manual and Condition Based Service Service and Warranty CBS Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Concept Service Guide Booklet for Sensors and special algorithms take into account Canadian models the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to provide maintenance recommendations. Please consult your Maintenance Manual and The system makes it possible to adapt the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US amount of maintenance corresponding to your models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet user profile. for Canadian models for additional information on
394 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 395
Maintenance MOBILITY
the performance of service and maintenance Position work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ General information cle's emissions. Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ Emissions move any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the Safety information vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: NOTICE This indicates that there is excessive misfiring The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ in the engine. cate component intended to be used in con‐ junction with specialized equipment to check Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ ously damage emission control components, agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in particular the catalytic converter. can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur‐ poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐ board Diagnosis.
395 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 396
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed. options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ NOTICE cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to to the selected options or country versions. This property. Make sure that the wipers with the also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ wiper blades mounted are folded down onto tems. When using these functions and systems, the windshield before opening the hood. the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Replace front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper Vehicle tool kit arms. Fold-away position of the wipers, refer to page 150. 2. Lift the wiper off of the windshield and hold.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the cargo floor panel.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the Wiper blades wiper blade, arrow 2.
Safety information
NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
396 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 397
Replacing components MOBILITY
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐ Safety information til it you hear it snap into the holder. 5. Fold down the wipers. Warning Replacing the rear wiper blade Focused laser light can irritate or permanently damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of The wiper blade is engaged at the end of the injury. The manufacturer of the vehicle recom‐ wiper arm. mends that the work on the lighting system in‐ 1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper cluding bulb replacement be performed by a blade, arrow. dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Warning Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade Headlight glass must engage audibly. Condensation can form on the inside of the 3. Fold down the wipers. headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐ Lights and bulbs sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, General information increasing humidity forms, for instance water Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution droplets in the light, have the headlights to vehicle safety. checked. All headlights and lights are made using LED or laser technology. Vehicle battery Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ General information ventional lasers and are officially designated as The battery is maintenance-free. Class 1 light-emitting diodes. The vehicle battery must be replaced no later The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends than after 8 years to guarantee the error-free that you let a dealer's service center or another function of all systems. A Check Control mes‐ qualified service center or repair shop perform sage is displayed. the work in case of a malfunction. More information about the battery can be re‐ quested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
397 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 398
MOBILITY Replacing components
Safety information Charging the battery
General information DANGER Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently Contact with live components can lead to an charged to guarantee that the battery remains electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ usable for its full service life. ger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage. A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.
Charge the battery in the following situations: Warning ▷ When the inspection glass on the top of the Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can battery is black. damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and ▷ When the take-off performance is insufficient. damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that The following circumstances can have a negative are compatible with your vehicle type should be effect on the performance of the battery: installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐ ▷ Frequent short-distance drives. patible vehicle batteries is available at your ▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a dealer’s service center. month.
Safety information Warning If the vehicle battery is too old or it has been overloaded for several years, the function of all NOTICE systems can no longer be warranted, for in‐ Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can stance that of the steering assistance. There work with high voltages and currents, which may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to means that the 12 volt electrical system can be property. Replace the vehicle battery after the overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of dam‐ Check Control message has been displayed. age to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi‐ nals in the engine compartment. Register the battery to the vehicle Charging the battery The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another quali‐ Charge the battery only when the engine is off fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ and via the starting aid terminals in the engine hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has compartment. been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐ Additional information: tered again, all comfort features will be available Starting aid terminals, refer to page 405. without restriction and any Check Control mes‐ sages displayed which relate to comfort features Power failure will disappear. After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:
398 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 399
Replacing components MOBILITY
▷ With Memory function: store the positions again. ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover. service center or repair shop or take The fuse box is located on the front right. them to a collection point. Information on the fuse types and locations, as Maintain the filled battery in an upright position well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is for transport and storage. Secure the battery so available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐ that it does not tip over during transport. card. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in Fuses the fuse box.
General information In the cargo area The fuses are located at different places in the The fuses are located in the cargo area on the vehicle. right side behind a cover.
Safety information
Warning Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐ trical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating. Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover, arrow 2. In the car's interior The fuse box may be located behind the sound The fuses are located in the car's interior in the insulation. front passenger floor area behind a cover. Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐ card. Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
399 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 400
MOBILITY Replacing components
Additional fuse boxes Additional fuse boxes are located in the vehicle. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop replace the fuses.
400 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 401
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle options 1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐ This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ row 1, and fold open, arrow 2. cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served.
Hazard warning flashers 2. Take the warning triangle out in the direction of the car's interior.
The button is located in the center console. The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ ard warning flashers are activated. First-aid kit
General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐ larly and replace any expired items promptly.
401 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 402
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Storage Functional requirements The first-aid kit is located in the left storage com‐ ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment partment of the cargo area. with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ nectedDrive services. 1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐ row 1, and fold open, arrow 2. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Starting manually If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐ port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" 3. "BMW Assist" 2. If necessary, remove the cargo cover from 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" the storage under the cargo floor panel. A voice connection is established. Cargo cover, refer to page 324. Teleservice Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless BMW Roadside Assistance transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐ portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐ Concept mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐ Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if prove this on the Control Display. assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down. Teleservice Help Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐ General information ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐ cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐ mission. side Assistance. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it There are various ways of contacting BMW through BMW Roadside Assistance. Roadside Assistance. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. ▷ Via a Check Control message. 2. Set the parking brake. Supplementary SMS text messages, refer to 3. Control Display is switched on. page 162. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help. ▷ Calling with a mobile phone. ▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
402 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 403
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
BMW Accident Assistance Starting manually BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐ Concept tacted independently of the automatic accident detection function. BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐ tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an 1. "APPS" accident. 2. "Installed apps" 3. "BMW Assist" General information 4. "BMW Accident Assistance" If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ Follow the displays on the Control Display. A ately severe accident, which did not trigger any voice connection is established. airbags, a Check Control message appears on the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. Emergency Request When BMW Accident Assistance is activated, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW. Intelligent emergency call
Functional requirements Concept ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐ nectedDrive services. tem or manually. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Starting BMW Accident The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐ Assistance nection with the BMW Response Center. For technical reasons, the Emergency Request If an accident is detected cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐ automatically tions. A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐ tance appears on the Control Display. Overview The connection can be established directly: "Call BMW Accident Assistance" The Check Control message for BMW Accident Assistance can also be called up from the stored Check Control messages for a certain length of time. Additional information: Check Control, refer to page 161.
SOS button.
403 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 404
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Functional requirements BMW Response Center may still be able to ▷ Standby state is switched on. hear the occupants of the vehicle. ▷ The Assist system is functional. The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ gency Request. ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. What to do after an Automatic triggering accident Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ General information cally initiated immediately after an accident of After an accident, comply with the following corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐ safety precautions with regard to the high-volt‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ age system: ton. ▷ Secure the crash site. Manual triggering ▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is 1. Tap the cover. equipped with a high-voltage system. 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED ▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the in the area of the button illuminates green. parking brake and switch off operating and ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐ drive-ready state. gency Request has been initiated. ▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting. If a cancel prompt appears on the Control ▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the Display, the Emergency Request can be high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a aborted. safe distance from the vehicle. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established. Safety information ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ Warning lished. Contact with live components can lead to an The BMW Response Center then makes electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ contact with the occupants of the vehicle and ger to life. After an accident, do not touch any initiates further steps to help. high-voltage components such as orange col‐ Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW ored high-voltage cables or parts that are in Response Center can take further steps to contact with exposed high-voltage cables. help you under certain circumstances. For this purpose, data that serves to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures, for in‐ Warning stance the current position of the vehicle Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive. when it can be determined, is transmitted to There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids es‐ the BMW Response Center. caping from the high-voltage battery. Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐ ger heard through the loudspeakers, the
404 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 405
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Jump-starting Starting aid terminals The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ General information ment acts as the positive battery terminal. A special connection on the body in the engine If the battery is discharged, the engine can be compartment acts as the negative battery termi‐ started using the battery of another vehicle and nal. two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. Additional information: Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for Overview of engine compartment, refer to jump-starting. page 384. Open the cover of the positive battery terminal. Safety information Connecting the cables DANGER Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers, such as Contact with live components can lead to an the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle. electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ ger to life. Do not touch any components that 1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. are under voltage. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal Warning of the vehicle providing assistance. If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐ 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk the cable to the positive battery terminal, or of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐ to the corresponding starting aid terminal of ing connection. the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, NOTICE or to the corresponding engine or body In the case of body contact between the two ground of assisting vehicle. vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump- 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ starting. There is a risk of damage to property. ative battery terminal, or to the corresponding Make sure that no body contact occurs. engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Preparation Establishing drive-ready state 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐ 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐ let it run for several minutes at an increased formation can be found on the battery. idle speed. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. 2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehicle 3. Switch off any electrical consumers in both to be started as usual. vehicles. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another at‐
405 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 406
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery Pushing the vehicle to recharge. To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ 3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance. order. Additional information: Check the battery and recharge, if needed. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 152.
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Safety information
Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Transporting the vehicle Towing other vehicles General information General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ Safety information ing on local regulations. If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a NOTICE warning triangle in the rear window. The vehicle can be damaged when towing the With Safe Share function: to remove a broken- vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of down vehicle from the danger area, tow it for a damage to property. The vehicle should only be short distance at a speed of no more than transported on a loading platform. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Safety information NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting Warning and securing it. If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ There is a risk of damage to property. ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow be possible to control the vehicle's response. fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
406 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 407
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is Tow fitting heavier than the vehicle to be towed. General information
NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐ rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried side on both vehicles. in the vehicle. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐ rear of the vehicle. lowing: The tow fitting is located beneath the cargo floor ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going panel. around corners. ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐ ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is hicle and screw it all the way in. secured with an offset. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads Tow rope only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐ Observe the following notes when using the tow stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐ rope: ting. ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable ▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regu‐ the vehicle to be towed without jerking. lar intervals. ▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening. Additional information: ▷ Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 396. rope in regular intervals. ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of Safety information 30 mph/50 km/h. ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of NOTICE 3 miles/5 km. If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there ▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐ that the tow rope is taut. ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐ low the notes on using the tow fitting.
407 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 408
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting Do not tow-start the vehicle. Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐ rected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: Jump-starting, refer to page 405.
408 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 409
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature options ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm. cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: It also describes features and functions that are 31.5 in/80 cm. not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This Automatic vehicle washes also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, Safety information the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. NOTICE Improper use of automatic washing systems or Washing the vehicle car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow General information the following instructions: Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or in the area below the windshield when the hood those that use soft brushes in order to is raised. avoid paint damage. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ▷ Before driving into the car wash, make ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the sure that the vehicle is not too large. vehicle. ▷ Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid Steam blaster and high-pressure damage to the chassis. washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
NOTICE ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐ When cleaning with high-pressure washers, tem. components can be damaged due to the pres‐ sure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continu‐ ously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.
409 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 410
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a car wash with a dries brake discs and brake pads and protects Steptronic transmission them against corrosion. Completely remove all residues on the windows, Safety information to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Vehicle care gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch standby state off in vehicle washes. Vehicle care products
General information General information BMW recommends using vehicle care and In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care freely. products are available from a dealer’s service Some car washes do not permit persons in the center or another qualified service center or re‐ vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the pair shop. outside when in selector lever position N. A sig‐ nal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the Safety information vehicle. Additional information: Warning Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 152. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ gerous and harmful to your health. There is a Driving out of a car wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. the doors or windows. Only use products in‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐ Switch on drive-ready state. structions on the container. Additional information: Drive-ready state, refer to page 40. Vehicle paint Headlights General information Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ from insects, with shampoo and wash off with taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect water. the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice extent of your vehicle care to these influences. scraper. Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ After washing the vehicle mediately to prevent the finish from being altered After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes or discolored. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking
410 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 411
Care MOBILITY
Matte finish Caring for special components Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐ face. nents, such as the brake disc. To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Chrome surfaces more visible. Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐ grease will gradually break down the protective ter and added cleanser as needed. layer of the leather surface. Rubber components Upholstery material care Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐ General information ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth vehicle care products in order to avoid damage with a suitable interior cleaner. or noises. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ Fine wood parts terial vigorously. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft Safety information cloth.
NOTICE Kenaf Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐ can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of ble care products. damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
411 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 412
MOBILITY Care
Plastic components the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ curely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. NOTICE Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐ as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐ terior for cleaning. ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐ There is a risk of damage to property. Clean crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth with water, if needed. in the direction of travel only.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Mount for trailer hitch Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Keep the mount clean. Do not soak the roofliner. Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding surfa‐ ces with resin-free greases or oils. Safety belts Before using steam cleaners or high pressure cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head Warning and insert the cover into the mount. Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety Sensors and camera lenses belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ safety belts. gent.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and Displays, screens, and protective thus have a negative impact on safety. glass of the Head-up Display Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the installed belt straps. NOTICE Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any they are dry. kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the NOTICE pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. The surface of displays can be damaged with There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to vehicle such that they are secured and cannot property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats not use any scratching materials. that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
412 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 413
Care MOBILITY
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐ play using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage
Concept For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with the high-voltage battery fully charged, if possible. Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted. With storage times of up to three months, if pos‐ sible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it with the high-voltage battery as fully charged as possible.
General information Your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.
Safety information
NOTICE The high-voltage battery can be damaged if left uncharged or with low charge for extended pe‐ riods. There is a risk of damage to property. Be‐ fore storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charging station at a compatible charging location. If necessary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that charging is carried out. Regularly check the charge state. Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer than three months with a charge state below approx. 50 %.
413 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 414
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. served. It also describes features and functions that are
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop. ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐ model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment, measurement method. tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X5 plug-In hybrid
Width with mirrors in/mm 87.3/2,218
Width without mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,004
Height in/mm 68.7/1,744
Length in/mm 194.3/4,936
Wheelbase in/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.3/12.6
414 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 415
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X5 xDrive45e
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,967/3,160
Load lbs/kg 937/425
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 3,142/1,425
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,968/1,800
Trailer towing
X5 xDrive45e
Trailer load without brakes lbs/kg 1,653/750
Trailer load with brakes on uphill grades of up to 12 % lbs/kg 5,952/2,700
Maximum drawbar nose weight lbs/kg 551/250
Approved rear axle load, towing vehicle lbs/kg 3,968/1,800
Approved gross vehicle weight, towing vehicle lbs/kg 6,967/3,160
Capacities
BMW X5 plug-in hybrid
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 18.2/69.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 387.
415 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 416
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐ cle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed: ▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Speed Limit Assistant. ▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: lane change with active guidance: lane change. ▷ Driving tips: things to remember when driv‐ ing: roof-mounted luggage rack. ▷ Mobility: wheels and tires: Tire Pressure Monitor.
416 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 417
Appendix REFERENCE
417 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 418
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Advance climate control, see Stationary climate control 301 3D View, see Surround View 266 Airbags 187 Airbags, indicator and warning light 189 A Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 292 air conditioning, climate 291 ABS Antilock Braking System 228 Air distribution, manual 293 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 155 Air drying, see air conditioning 291 Accessories and parts 8 Air flow, automatic climate control 293 Accident prevention, see Active Protection 225 Air outlets, see Ventilation 294 Accident, what to do 404 Air pressure, tires 355 ACC, see Active Cruise Control 238 Air quality 289 Acoustic pedestrian protection 136 Air suspension, see Two-axle ride level con‐ AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging trol 285 cable 344 Alarm system 108 Activated charcoal filter 294 Alarm, unintentional 110 Activation, trailer towing 333 All-season tires, see Winter tires 362 Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 230 ACC 238 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 54 Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Ambient air package 297 sion 288 Ambient light 185 Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 191 Android Auto, connection to the vehicle 78 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 191 Android Auto preparation, connection to the ve‐ Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 262 hicle 78 Active Protection 225 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐ Active seat ventilation 127 tion 78 Active Steering, integral 233 Animal detection, see Night Vision 206 Active voice processing, voice activation 52 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 392 Adaptive brake assistant 228 Antilock Braking System ABS 228 Adaptive energy management 140 Anti-slip control, see DSC 228 Adaptive hybrid mode 140 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 380 Adaptive Light Control 182 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐ Adaptive recuperation 339 hicle 78 ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 143 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐ Adaptive suspension 288 tion 78 Additives, engine oil types 390 Approach control warning with City braking func‐ Adjusting contents, iDrive 48 tion 192 Adjusting engine sound 288 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Adjusting sound of the engine 288 tertainment, Communication 6 Adjustments, steering wheel 124 Armrest heating 126
418 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 419
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedestrian Bar for tow-starting/towing 407 protection 136 Battery, charge state indicator 160 Ashtray 307 BATTERY CONTROL button 135 Assistance for the combustion engine 139 BATTERY CONTROL, electric driving 135 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐ Battery, disposing of 399 tant 228 Battery, vehicle 397 Assistance with breakdown 401 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 406 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis‐ Belts, see Safety belts 118 tant 249 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 317 Assisted Driving Plus 253 Blind spot collision warning 213 Assisted Driving View 157 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 111 AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 292 Bluetooth connection 75 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, tertainment and Communication 6 Entertainment, Communication 6 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 143 BMW 360° ELECTRIC Portal, see Intelligent Automatic activation, see Climate control charging 348 rules 128 BMW Accident Assistance 403 Automatic climate control 289 BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 123 Entertainment and Communication 6 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Digital Key 91 bags 190 BMW display key 85 Automatic Differential Brake 231 BMW display key, malfunction 89 Automatic headlight control 179 BMW Drive Recorder 223 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 143 BMW eDRIVE 135 Automatic locking 107 BMW Gesture Control 57 Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 292 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 55 Automatic tailgate 102 BMW maintenance system 394 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ BMW Roadside Assistance 402 mission 150 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 317 Automatic unlocking 107 Brake assistant 228 Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Brake assistant, adaptive 228 Assistant 56 Brake Controller 334 AUTO program, automatic climate control 291 Brake discs, see Brake system 326 AUTO program, intensity 292 Brake pads, see Brake system 326 Auto Start/Stop function 137 Brake system 326 Average consumption, see Trip data 174 Braking, information 328 Axle loads, approved 415 Breakdown assistance 401 Breaking in 326 B Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 226 Brightness, Control Display 65 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 117 Buttons on the steering wheel 34 Backrest, seats 115 Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 403 Backrest tilt 116 Button, Start/Stop 137 Backrest, width 117 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 405 Bad road trips 327 Bandages, see First-aid kit 401
419 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 420
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
C Central locking system 96 Central screen, see Control Display 46 Cable for tow-starting/towing 407 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Changing parts 396 Call, gesture control 58 Changing wheels 379 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Changing, wheels and tires 361 gent Safety 191 CHARGE, energy recovery 139 Camera lenses, care 412 Charge state indicator of the high-voltage bat‐ Camera, rearview camera, see Surround tery 160 View 266 Charging cable, storing, see Storage 344 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround Charging cable unlocking manually 346 View 264 Charging screen 159 Camera, see Surround View 266 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 342 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 238 Charging, see Vehicle charging 342 CANCEL button, cruise control 236 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging Can holder, see Cup holders 317 tray 311 Care, Head-up Display 412 Charging status, see Display of the charging sta‐ Care, light-alloy wheels 411 tus 347 Care of displays, screens 412 Charging the battery, see Vehicle charging 342 Care, vehicle 410 Charging the vehicle 342 Cargo area 320 Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charging 342 Cargo area, enlarging 322 Charging to save fuel 336 Cargo cover 324 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless Cargo, stowing and securing 321 charging tray 311 Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ area 321 ber 12 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐ Check Control 161 tant 56 Checking the engine oil level electronically 388 Car key, see Vehicle key 81 Children, seating position 130 Carpet, care 412 Children, transporting safely 130 CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 78 Child restraint system LATCH 132 Car seats, see Transporting children safely 130 Child restraint systems, mounting 131 Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ age 297 dren safely 130 Car wash 409 Child safety locks 134 Car wash lines 409 Child seat, mounting 131 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Child seats, see Transporting children tem 327 safely 130 CBS Condition Based Service 394 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 411 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Chrome surfaces, care 411 Entertainment and Communication 6 Cigarette lighter 308 Center armrest, front 317 Cigarette lighter, front 308 Center armrest, rear 317 Cigarette lighter, rear 308 Center console 37 Cleaning displays, screens 412 Central Information Display (CID), see Control Cleaning, Head-up Display 412 Display 46 Clearance, water 328
420 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 421
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Climate control 289 Coolant 391 Climate control rules 128 Coolant level 392 Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital Cooling, maximum 291 Key 91 Cooling system 391 Clothes hooks 319 Cornering light 182 Coasting 139 Corrosion on brake discs 329 Combination switch, see Turn signals 147 Cosmetic mirror 307 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐ Cross traffic warning 281 tem 147 Cruise control 236 Comfort Access 96 Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion 238 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 238 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 44 Cruise control with distance control, see Active Compartments, doors 316 Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 238 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 73 Cruise control without distance control, see Compressor 365 Cruise control 236 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Cruising range 169 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Cup holder 317 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐ Cup holder, front 317 cle 329 Cup holder, rear 318 Condensation, windshield 294 Current consumption 158 Condition Based Service CBS 394 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Confirmation signal from the vehicle 106 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Connected Command, BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 56 D ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Damage, tires 360 Connecting device 72 Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐ Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 309 sion 288 Connecting, mobile devices 72 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 223 Connections, Screen Mirroring 77 Data memory 10 Consumption display, widget in the instrument Data protection, settings 67 cluster 158 Data, see Deleting personal data 67 Consumption, see Current consumption 158 Data, technical 414 Consumption, see Trip data 174 Date 63 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Daytime running lights 181 Entertainment, Communication 6 DCC, see Cruise control 236 Contact with water, hybrid system 15 Deactivation, hybrid system 15 Container for washer fluid 392 Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 294 Continued driving with a flat tire 374, 378 Defrosting, windshield 294 Control Display 46 Deleting personal data 67 Control Display, brightness 65 Departure schedule, see Stationary climate con‐ Controller 46 trol 301 Control systems, driving stability 228 Departure time, stationary climate control 302 Convenient closing, vehicle key 83 Device list 73 Convenient opening, vehicle key 82 Diagnosis connection 395
421 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 422
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Digital Key 91 Driving instructions, breaking in 326 Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 91 Driving instructions, hybrid system 336 Dimensions 414 Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Dimmable exterior mirrors 123 trol 140 Dimmable interior mirror 124 Driving notes, general 327 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory Driving on bad roads 327 buttons 45 Driving stability control systems 228 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 147 Driving style analysis, HYBRID ECO PRO 339 Display, iDrive 43 Driving through water 328 Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐ Driving tips 327 play 176 Driving with combustion engine, POWER 135 Display key 85 Driving with hybrid drive, HYBRID 135 Display key, malfunction 89 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 228 Display key, see BMW display key 85 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 230 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 185 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐ Display, notifications, BMW Intelligent Personal sion 288 Assistant 55 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 228 Displays 156 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 230 Displays and symbols 7 Displays, hybrid system 160 E Disposal, coolant 392 Disposal, vehicle battery 399 eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en‐ Distance control, see PDC 258 gine 139 Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 181 eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en‐ Door opening angle, Surround View 268 gine 140 Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐ Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐ trol 231 ter 158 Drawbar nose weight, technical data 415 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 230 Drive-off assistant 228 ELECTRIC button 135 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 228 Electric drive-ready state 40 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 64 Electric driving, BATTERY CONTROL 135 Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent Electric driving, ELECTRIC 135 Safety 191 Electric driving, ePOWER 135 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 191 ELECTRIC, electric driving 135 Driver Attention Camera 64 ELECTRIC INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Drive-ready state, electric 40 Control 140 Drive-ready state, engine start 40 ELECTRIC, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby Electronic oil measurement 388 state 39 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 228 Driver profiles 68 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Driver profile, setup 68 Entertainment, Communication 6 Driver profiles, welcome screen 68 Emergency brake function when parking, Active Driving 135 PDC 262 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 191 Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐ Driving comfort 285, 288 tant 221 Driving Dynamics Control 140 Emergency braking, see PostCrash - iBrake 225
422 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 423
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Emergency Request 403 Exterior mirrors 122 Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Exterior mirrors, malfunction 123 tance 403 External start, see Jump-starting 405 Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ External temperature 169 tance 402 Eyelet for towing 407 Emergency stop assistant 221 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 321 Emergency unlocking, charging cable 346 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 354 F Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 154 Energy recovery, CHARGE 139 Factory settings, see Reset vehicle configura‐ Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 171 tion 66 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 137 Failure message, see Check Control 161 Engine compartment 384 False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Engine coolant 391 alarms 110 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedestrian Fan, see Air flow 293 protection 136 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 118 Engine oil, adding 389 Fatigue alert 226 Engine oil change 391 Fault indicators, see Check Control 161 Engine oil filler neck 389 Filler neck for engine oil 389 Engine oil types to add 390 Fine wood parts, care 411 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 40 First-aid kit 401 Engine start, see Jump-starting 405 First Steps, see Setup Wizard 68 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook Fittings for trailer safety chain, trailer towing 334 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Flat tire, changing wheels 379 tion 6 Flat tire, continued driving 374, 378 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 376 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐ Flat tire message, FTM 377 munication 6 Flat tire message, Tire Pressure Monitor 372 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Flat Tire Monitor TPM 376 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Flat tire, repairing 363 Entry comparison 44 Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 369 ePOWER, electric driving 135 Flat tire warning light, FTM 377 Equipment, interior 304 Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Error indicators, see Check Control 161 tor 372 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 228 Flooding, driving through 328 Evasion Assistant 196 Floor carpet, care 412 Exchanging, wheels and tires 361 Floor mats, care 412 Exhaust gas system 327 Fold-away position, wiper 150 Exhaustion warner 226 Foot brake 328 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 327 Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal Safety 191 Assistant 56 For Your Own Safety 8 Exterior lighting during unlocking 82 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 83 age 297 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 123 Fragrance, see Ambient air package 297 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 123 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 297
423 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 424
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Front airbags 187 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Front collision mitigation 192 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Front collision mitigation, see Approach Control Gross vehicle weight, approved 415 Warning 192 Gross vehicle weight, trailer mode 415 Front collision mitigation, see Intersection Colli‐ sion Warning 198 H Front collision mitigation, see Pedestrian Warn‐ ing 203 Handbrake, see Parking brake 143 Front fog lights 184 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 305 Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for bulbs 397 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 397 Hazard warning flashers 401 Front passenger seat functionality 118 HDC Hill Descent Control 231 Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ Head airbags 188 vation 190 Headlight control, automatic 179 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 190 Headlight flasher 147 Front seats 115 Headlight glass 397 Fuel 387 Headlights, care 410 Fuel cap 353 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 397 Fuel filler flap 353 Head restraints and seats 115 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 354 Head restraints, front 120 Fuel gauge 168 Head restraints, rear 121 Fuel quality 387 Head-up Display 176 Fuel recommendation 387 Head-up Display, care 412 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 415 Head-up Display, store position, see Memory Functions, hybrid system 135 function 125 Fuses 399 Heated steering wheel 125 Heavy cargo, stowing 321 G Height, vehicle 414 High-beam Assistant 182 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal High beams 147 Remote Control 304 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ Gasoline 387 tant 182 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 150 High-voltage battery, charge state indicator 160 Gear shift indicator 171 Hill Descent Control HDC 231 General driving notes 327 Hills 329 General settings 63 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 228 Gentleman function, see Front passenger seat Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 317 functionality 118 HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Gesture Control 57 Control 304 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 57 Homepage, see Internet 6 Glare shield, see Sun visor 307 Hood 385 Glass sunroof, electric 112 Horn 34 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 114 Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 105 Glove compartment 315 Hot exhaust gas system 327
424 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 425
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Instrument cluster 156 glass 397 Instrument lighting 185 HYBRID button 135 Integral Active Steering 233 HYBRID COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Integrated key 95 trol 140 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 16 HYBRID, driving with hybrid drive 135 Integrated Universal Remote Control 304 HYBRID ECO PRO, Driving style analysis 339 Intelligent adaptation 140 HYBRID ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Intelligent charging 348 trol 140 Intelligent emergency call 403 HYBRID STANDARD, see Driving Dynamics Intelligent Personal Assistant 55 Control 140 Intelligent Safety 191 Hybrid system, adapting to the course of the Intended use 8 road 140 Intensity, AUTO program 292 Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 15 Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 64 Hybrid system, contact with water 15 Interior equipment 304 Hybrid system, displays 160 Interior lights 185 Hybrid system, safety 15 Interior lights during unlocking 82 Hybrid system, see BMW eDRIVE 135 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 83 Hybrid system, using efficiently 336 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 124 Hybrid system, working on 15 Interior mirrors 124 Hydroplaning 328 Interior motion sensor 109 Internet connection 76 I Internet hotspot 76 Internet page 6 iBrake - PostCrash 225 Intersection collision warning 198 Ice warning, see External temperature 169 Interval display, see Service notifications 170 Icy roads, see External temperature 169 Ionization, see Ambient air package 297 Identification marks, tires 358 Identification number, see Vehicle identification J number 12 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready Jacking points for the vehicle jack 381 state 39 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 113 iDrive 43 Jam protection system, windows 111 ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 81 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 150 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 81 Jump-starting 405 Indicator/warning lights 162 Jump-starting terminals 405 Individual air distribution 293 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 68 K Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 311 Kenaf, care 411 Inflation pressure, tires 355 Key Card, see BMW Digital Key 91 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 376 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 96 Information 6 Key, mechanical 95 Information window, Control Display 65 Key, see BMW Digital Key 91 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 377 Key, see BMW display key 85 Input, iDrive 43 Key, see Vehicle key 81
425 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 426
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 150 Load 321 Knee airbag 188 Loading 320 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 321 L Lock control elements, rear automatic climate control 297 Label on recommended tires 362 Locking, automatic 107 Lane change assistant 255 Locking, see Opening and Closing 81 Lane control assistant with active side collision Locking, settings 106 protection, see Side collision mitigation 217 Locking, vehicle key 82 Lane departure warning 209 Lock, lug bolts 380 Lane lines, Surround View 268 Longer idle times and long-term vehicle stor‐ Lane threshold, warning 209 age 413 Language, set 64 Long-term vehicle storage 413 Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wilkins 186 bulbs 397 Low beams 180 Laser high beams 184 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ Lashing eyes in the cargo area 321 tant 182 LATCH child restraint fixing system 132 Lower back support 117 Launch Control 155 Lower tailgate 103 Leather care 411 Lug bolt lock 380 LED front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage bulbs 397 rack 330 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and Lumbar support 117 bulbs 397 LED light carpet, see Welcome light 181 M Length, vehicle 414 Letters and numbers, entering 44 Maintaining charge state, BATTERY CON‐ Level 1 charging 342 TROL 135 Level 1 charging cable 344 Maintenance 394 Level 2 charging cable 344 Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based Light-alloy wheels, care 411 Service CBS 394 Light control, adaptive 182 Maintenance, see Service notifications 170 Lighter, cigarettes 308 Maintenance system, BMW 394 Lighting 179 Make-up mirror 307 Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil‐ Malfunction, BMW display key 89 kins 186 Malfunction, vehicle key 84 Light in the exterior mirror, see Blind spot colli‐ Managing devices 73 sion warning 213 Manual brake, see Parking brake 143 Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic Manual control, air distribution 293 warning 281 Manual control, air flow 293 Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 397 Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 150 Lights 179 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 354 Lights and bulbs 397 Manual Speed Limiter 234 Light switch 179 Manual unlocking, charging cable 346 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 234 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ List of all messages 66 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
426 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 427
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Marking, run-flat tire 363 N Massage seat, front 126 Matt paint, care 411 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Maximum cooling 291 Entertainment and Communication 6 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints Info 171 front 120 Maximum speed, winter tires 362 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints Measuring units 64 rear 121 Media of the Owner's Manual 16 Net, cargo area 322 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 401 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 411 Memory function 125 New wheels and tires 361 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection Night Vision device, see Night Vision 206 lists 173 Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ Menus, operating, iDrive 43 tion 206 Messages 66 No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 98 Messages, see Check Control 161 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 407 Microfilter 294 Minimum tread depth, tires 360 O Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ cle 328 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 395 Mobile devices, managing 73 Object detection, see Night Vision 206 Mobile phone, connecting 72 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 265 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Obstacle marking, Surround View 268 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ grade 388 tance 403 Odometer, see Trip data 174 Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Oil, adding 389 tance 402 Oil change 391 Mobility System 364 Oil change interval, see Service notifications 170 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 238 Oil filler neck 389 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Oil level, checking electronically 388 Safety 8 Oil types to add, engine 390 Monitor, see Control Display 46 Onboard Computer, see Trip data 174 Mount for trailer hitch, care 412 Onboard Diagnosis OBD 395 Mounting for trailer hitch 333 Onboard literature, printed 16 Mounting of child restraint systems 131 Onboard vehicle tool kit 396 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Entertainment, Communication 6 tance 403 Multi-function hook 321 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 34 tance 402 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Opening and closing 81 Entertainment and Communication 6 Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digital Music track, gesture control 58 Key 91 Operating concept, iDrive 43 Operation, app 56 Operation via voice 51
427 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 428
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Power failure 398 Outside air, see AUC 292 Power Meter, see Power Display 168 Overwintering, care 413 Power windows 110 Owner's Manual, printed 16 Pressure test tire, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW Intelli‐ tor 369 gent Personal Assistant 57 Pressure, tires 355 Printed onboard literature 16 P Profiles, see Driver profiles 68 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 45 Paint, car care 410 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 72 tection system 113 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 109 Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ Panic mode 109 tion system 111 Panorama View, see Surround View 266 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 46 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 112 Park Distance Control PDC 258 Q Parked car ventilation, see Stationary climate control 301 Queuing Assistant, see Assisted Driving Parking aid, see PDC 258 Plus 253 Parking assistant 274 Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging ca‐ Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 266 ble 344 Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 143 Parking brake 143 R Parking lights 180 Parts and accessories 8 Racing track 330 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Radiator fluid 391 Automatic Curb Monitor 123 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Pathway lighting 181 tertainment and Communication 6 Pathway lighting, switching on 84 Rain sensor 148 Pathway lines, rearview camera 265 Rear automatic climate control 295 Payload, technical data 415 Rear automatic climate control, lock control ele‐ PDC Park Distance Control 258 ments 297 Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 206 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ Pedestrian protection, acoustic 136 ing 233 Performance Control 288 Rear collision preparation 220 Performance display, see Sport displays 175 Rear collision warning, see Rear collision prepa‐ Personal data, deleting 67 ration 220 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 68 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 397 Personal settings 67 Rear seat backrests, folding down 322 Person warning with braking function 203 Rear Traffic Alert 279 Phone, connecting 72 Rearview camera, see Surround View 266 Plastic parts, care 412 Rearview camera, without Surround View 264 Possible gestures, gesture control 58 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 122 PostCrash - iBrake 225 Rear-view mirrors, interior 124 Power Display, instrument cluster 168 Rear window defroster 294 POWER, driving with combustion engine 135 Rear window wiper, operation 149
428 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 429
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated- Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for charcoal filter 294 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Recirculated-air mode 292 RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 363 Recommended fuel grade 388 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Recommended tire brands 362 tertainment, Communication 6 Recuperation, adaptive 339 Rubber components, care 411 Recuperative braking, see Energy recovery 139 Run-flat tire 363 Refueling 352 Regular charging 336 S Remote 3D View 273 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ Safe braking 328 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key/Key cation 6 Card 91 Remote control, see Vehicle key 81 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Remote control, universal 304 passenger seat 119 Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 120 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Safety belts 118 tion 6 Safety belts, care 412 Remote Software Upgrade 60 Safety locks, doors and windows 134 Removable ball head 333 Safety of the hybrid system 15 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 397 Safety package, see Active Protection 225 Replacing light diodes, see Lights and bulbs 397 Safety switch, windows 111 Replacing parts 396 Safety systems, see Airbags 187 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 84 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 191 Replacing, wheels and tires 361 Saving fuel 335 Reporting safety malfunctions 13 Screen Mirroring, connection 77 RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control Screen, see Control Display 46 ACC 238 Sealant, see Mobility System 364 RES CNCL button, cruise control 236 Search for charging stations, see Owner's Reserve warning, see Range 169 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Commu‐ Reset settings, vehicle 66 nication 6 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 371 Seat and armrest heating 126 Reset, vehicle configuration 66 Seat heating 126 Reset, vehicle settings 66 Seat heating, climate control rules 128 RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 238 Seating position for children 130 RESUME button, cruise control 236 Seats and head restraints 115 Retreaded tires 362 Seats, front 115 Reversing Assistant 280 Seat ventilation, climate control rules 128 Roadside parking lights 180 Securing, cargo 321 Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 112 Selection list in instrument cluster 173 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 305 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 150 RON recommended fuel grade 388 Self-leveling suspension, see Two-axle ride level Roofliner 38 control 285 Roof-mounted luggage rack 330 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 363 Rope for tow-starting/towing 407 Sensors, care 412 Service and warranty 9
429 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 430
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis‐ Snow chains 368 tance 403 Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 395 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ Sockets, electrical devices 309 tance 402 Soft-close automatic, doors 104 Service notifications 170 Software Update, see Remote Software Up‐ Service requirements, see Condition Based grade 60 Service CBS 394 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐ Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual grade 60 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 403 tion 6 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ SET button, Active Cruise Control 238 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 SET button, cruise control 236 Speech recognition 51 Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with Speed Limit Assist 247 Stop&Go function 238 Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 234 Setting, Control Display 65 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 171 Settings, general 63 Speed Limit Info 171 Settings, locking/unlocking 106 Speed warning 65 Settings, seats and head restraints 115 Sport displays 175 Setup Wizard 68 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Shift paddles on the steering wheel 150 Control 140 Side airbag 187 SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Side collision mitigation 217 trol 140 Side parking aid, Surround View 268 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 150 Side parking aid without Surround View 263 SPORT STANDARD, see Driving Dynamics Side protection aid, Surround View, see Side Control 140 parking aid 268 Stability control systems 228 Side protection aid without Surround View, see Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging Side parking aid 263 cable 344 Signaling, horn 34 Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 342 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 nals from the vehicle 106 Standby state, idle state and drive-ready Sitting safely 115 state 39 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 112 Start/stop, automatic function 137 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 414 Start/Stop button 137 Smartphone, connecting 72 Starting aid terminals 405 Smartphone Integration, Android Auto prepara‐ Starting, see Drive-ready state 40 tion 78 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 40 Smartphone Integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐ Stationary climate control 301 tion 78 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Entertainment and Communication 6 Status control display, tires 371 Smartphone, using via voice activation 54 Status information, iDrive 44 Smoker's package 307 Status of Owner's Manual 8 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Status, vehicle 176 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Steering and Lane Control Assistant 249 cation 6
430 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 431
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Steering Assistant, see Steering and Lane Con‐ T trol Assistant 249 Steering column adjustment 124 Tachometer 168 Steering, see Integral Active Steering 233 Tailgate, automatic 102 Steering wheel, adjusting 124 Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐ Steering wheel, buttons 34 vation 98 Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic Tailgate, vehicle key 83 transmission 150 Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 397 Steptronic transmission 150 Tank capacity 415 Storage, charging cable 344 Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 352 Storage compartment, cargo area 322 Tank vent 352 Storage compartment, center console 316 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 Storage compartments 315 Technical data 414 Storage compartments, locations 315 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Storage, tires 363 Entertainment and Communication 6 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 125 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Store seat position, see Memory function 125 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐ Temperature, automatic climate control 290 tion 125 Temperature display, see External tempera‐ Storing the vehicle 413 ture 169 Stowing, cargo 321 Text message, Check Control 162 Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 108 area 321 Thermal camera, see Night Vision 206 Suitable devices 73 Thigh support 116 Suitable mobile phones 73 Third-party providers 54 Summer tires, tread 360 Tilt alarm sensor 109 Sun visor 307 Tilt, backrest 116 Sun visor, sliding 307 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Supplementary Owner's Manuals 16 Automatic Curb Monitor 123 Supplementary text message 162 Time 63 Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐ Tire brands, recommended 362 ing 126 Tire damage 360 Surround View 266 Tire identification marks 358 Surround View, gesture control 58 Tire inflation pressure 355 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 376 trol 140 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 376 Swinging of trailer, see Trailer stabilization con‐ Tire pressure 355 trol 333 Tire Pressure Monitor 369 Switches, see Cockpit 34 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 371 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 364 ics Control 140 Tires and wheels 355 Switching off the engine, see Drive-ready Tires, changing 361 state 40 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 364 Symbols and displays 7 Tire settings 370 SYNC program, automatic climate control 293 Tires, run-flat 363 Tire tread 360
431 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 432
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ U tainment and Communication 6 Tools 396 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 110 Top View, see Surround View 266 Units, see Measuring units 64 Torque display, see Sport displays 175 Universal remote control 304 Touchpad, Controller 49 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 150 Tow bar 407 Unlocking, automatic 107 Tow fitting 407 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 81 Towing 406 Unlocking, settings 106 Tow rope 407 Unlocking, vehicle key 82 Tow-starting 406 Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 327 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 376 Updates made after the editorial deadline 8 Traction control 230 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 60 TRACTION, driving dynamics 230 Upholstery material care 411 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Upper backrest, front 117 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 USB connection 79 Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving USB port, position in vehicle 310 Plus 253 Used battery, disposing of 399 Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane Use, intended 8 Control Assistant 249 Trailer hitch, care 412 V Trailer hitch, removable ball head 333 Trailer hitch, view of rearview camera 265 Valet parking mode 105 Trailer hitch, view of Surround View 268 Vanity mirror 307 Trailer loads 415 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ Trailer stabilization control 333 ing 233 Trailer towing 331 Vehicle battery 397 Trailer towing, activation 333 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ Trailer towing, technical data 415 tance 401 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 154 Vehicle, breaking in 326 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 150 Vehicle care 410 Transporting children safely 130 Vehicle care products 410 Travel & Comfort System 314 Vehicle configuration, reset 66 Tread, tires 360 Vehicle equipment 7 Trip data 174 Vehicle identification number 12 Triple turn signal activation 147 Vehicle key 81 Trip odometer, see Trip data 174 Vehicle key, additional 84 Trunk, see Cargo area 320 Vehicle key, integrated key 95 Turning circle line, Surround View 268 Vehicle key, loss 84 Turning circle, vehicle 414 Vehicle key, malfunction 84 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 265 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 84 Turn signal, indicator light 165 Vehicle key with display, malfunction 89 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and Vehicle key with display, see BMW display bulbs 397 key 85 Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 147 Vehicle paint, care 410 Two-axle ride level control 285 Vehicle status 176
432 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 Seite 433
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Vehicle washing 409 Wheel base, vehicle 414 Ventilation 294 Wheels and tires 355 Venting, see Stationary climate control 301 Wheels, changing 361 Venting, see Ventilation 294 Widgets, iDrive 44 Vent, see Ventilation 294 Width, vehicle 414 Version Software, see Remote Software Up‐ Wi-Fi connection 76 grade 60 WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 76 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 223 Wi-Fi hotspot 76 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ Window, defrosting 294 tertainment and Communication 6 Windows, powered 110 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Windshield, defrosting 294 Voice activation, gesture control 58 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 392 Voice activation, see BMW Intelligent Personal Windshield washer nozzles 149 Assistant 55 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 147 Voice activation system 51 Winter storage, vehicle 413 Voice command response 51 Winter tires 362 Voice control 51 Winter tires, tread 360 Volume, gesture control 58 Wiper blades, replacing 396 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 392 W Wiper, fold-away position 150 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 147 Wake word 51 Wiper system 147 Warning/indicator lights 162 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless Warning against cross traffic 281 charging tray 311 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Blind Wireless charging tray for smartphones 311 spot collision warning 213 WLAN connection 76 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross Wood parts, care 411 traffic warning 281 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 44 Warning messages, see Check Control 161 Working on, hybrid system 15 Warning triangle 401 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 396 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 392 X Washer nozzles, windshield 149 Washer system 147 xDrive 230 Washing systems, automatic 409 Washing, vehicle 409 Wash view, Surround View 268 Water, hybrid system 15 Water on roads 328 Water, see Condensation water under the parked vehicle 329 Website, see Internet 6 Weights 415 Welcome light during unlocking 82 Welcome lights 181 Welcome screen, driver profiles 68
433 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 *BL5A10FF000Y*
01405A10FF0 ue California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20 The Ultimate Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL5A10FF000Y*
01405A10FF0 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01405A10FF0 - VI/20